Home

FuelsManager Defense Administrator Manual

1. ssse 259 Errormiessages s eoa dm e Mete vea torte dp eti aca d ER 259 Missing System File Update is Not Available 0 0 0 0 es 259 System Data File Version 4 3 ssssssssssee eee 259 Unsupported Graphic Revision in File 3401 SYM nsa 259 Databases GoOImupt iu ep d C AA Mt AM 259 Troubleshooting iier tfr eem ott o enc a e RC e e t nk tn eg 260 After Updating the Database sssssssssssee eene 261 Rename Your Database as the Local Machine Name ccce 261 Checking Your Slate 261 Rebuild Graphics and REPONS eiiean na rn A S 261 Backup EMProjeCt sita iti hi peo asa 261 Automated Data Output oo cece cere cion ono rica 263 Program Location ieie anaa i eiaeiiai deii i eia 265 Automated Data Output Configuration Dialog ssseeess 266 Configuring Automated Data Output ooo nino 270 Nita SOT EIE 270 Sample Output cuco ere b eto n d eot era iio 271 Snapshot CSVE uestes rie eed re sime eo eau t de STAR 271 Test ATM 2p ona ete ol a Aa dues 271 ADMOOSGVAE 1005 XV FuelsManager Defense TESTIS at caer ee ON 271 Calculation Methods 5 o ase a id 273 Volume correction methods sssssss e 274 Datateundlrg esu m petere tcs 274 Volume Correction Factor VCF sssssssssssees 274 Kum 274 TemperatUte x eee rre d ert ee Fe aided epe Ee ids 274 Volume correction techniques ccoo ccoo em 275 Petroleum tables sse a 275 GhemicalXt
2. Crystal Reports Interface MS Access Database See Display of WEM indication See Dispiay of on Graphics W amp M indication Reports section on Graphics for details Reports section for details End User End User ADMOOSGVAE 1005 323 FuelsManager Defense Sealing the Point in 8130 RTU The 8130 RTU is configured via a tool called ViewRTU ViewRTU can communicate with the RTU either local running on a laptop device or remotely running via FuelsManager s interface connection The ViewRTU configuration tool allows the W amp M official to apply a software seal to a particular point Once this seal is applied all parameters that affect the integrity of the point s data cannot be changed without removing the seal Parameters that effect the data integrity are specific to the point type table 1 1 below details this relationship Table 1 1 Point Type WMSeal E H FMR 131 Micropilot No Enraf 811 Yes Enraf 818 STIC No Enraf 854 Yes Enraf 867 STIC No 324 Parameters Sealed Module Chan CIU Addr ID TOI ScanCmd LevelUnits TempUnits LevelDeadband TempDeadband Module Chan CIU Addr ID TOI ScanCmd LevelUnits TempUnits LevelDeadband TempDeadband Parameter Description External Module Address Channel for Communications CIU Address Tank Gauge ID Type of Instrument Scan Commands for Instrument F ft M Meters m millimeters F Fahrenheit C CelsiusChange of St
3. Testxml xml The following is a sample of an xml file result if you use the default tank variables for one tank xml versionz 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt lt FMLogXML Version 1 0 0 gt lt Header gt ThisDocumentldentifier lt Documentidentifier gt c Program Files FuelsManager FMProject testxml xml lt Documentldentifier lt ThisDocumentldentifier gt lt ThisDocumentDateTime gt DateTime DateTimeQualifier On gt 20030328T 1513 lt DateTime gt lt ThisDocumentDateTime gt lt Header gt lt ProcessVariableBody gt lt ProcessVariableProperties gt lt LanguageCode Domain gt EN lt LanguageCode gt ADMOOSGVAE 1005 271 FuelsManager Defense 272 lt ProcessVariableProperties gt lt ProcessVariableDetails gt lt ProcessVariableLineltem gt lt LineNumber gt 0000000 lt LineNumber gt lt ProcessVariablelnformation gt lt ProcessVariable gt System Name ProcessVariableValue Value BMS1 gt lt ProcessVariable gt lt ProcessVariablelnformation gt lt LineNumber gt 0000001 lt LineNumber gt lt ProcessVariablelnformation gt lt ProcessVariable gt Point Tag lt ProcessVariableValue Value Test Tank 1 gt lt ProcessVariable gt lt ProcessVariablelnformation gt lt LineNumber gt 0000002 lt LineNumber gt lt ProcessVariablelnformation gt lt ProcessVariable gt System Date and Time lt ProcessVariableValue Value 03 28 03 15 13 48 gt lt ProcessVariable
4. Crude Oil v Use Standard Density Use Temperature Limits Correction Method Type Specific No VCF y Standard Temperature F Correction Factors Use Temperature Limits Temperature Limits let you set specific temperature parameters You can enter the specific temperature alarms that you want tied to the product Edit Product Definition m Product Name 20 chars CRUDE Description 30 chars Crude Oil gt Temperature Alarms Hiah Hig r Assignment Options Use Correction Method I Use Standard Density v Use Temperature Limits m Correction Method Type Specific no VCF vi No VCF z Standard Temperature Correction Factors NA wA Standard Density f p api Temperature Alarms High High High Low Low Low Hold Off Administrator Manual Defining system resources Importing exporting product definitions Product definitions can be imported or exported Importing allows the use of product definitions previously defined while exporting provides a backup of the product definitions All files for importing and exporting are comma delimited text files csv Step by Step n the Product Configuration dialog box select Import or Export to import export a product definition file The Choose a File to Import dialog box appears or Export Products dialog box appears Import S
5. Select the directory for the export enter the import file name and click Open The system imports the Tank nodes Unit nodes Movements or Groups from the file Administrator Manual Configuring Leak Detection FuelsManager Defense Note Leak Detection is only available with FuelsManager Professional Edition The Standard Edition will not allow access to this feature For additional information about upgrading to the Professional Edition and above please contact your Varec representative 240 Leak Detection is designed to monitor tank farms and pipelines for leak conditions and alert you to a potential environmental hazard Using the Remote Terminal Unit the Leak Detection system communicates with various leak detection systems such as interstitial monitoring vapor monitoring and pipeline leak detection systems while bringing all information back to one central computer for monitoring and reporting ease and convenience Monitoring Level Temperature Water Level and Density from field instruments or operator entry Performing analysis of sensor data looking for conditions that might indicate a leak Comparing instruments readings and calculations against alarm limits Annunciating processing and logging alarms Providing Reports Configuration of the FuelsManager Leak Detection feature is performed from the Configuration user interface and is documented in this section The procedure for run
6. Tank Points Process Data Tank Points Process Data DESCRIPTION POINT DESCRIPTION This process variable is the name by which the tank is known to the user This variable is entered when configuring the tank point but cannot be modified via Operate PRODUCT PRODUCT This process variable is the type of product contained in the tank This variable is entered when configuring the tank point but can be viewed or modified from Operate by a user with sufficient privileges The product variable contains a string that is the combination of the 20 character Product Code and the 30 character Product Description PRODUCT CODE PRODUCT CODE This variable is the product code part of the Product process variable PRODUCT DESCRIPTION PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This variable is the product description part of the Product process variable LEVEL TANK LEVEL This process variable is the current level of the tank this variable is usually measured by automatic tank gauging but can be manually entered by the operator LEVEL TIME TIME OF LAST LEVEL UPDATE This process variable is the last time that the tank level was updated This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified TEMPERATURE TANK TEMPERATURE This process variable is the current temperature of the tank this variable is usually measured by automatic tank gauging but can be manually entered by the operator TEMPERATURE TIME TIME OF LAST TEMP UPDATE
7. Administrator Manual Creating and editing tank points Edit Tank Data dialog box Vessel 1 tab SHELL THICKNESS LINING MATERIAL DATE INSTALLED TANK MATERIAL EXP COEF INSTALL TEMP CATHODIC PROTECTION OVERFILL PROTECTION SPILL PROTECTION ENABLE TANK SHELL CORRECTION SHELL INSULATION AREACOEF GAUGING SETUP TRADITIONAL GAUGING SETUP HYDROSTATIC ADMO03GVAE1005 This field allows the user to configure the thickness of the sphere s shell Used in the LPG calculation method This field allows the configuration of the type of tank lining material For reporting and information only This field allows the configuration of the date the tank was installed or build For reporting and information only This field allows the user to configure the material from which the tank shell is constructed This field is only available if the Enable Correction option is checked Used in tank shell correction calculation This field allows the user to configure the material expansion coefficient used in the tank shell correction calculations Manual entry of this value is not allowed except when the Tank Material is set to Other Used in tank shell correction calculation This field allows the configuration of the ambient temperature when the tank was installed or built This field denotes that the tank is fitted with cathodic protection Used for reporting and information only This field denot
8. Configure the historical trend data for the graphical display of the trend and of what points to graph Configure the real time trend data for the graphical display of the trend and what points to graph Configure the capabilities to print the display Record Delete new macros in Operate Execute existing macros in Operate Capable to add database points Capable to edit database points from original content Capable to copy database points Capable to rename database points Capable to delete database points Capable to Import Export alarm groups from different data bases Browse the point database in Operate to define open or restore any point variable to monitor Defines whether can access the Point menu bar option Configure new product movement paths via the Operate program Without this user right all new movement paths must be configure via the FuelsManager Configuration application Configure start definitions within the resources menu to de fine functions to run at the start Administrator Manual Users and Groups Execute start definitions in Operate under the EXECUTE START CONFIGURE LEAK DETECTION RUN LEAK DETECTION TESTS DEFINITIONS Tools menu CONFIGURE MOVEMENT Modify the format of the existing summary add VIEW delete insert and modify columns select column units set column headings Configure the Leak Detection operations in FuelsManager Configuration Run Leak Detection tests on
9. This variable is a coded variable value that displays a status of either Normal or ETA HiHi Level if the ETA High High level alarm is active see above for details of ETA alarms ALARM ETA LOLO LEVEL LOW LOW LEVEL ETA ALARM This variable is a coded variable value that displays a status of either Normal or ETA LoLo Level if the ETA Low Low level alarm is active see above for details of ETA alarms ALARM ETA LOW LEVEL LOW LEVEL ETA ALARM This variable is a coded variable value that displays a status of either Normal or ETA Low Level if the ETA Low level alarm is active see above for details of ETA alarms ALARM MOVEMENT FLOW LEVEL CHANGE This variable is a coded variable value that displays a status of either Normal or Movement Alarm if the Movement Alarm is active see above for details of the Movement Alarm ALARM NO FLOW NO FLOW This variable is a coded variable value that displays a status of either Normal or No Flow if the No Flow alarm is active see above for details of the No Flow Alarm ALARM REVERSE FLOW REVERSE PRODUCT FLOW This variable is a coded variable value that displays a status of either Normal or Reverse Flow if the Reverse Flow alarm is active see above for details of the Reverse Flow Alarm ALARM TANK IN TEST TANK IN TEST MODE ALARM This variable is a coded variable value that displays a status of either Normal or Testing if the tank mode has been set to Test by the operator see above for
10. and in the Add menu oo movement of the Drawing a line The Line tool draws straight lines at any angle ADMOOSGVAE 1005 175 FuelsManager Defense 176 Drawing a polyline The Polyline tool draws multiple connected lines grouped as a single object Step by Step Select the Polyline tool or select Add and click Polyline Click on area to define first point Move the cross hair cursor to the next point and click again As you move and click the polyline appears Clicking the right mouse button deletes the last line segment Note Holding down the SHIFT key while drawing forces orthogonal movement of the line vertical horizontal or at 45 degrees from previous point Repeat above step for each additional point After the last point press the ENTER key to complete the polyline Drawing a rectangle The Rectangle tool draws rectangles and squares Step by Step Select the Rectangle tool or select Add and click Rectangle Click on area to define the first corner Drag the cursor and release the mouse button at desired size Note To draw a square follow the procedure for drawing a rectangle but hold down the Ctrl key while you drag the cursor Drawing a polygon Use the Polygon tool to draw polygons multi sided closed objects The user can create polygons with up to 25 points 24 clicks Step by Step Select the Polygon tool or select Add and click Polygon Click on area to define first
11. 366 Administrator Manual Tank configuration data Tank Configuration Data This parameter defines the height at which the floating roof is fully floating on the product At this point the full volumetric effect of the floating roof is applied to the volume calculations The area between the Landed Height and the Floating Height is known as the Critical Zone FuelsManager only uses this parameter if the Roof type Roof Mass not in Strap is selected otherwise this parameter is ignored ROOF MASS This parameter defines the weight of the floating roof this value is used together with the Roof Type selection current density and strapping density to calculate the volumetric effect of the floating roof ROOF TYPE This parameter defines the type of floating roof possible values are No Tank Roof no floating roof correction Fixed Roof no floating roof correction Roof Mass in Strap roof mass is accounted for in the tank strapping table FuelsManager corrects the roof volume to compensate for the difference between the current product density and the density of the product when the tank strapping table was created Roof Mass not in Strap the roof mass has not been included in the tank strapping table FuelsManager applies the volumetric effect of the roof to the volume correction calculations in addition to compensating for the difference between the current product density and the density of the product when the tank stra
12. 610 5 778 5 779 82 824 5 1075 653 778 5 779 824 824 1 1075 800 824 824 1 1164 0 500 1 200 Temp Range 18 95 C 18 125 C 18 150 C 18 90 C 18 125 C 18 150 C 18 150 C 18 125 18 125 C 18 150 C 18 95 C 18 125 C 18 150 C 18 90 C 18 125 C 18 150 C 18 150 C 18 125 C 18 125 C 18 150 C 18 95 C 18 125 C 18 150 C 18 90 C 18 125 C 18 150 C 18 125 C 18 150 C Not Specified Administrator Manual Volume correction techniques Generalized Crude Density in kg m 610 5 778 5 18 95 C Oil 779 824 18 125 C 824 5 1075 18 150 C China GB T 60A 59A Generalized Crude Density 20 C in kg m 653 778 5 18 90 C Oil 779 824 18 125 C 824 1075 18 150 C 600 59D Generalized Density 20 C in kg m 800 824 18 90 C Lubricating Oils 824 1 1164 18 150 C ADMOOSGVAE 1005 277 FuelsManager Defense Chemical tables Correction Type Table Entry ASTM D1555 F VCF 60 F ASTM D1555 F 1980 ASTM D1555M C VCF 15 C ASTM D1555M C 1980 Japan ASTM D1555 C Japan Chemical C 278 Product 300 F 148 9 C Aromatic 350 F 176 7 C Aromatic Benzene Cumene Cyclo hexane Ethyl benzene Mixed Xylene o Xylene p Xylene Styrene Toluene 300 F 148 9 C Aromatic 350 F 176 7 C Aromatic Benzene Cumene Cyclo hexane Ethyl benzene Mixed Xylene o Xylene p Xylene Styrene Toluene Chemical Applications Chemi
13. Reset Find Wtr Find Datum Lvl Reset Out of Service Reset 387 FuelsManager Defense Tank strapping table The file format defined below is the format of strapping table files exported by FuelsManager 874969854 09 22 97 19 10 54 Vol Test Tank 6B fixed roof 27 46 64 Level Units ft inch 16th Volume Units U S Gallon Mass Units Pound 0 Roof Mass 60 Strap Temperature 50 Strap Density 5 Pin Height aka Critical Low 7 Critical Zone aka Critical High 21 21 of strapping entries 0 00 00 0 00 Entry 1 0 01 00 2085 00 Entry 2 0 02 00 4212 00 Entry 3 0 03 00 6250 00 Entry 4 0 06 00 12512 00 Entry 5 0 10 00 20813 00 Entry 6 1 00 00 25015 00 Entry 7 2 00 00 50123 00 Entry 8 3 00 00 75045 00 Entry 9 4 00 00 100000 00 Entry 10 6 00 00 150762 00 Entry 11 10 00 00 250094 00 Entry 12 11 06 00 287645 00 Entry 13 12 00 00 300184 00 Entry 14 20 00 00 500003 00 Entry 15 23 00 00 575034 00 Entry 16 27 00 00 675111 00 Entry 17 30 00 00 750197 00 Entry 18 35 00 00 875096 00 Entry 19 388 Administrator Manual Tank strapping table 40 00 00 1000000 00 Entry 21 ADMOOSGVAE 1005 389 FuelsManager Defense 390 Administrator Manual Index A Actions Menu 33 ACTIVE 154 Active Mode 52 Active Tank 198 Adding Pages 211 Administrative Tools 17 Administra
14. Select Condition Index from the Master menu to open the Select Global Dynamic Conditions dialog Click New to open the Edit Dynamic Conditions dialog Type a Description for the first condition Select the Variable Type Select the Condition Type The Display Styles availability are dependent on the Variable Type selected Click the Select button to open the Build Condition Code dialog The available Code types is based on the Variable Type selected earlier 184 Administrator Manual Visual Dynamic Tools Build Condition Code dialog Build Condition Code Codes Select Condition Code Select Test Value Palette Select Color 1 Palette Select Color 2 Cancel To select the Condition Code click the Codes button and select from the list To select a Test Value click the Variable button and select it from the list To select a color for the condition click the Palette button next to Color 1 and select the color you want to represent the condition If you want the object to blink repeat this step with Select Color 2 Click OK to return to the Edit Dynamic Conditions dialog box Click Append to add your selections to the Conditions list Continue appending conditions until your Dynamic Condition is complete Onthe Edit Dynamic Conditions dialog box click OK Assigning a condition Dynamic Conditions can be assigned to a specific graphic or symbol so that it represents those condit
15. Type in the Help file name in the edit box Click Add The help file name is added to the list Click OK The file is now available for assignment Start definitions Start Definitions provides access to other programs through the Operate program This allows the Operate program to always be running while users need to use other programs For example you can run Windows Calculator Excel for spreadsheet editing or Notepad for shift logs Start Definitions dialog box Start Definitions Display Name Application Definition Simulator C Program FilesFuelsManageriFMToolsiFMSim exe Throughput Calcs C Program Files FuelsManageriTanks exe it ose Display Name Adobe Acrobat Reader Application C Program Filesi4dobetAcrobat 5 0AcrobatAcrobat exe Initial Path Parameters OK Cancel DISPLAY NAME Name of the defined application to be seen in the Operate program APPLICATION Name of the application to run when the display name is selected in the Operate program INITIAL PATH Beginning path of the application PARAMETERS Parameters to be passed into the application 66 Administrator Manual Defining system resources Creating a start definition ADMOOSGVAE 1005 67 FuelsManager Defense 68 Administrator Manual Administering Alarms FuelsManager Defense 70 Operate application toolbar includes the Alarm line Operate application includes a complet
16. You will get this message if you created your graphics and symbols in a version previous to 4 0 This will not keep the update from successfully running But you should make sure that your graphics and symbols are displaying correctly and if not manually correct them Database is Corrupt You may get a Database is Corrupt message This can reflect a couple situations Any of your data files may be from a version previous to 4 0 Your data files are not consistent you may have a 4 0 movement database and a 4 2 product database Whatever the reason is the last update statement in the FMSystemUpdate window tells you where the corruption was found For example it may list the Movement Data database MoveData dat and MoveSchedule dat ADMOOSGVAE 1005 259 FuelsManager Defense 260 Troubleshooting A possible solution to the Database is Corrupt error is to rename any database files that the update utility finds as corrupt For example in the Screen above rename the MoveData dat to MoveDataold dat and rename MoveSchedule dat to MoveScheduleold dat By doing this the utility will skip these renamed files they are not updated automatically After running the utility you need to manually update these data You can also try updating the software version by version 4 0 to 4 1 then to 4 2 4 3 and then 6 0 This will update the databases as you go along negating the need to use the FM System Update utility As a last
17. 1000 Where NW Net Weight NSV Net Standard Volume GW E Gas weight GOV Gross Observed Volume Vmax Total Tank Capacity p15 15 C liquid density p Gas Pressure GT Gas Temperature M Mole constant Food oil method NW GOV x p15 Where NW Net Weight GOV Gross Observed Volume p15 15 liquid density Chinese Correction Method If the GB T Volume Correction Method is selected the following additional mass calculation options are available Sinopec Method NW NSV x p20 1 1 G x 1 W PetroChina Method NW NSV x 1 W x p20 0 0011 ADMO0O0SGVAE 1005 297 FuelsManager Defense 298 Where NSV Net Standard Volume Sinopec method NSV in liters PetroChina method NSV in M3 W Water percentage BSW G Floating root mass kg p20 Density of product 20 C Kg m NW is returned in kg for Sinopec method NW is returned in metric tones for PetroChina method Available volume available mass Available Volume is defined as the amount of net or gross volume available for pumping out of a tank It is calculated as 0 if one or more of the following conditions are true Level lt Low level Alarm Low Low level Alarm or User Defined Level lt Water Volume Level lt Minimum level as defined in the strap table If these conditions are not met the available volume calculation is defined as using the following equations Net Available Volume NAV Cur
18. A A esc e e P De RE RARO Ruth 22 FuelsManager System Architecture sssssssssss cnn 23 FuelsManager Services 5 caede ben me ed etc taeda co acd 25 EMSystembMAaLHager 5 id perte ultus detur me eir Pee eile eec e 25 Systerm Start UP aerea ed ede rp etr emo ee e len d a 25 System SDUtdoWEtsu ems cede cedet at ated empate ete eee rere a 25 ADMO03GVAE1005 FuelsManager Defense System ReSOUFG8S aet ette tp ee e lee erit a 25 Independent System Files ssssssssssseeeeeennene 25 M ster System Files co cnet e P e e Me ales 25 DataManager vincia ter ra ra I ea Foe et ble c pa a Hoa ce 26 DataManager functions ssssssssssssseeeeemeene nnns 26 D tabase storage o eee ta de n i a P RR D HR 26 Database time zai ert peptide Deren D Ee HEROS 26 COMMManhager tira pe Ced eter eed eie Pene erede E te 26 CommbManager FUNCIONS is et veis 26 ReportMarager d etre paene pet td re ate Eo tette te vato vd 27 ArchIVeManager tada tie RAUS 27 FuelsManager Applications ssssss em 28 FuelsManager Configuration ssssssssseeee eene nenne 28 Operatoria 28 DA Wi EE 29 Ri dl e dns 29 Selecting remote FuelsManager systems ssssssssse 30 Secutilty oot e ette Eee a e odi ad ap oe toot 31 Microsoft Windows and FuelsManager Security 32 Opening the Security Window sss 32 Actions Merl uds mereri ect fal Pesce t ula efus eat
19. ADMO03GVAE1005 305 FuelsManager Defense 306 calculate molecular weight from liquid density at 15 C as X DENL15 500 33 3333 MW 43 4 4 x X 1 35 x X 0 15 x X calculate critical temperature from liquid density at 15 C as TC 364 13 33 x X 8 5 x X 1 833 x X calculate critical pressure from liquid density at 15 C as PC 43 2 283 x X 0 05 x X 0 0667 x X calculate reduced temperature from vapor temperature and critical temperature as TR TV 273 2 TC Where TR Temperature of vapor calculate reduced pressure from vapor space pressure and critical pressure as PR P 1 013 PC Where P pressure in vapor space calculate W as W 0 214 0 034333 x X 0 005 x X 0 0001667 x X calculate z by locating the smallest root of Z Z Z x A B B A x B where A 042747 LI x m TR B 0 08564 x PR TR L 1 0 48 1 574 x W 0 176 x W x 1 SQR TR This may be solved by Newton Raphson as follows Z 1 5 20 F Z3 Z2 Z x A B B3 A x B IF ABS F lt 0 0001 THEN 70 F1 3xZ 2xZ A B B Z Z F F1 GOTO 20 Administrator Manual LPG quantity calculation from liquid density check range of Z 70 IFZ lt 0 20RZ gt 2THENZ 1 RETURN This routine always appears to converge and to give Z in the range 0 2 to 1 which is correct for typical LPG storage conditions Vapor density is calculated from molecular weight vapor temperature vapor space pressure and Z
20. Audit The FuelsManager audit feature allows the administrator to track when and by whom configuration changes are made Once enabled changes made to the audited parameters are logged to the Windows Event log under a FuelsManager specific log called FM Audit The audit log is useful in tracking down what parameters have been changed when diagnosing a problem FuelsManager provides the ability to turn audit logging on and off for six areas of configuration data Reviewing the Event Log CHANGES TO TAG Monitor and record any changes made to the CONFIGURATION configurations of any tag CHANGES TO USERS Monitor and record any changes made to the list of Users CHANGES TO W amp M Monitor and record any changes made to the CALIBRATION SEALS W amp M Calibration Seals ADMOOSGVAE 1005 Note It is recommended that the audit log only be enabled after FuelsManager configuration is complete Enabling this feature during configuration will result in many useless log entries 47 FuelsManager Defense 48 Administrator Manual Setting System Parameters FuelsManager Defense 50 The FuelsManager Configuration application appears as a window containing a menu bar Working with Configuration Top level users such as administrators system engineers and maintenance personnel use the Configuration application to configure and control the FuelsManager system Configuration and control features in
21. C Active None Standby System Selection F elsManager Configuration can be used to configure the local FuelsManager application or a remote FuelsManager on the LAN or WAN Nearly all FuelsManager Configuration dialogs contain a System Name field and a Select or Browse button that allows you to pick which FuelsManager system is to be configured In this case the user can select a different server on the network by clicking Select which opens the Select FuelsManager System dialog Then choose a different system and click Select Select FuelsManager System ES System WTESTWS15 FuelsManager Systems WHELPDESK XP 2 WFLA WSMART WAS WTESTWS15 WAWUNDERM Display Options IV Show LAN Servers Show TCPAP Servers ADMOOSGVAE 1005 Note Setting subsystem run modes must be done after a new installation The system defaults everything to shutdown and none Note The Select FuelsManager System dialog only displays active FuelsManager installations If your System is not listed make sure the appropriate manager is active Select FuelsManager System dialog box 51 FuelsManager Defense Note You can also select the directories the system uses to store and access FuelsManager files These selections are described in the Setting Up FuelsManager File Directories 52 Current Mode The Current Mode options let the user change the current operating mode Selecting Shutdown Standby or Active immedia
22. Charge Movement Type 221 Checksums Weights and Measures 328 Chemical tables 278 Client 14 Coded Variable Creating 62 Deleting 62 Coded Variable to Numeric Lookup Table 137 Coded Variables 61 Importing 62 colors User Defined 174 Column Totals 206 Comm data source selecting 134 CommManager 26 87 Functions 26 communication drivers 3 Communications 391 FuelsManager Defense Weights and Measures Seals 328 Communications Interface Configuration 148 Communications Menu 148 Condition Index 195 Configuration 28 50 Exiting 50 Working with 50 Configuration Parameters Tank Point 315 Continuous AnalysisTank analysis types 242 continuous data 20 coordinates Displaying mouse coordinates 173 Copying Single Objects 191 Correction Method Assignment Options 57 Correction Methods Japanese 288 291 293 Correction volume 290 Creating A Modifier 63 Labels in a Summary Report 204 Reports 11 Tables in a Dynamic Report 209 Totals and Averages 210 Values in a Dynamic Report 210 Current Tank 198 D Data Access OPC 90 Data Format 88 Data Rounding 274 Data source 86 392 archival 159 160 Assigning 130 Clearing 133 Data sources bit field 140 Database Input and Output points 64 Inserting a Value 177 Multiple 21 Real Time 21 Real time 159 Storage 26 Time 26 Database IO Connections 131 Database is Corrupt message 259 Database P
23. Date Installed Cathodic Protection Overfill Protection Spill Protection Note Leak Detection data from the Vessel 1 page will appear on the Leak Test Reports Edit Tank Data dialog Edit Tank Data gt SIZEMORE Tank Farm Tank Tank 4 Vessel 1 page General Volume Process Data Alarms Vessel 1 Vessel 2 Wi amp M Strap Water Table Leak Detection Characteristics Optional Protection ir Tank Shell Correction Cathodic Protection Enable Landed Height ftin 16th Overfil Protection mis Floating Height 10 00 00 ftin 16th Spill Protection SEEN fi 009 Roof Mass 0 00 lb Gauging Setup Roof Type No Tank Roof y Traditional Hydrostatic Hybrid Tank Geometry Vert Cylinder v Pressure Transmitter Setup OffSet PSI Height ftin 16th Tank Volume 0 00 gal US T Top fo 00 01 Tank Height 0 00 00 ft in 16th Middle p pmo Tank Radius 0 00 00 ftin16th Bottom 7 mo Shell Thickness 0 00 00 ftin 16th TO Matera a Minimum Level 1 00 01 ft in 16th CAO 8 L Density Deadband API Tank Material Mild Steel 7 Use Local Gra msee ExpCoet 1 24e 005 Elevation 0 k IntalTemp D F Latitude 7 7 DMS Level OffSet 0 00 0 ftin 16th Cancel 250 Administrator Manual Vessel 2 Vessel 2 The type of gauge probe used on the tank is configured from the Vessel 2 page The user has the option to chose from all current FuelsManager supported gauges
24. Energy Length Mass ADMO0O0SGVAE 1005 UNIT NAME British Thermal Unit IT Calorie Joule Kilowatt Hour Watt Hour 16ths of an Inch Centimeters Feet Feet in 16th Feet in 8th Inches Kilometers Meters Mile statute Millimeters Yard English Tons Gram Kilogram Long Tons Metric Tons Ounce Pound Short Tons Pounds thousands ABREV BTU cal kWH WH 16th cm ft in 16 ft in 8 km ton e kg ton l ton m Oz ton s Mlbs INDEX Metric English 200 201 202 v 204 Y 203 024 021 026 Y 027 025 023 022 Y 029 020 028 065 060 061 Y 067 062 063 064 Y 066 068 377 FuelsManager Defense UNIT TYPE UNIT NAME ABREV INDEX Metric English Mass Flow Rate Grams per Hour g hr 145 Grams per Minute g min 144 Grams per Second g sec 143 Kilograms per day kg day 149 Kilograms per Hour kg hr 148 Kilograms per Minute kg min 147 Kilograms per Second kg sec 146 v Long Tons per Day ton l day 142 Long Tons per Hour ton lI hr 141 Long Tons per Minute ton l min 140 Metric Tons per Day ton m day 136 Metric Tons per Hour ton m hour 135 Metric Tons per Minute ton m min 134 M pounds per Day M pounds per Hour M pounds per Minute M pounds per Second Pounds per Day lb day 133 Pounds per Hour Ib hr 132 Pounds per Minute Ib min 131 Pounds per Second lb sec 130 Y Short Tons per Day ton s day 139 Short Tons per Hour ton s hr 138 Sho
25. Horizontal 20 Offset 10 Vertical 20 Offset 10 Major Div 5 Grid Colors Grid Lines Grid Major Divisions Major Center Line Center Cencel Display grid check box Selecting the Display Grid option turns on the display of grid lines on the Draw main screen When selected a check mark appears next to the Display Grid menu option under the View menu Clearing the check box removes the grid lines from the Draw main screen and removes the check from the Display Grid menu option Save options on exit checkbox Selecting the Save Options on Exit option sets the current options as the Draw default settings When you close Draw the system will keep the Grid Spacing settings and use them when you open the program again Clearing the Save Options on Exit option sets the system to revert to the original default Grid Spacing settings when you close Draw Horizontal and vertical Enter the number of points you want between the horizontal Vertical grid lines Horizontal and vertical offset Enter the number of pixels you want to move the entire grid You can only enter a number less than the current Horizontal vertical setting To move the grid to the left or up enter a negative number in the field Administrator Manual Draw application Major Div Major Div lets you type the number of vertical and horizontal lines that separate the major division lines The major division lines start with the two vertical and horizontal center
26. Hydro Definition Mode 129 Hydrostatic Calculations 311 l I O Points 153 Importing Movement Data 238 Inactive Tank 198 Independent System Files 25 Index Product Index 56 Indicator Weights and Measures 334 Input Point 85 Process Data 371 Records 166 Input Source triggered point 104 Input Output Point Variable Format 98 input output point Details 99 Input Sources 100 Install CD ROM 2 Install Wizard 8 393 FuelsManager Defense Installing FuelsManager 7 Modifying 9 Upgrading from 4 3 10 Interface Communications interface mode 154 Locked interfaces 151 interface creating new communications 149 Inventory Management 4 Inventory Reports 198 J Japanese Correction Methods 296 K Kaiji Kentei Kyoukai 294 Keyboard Template 2 L Label 199 LAT Terminal Server Port 150 Leak Detection 71 129 240 Edit Tank Data dialog 252 Level 274 Rate 318 Licensing Options 4 liquid density from LPG Quantity 300 Liquid Hydrocarbon Gas Table 279 Local Alarms 75 Input 87 selecting a local data source 135 Serial Port 150 Logic Weights and Measures 336 Lookup Tables 394 translation table 137 LPG calculation Quantity 300 Sample 308 Maintenance 154 Communications 154 Major 173 Major Div 173 Make 194 Managing files Draw files 192 Manual Data Source 87 data source 133 Input 87 mass Available Mass 298 Mass Analysis Le
27. This process variable is the last time that the tank temperature was updated This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified DENSITY PRODUCT DENSITY This process variable is the current observed density of the product at the current temperature this variable can be measured by automatic tank gauging manually entered by the operator or calculated by FuelsManager from the Std Density and current temperature DENSITY TIME TIME OF LAST DENSITY UPDATE This process variable is the last time that the Density value was updated This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified WATER LEVEL WATER BOTTOM LEVEL ADMO0O0SGVAE 1005 343 FuelsManager Defense Tank Points Process Data This process variable is the level of water in the tank this variable can be measured by automatic tank gauging or manually entered by the operator WATER LEVEL TIME TIME OF LAST WATER LEVEL This process variable is the last time that the Water Level value was updated This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified BSW BOTTOM SEDIMENT AND WATER This process variable is the percentage of impurities bottoms sediment and water in the product if required the operator usually manually enters this variable however the variable can be linked to automatic gauging systems if required BSW TIME TIME OF LAST BS amp W UPDATE This process variable is the las
28. Water Table information Step by Step Select the Add or Insert button to enter the tank strapping table directly into the grid or use the Import button to import strapping table data from a FuelsManager formatted strapping table text file TST Choose either Strap Table or Water Table The table grid display will adjust to either choice Enter the strapping table density and temperature in the Density and Temperature fields Select the strapping table type innage or outage in the Strap table Type group Edit Tank Data gt WSIZEMORE TankFarm Tank 4 Tank General Volume Process Data Alarms Vessel 1 Vessel 2 W amp M Strap Water Table Leak Detection 0 00 00 0 00 Strap ft in 16th gal US 1 z 2 40 00 00 1 200 000 00 Stap C Water C Hydro Def Density API Temperature e000 F Strap Table Type c c Strap Water Table Mode c c Number Of Table Entries 2 Export Import Cancel STRAPPING These columns display the current tank strapping table TABLE GRID information in addition the user can edit any particular COLUMNS entry by clicking on and editing the appropriate cell The column headings reflect the current level and volume engineering units for the tank WATER TABLE table grid display to list either the Strap Water or Hydro HYDRO DEF definition tables Selection of Water and Hydro Def tables will disable the Strap table Type fiel
29. 226 Test 137 Reverse 167 Unload 197 Find Wtr Lvl 227 Testing 138 Right 168 Unlocked 198 Find Datum 228 Stopped 385 Administrator Manual Coded Variables 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 Xtr by Diff Vol In Progress Advisory Complete Overfill Minimum Maximum RTU Master RTU Slave TIWAY Master TIWAY Slave MODBUS Master MODBUS Slave HART Master HART Slave Peer to Peer Local Diag IMUX Master IMUX Slave LRC CRC Passive L amp J Master ADMO03GVAE1005 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 L amp J Slave Enraf Master Enraf Slave GPP GPU CIU Block Freeze Lock Test Get ID Set Gauge Data Get Stored Data Rejected Auto Configure Redundant Independent Download Upload Whessoe Bus TSU Slave AB Slave AB Master Standard 275 276 277 278 279 280 28 _ 29 Enhanced Follow Level LON MTS Master Measure Set Time Start Leak Mode 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 Stop Leak Mode ETA HiHi Level ETA High Level ETA Low Level ETA LoLo Level DB Empty Not Programmed DB Download Programming Leak Probe 292 293 294 295 296 297 Generic Gauge GPE Master Out of Service AC DC Fifteen Minutes 298 299 300 30 302
30. 40 1 50 0 0 250 F 50 1 100 0 0 200 F API F 85 6C Individual amp Thermal Expansion Coefficient 270 510 0 300 F API F 1980 Special in Alpha x 108 510 5 530 0 250 F Applications 530 5 930 0 200 F ADMOOSGVAE 1005 275 FuelsManager Defense Type Method 54A 53A 54B 53B 54C 54D API C 54A 53A 30 C API C 1980 54B 53B 30 C 54C Japan JIS 30 C 2249 C 1980 54D 30 C 60A 60B Japan JIS Table 2256 C 1967 2 54 276 Product Generalized Crude Oil Generalized Products Individual amp Special Applications Generalized Lubricating Oils Generalized Crude Oil Generalized Products Individual amp Special Applications Generalized Lubricating Oils Generalized Crude Oil Generalized Products Generalized Lubricating Oils Generalized Products Table Entry Density 15 C in kg m Density 15 C in kg m Thermal Expansion Coefficient in Alpha x 10 Density 15 C in kg m Density 30 C in kg m Density 30 C in kg m Thermal Expansion Coefficient in Alpha x 10 Density 30 C in kg m Density 9 20 C in kg m Density 20 C in kg m Density 9 20 C in kg m Density in g cm Range 610 5 778 5 779 824 824 5 1075 653 778 5 779 824 824 5 1075 486 918 919 954 800 824 824 1 1164 610 5 778 5 779 824 824 5 1075 653 778 5 779 824 824 5 1075 486 918 919 954 800 824 824 1 1164
31. ADMOOSGVAE 1005 91 FuelsManager Defense FuelsManager Supported client and server interface OPC Data Access DA v1 0 OPC Data Access DA v 2 05a The OPC standard also supports an interface designed to browse and select database tags for which data is exchanged This function allows developers of OPC clients to provide an interface to browse and select point variables from the in FuelsManager database 92 Administrator Manual Creating database points Creating database points The following section defines the procedure necessary to create any type of database point This procedure is common to all point types for specific information about input amp output points triggered or tank points refer to the following sections ADMOOSGVAE 1005 93 FuelsManager Defense 94 Top Add Point to Database dialog box Bottom Database edit dialog box Database Edit Current Database System NSIZEMORE Active Levels 3 Database k Point Name Edit Yalves V 110 Status clit c Ea Valves V 110 Prev Level Active Tag Levels 3 New Point Name Level 2 Level 1 Valves v 110 r Point Type Bl 6 Input 1 C Output E C Triggered i C Tank Administrator Manual Creating database points CURRENT DATABASE SYSTEM DATABASE BUTTON POINT NAME PREV LEVEL AND NEXT LEVEL SELECT CLOSE EDIT NEW C
32. Bottom3 HighLevel LowestLevel x HighLevel LowLevel x HighLevel HighestLevel Bottom4 HighestLevel LowestLevel x HighestLevel LowLevel x HighestLevel HighLevel TOV Top1 Bottom1 Top2 Bottom2 Top3 Bottom3 Top4 Bottom4 Where Level Current Tank Liquid Level LowLevel Strapping point level in table immediately below Level HighLevel Strapping point level in table immediately above Level HighestLevel Strapping point level in table immediately above HighLevel LowestLevel Strapping point level in table immediately below LowLevel LowVolume Strapping point volume in table for LowLevel point HighVolume Strapping point Volume in table for HighLevel point HighestVolume Strapping point Volume in table for HighestLevel point LowestVolume Strapping point Volume in table for LowestLevel point Administrator Manual Traditional tank calculations Polynomial spherical tank Where ADMOOSGVAE 1005 283 FuelsManager Defense Note Use the import option to save time by importing previously defined product or water tables 284 Product and Water Strapping Tables It is typical for inventory management customers to have two separate strapping tables one for product and one for water bottom These tables can be either related to one another or totally independent This application note details the calculation methods used by Endress Hauser Systems amp Gauging s FuelsManager Inventory Managem
33. Dynamic reports can contain any number of individual database points You can also display multiple column row totals and averages ADMOOSGVAE 1005 207 FuelsManager Defense 208 Object Functionality of dynamic reports No tables one table or multiple tables can be created Can be inserted outside or inside a table COLUMN ROW Can display column totals column averages Averages TOTALS AND as well as row totals and total averages Can also contain multiple averages totals Creating a new dynamic report By default the Report program is placed automatically in the Dynamic Report mode Make sure that the Dynamic Report option is selected Administrator Manual Report Creating tables in a dynamic report Step by Step If you are not in table creation mode select Edit click Add and click table Or Click where you want the table to be placed to display the Table Format dialog box otherwise In the Tabular Format dialog box the user is able to set the number of rows and columns in the table as well as the dimensions of the table cells These options vary between types of reports the differences are noted below Type in the number of rows and columns as well as the dimensions of the table cells or select Auto sizing Click OK Creating labels in a dynamic report Step by Step Select Edit click Add and click Label Click where you want the label to be displayed This can be within a table or no The La
34. FuelsManager can be set up a variety of ways to accommodate the needs of any given site A typical FuelsManager network setup has all computers reading data from one source and is a good reference point to use to describe network installation A typical network installation would require FuelsManager to be installed on the System designated as the server and also on each workstation or client machine During the install the local system should be specified for the program and project path as FuelsManager may need access to program indexes as well as graphic and or tank group files The Server system does not need to be a Windows Server as FuelsManager looks to the system registry for the server location The system registry on each individual installation also retains the system name as well as location of custom graphics and tank groups ADMO003GVAE1005 13 FuelsManager Defense 14 With this sort of setup flexibility a number of possible configurations can be utilized The server may contain all the resources used by the workstations In this case there must be a network connection to the appropriate folders on the server for the workstations to have access These folders may be changed in FuelsManager either by editing the system registry or changing the settings in the System Control Options dialog box The Project Detail Graphics and Reports folders displayed in the System Control Options dialog box are listed in the
35. HighestLevel CalcVolume1 LowVolume x LevelRatio1 LevelRatio2 Level LowLevel x Level HighestLevel HighLevel LowLevel x HighLevel HighestLevel CalcVolume2 HighVolume x LevelRatio2 LevelRatio3 Level LowLevel x Level HighLevel HighestLevel LowLevel x HighestLevel HighLevel CalcVolume3 HighestVolume x LevelRatio3 TOV CalcVolume1 CalcVolume2 CalcVolume3 Where Level Current Tank Liquid Level LowLevel Strapping point level in table immediately below Level HighLevel Strapping point level in table immediately above Level ADMOO03GVAE1005 281 FuelsManager Defense 282 HighestLevel Strapping point level in table immediately above HighLevel LowVolume Strapping point volume in table for LowLevel point HighVolume Strapping point Volume in table for HighLevel point HighestVolume Strapping point Volume in table for HighestLevel point Spherical tanks Top1 2 LowestVolume x Level LowLevel x Level HighLevel x Level HighestL evel Top2 LowVolume x Level LowestLevel x Level HighLevel x Level HighestL evel Top3 HighVolume x Level LowestLevel x Level LowLevel x Level HighestL evel Top4 HighestVolume x Level LowestLevel x Level LowLevel x Level HighLevel Bottom1 LowestLevel LowLevel x LowestLevel HighLevel x LowestLevel HighestLevel Bottom2 LowLevel LowestLevel x LowLevel HighLevel x LowLevel HighestLevel
36. Modo Set Empty Transfer Modo Set __sinactive Current Tonk Mode Inactivo Current Transfer Status inactive Transfer Shutdown 000 Advisory Setpoint aa ro Transferred Volume if ogo gal US Time Remaining EE Flow Rote 4346 05 gpm US von 3100 00 Low toto AMBATO e Set 39 02 06 fton 16th Data field TABI 93437 PITIDO 4 19 15 Measured values Water Laval co MENETZIIB 7 27 2000 4 20 31 Density a 7 28 1000 93503 SET button S o E Total Observed Volume TOV i gal US Water Volume FW mm El gal US Calculated values Hot Sien dara Eo Ney omar gal US Available Product TT gal US Remaining Copaciy N o Moss ENECIM E Alarm tool bar Above A typical Tank Detail graphic display shown in Operate Tank image TUnAck Alarms 0 With FuelsManager the operator can control and view all activities and product movements using windows that display the status of the facility with continuous data real time data The system can be used as a total management software system for monitoring and controlling of all pumps valves motors mixers and other equipment for product receipt storage and dispensing The system contains fuels management specific functionality and can support most major manufacturers tank gauging systems and other terminal automation Administrator Manual What is FuelsManager software equipment The system can monitor levels temperat
37. Next The next screen asks if you want to install the demo database Selected the required option and click Next The wizard confirms that it is ready to begin installation Click Install The install wizard begins to install FuelsManager Defense This may take several minutes to complete After completion the Installation Wizard Complete screen appears Click Finish The wizard will close and give the option to restart your system Click Yes if you want to restart at this time If using a USB key you can insert the key after rebooting 8 Administrator Manual Installing FuelsManager Installing USB hardware key To install a USB Hardware Key perform the following steps Step by Step Attach the USB hardware key to an available USB port f Windows prompts you to install drivers for the key follow the on screen instructions Uninstalling FuelsManager You can uninstall FuelsManager by running the SETUP program from the CD ROM following the Installation Wizard and selecting Remove You can also uninstall FuelsManager from Windows Add or Remove Programs tool in the Control Panel Scroll down and select FuelsManager Defense V6 0 and click Remove Modifying Installation FuelsManager Defense automatically installs all available features drivers However you can uninstall or re install features by running the Install program and selecting Modify install FuelsManager Defense V6 0 InstallShield Wizard 1 Sel
38. RR GEM e e T qt 241 Tank Analysis Types ie pe Teeth t reote dea pee de tiras 242 Static Analysis tt tO Da eL teo e Mtas 242 Continuous AMAlYSIS 2 teet tbe rc epa uncia IM Rae T aAA 242 Real Time Analysis t e rrt hd p noe be IE MPH beets 242 xiv Administrator Manual Security re Ede quat ae ER ee lat Dei br f TR c RERUM 243 ArchiveManager sssssssssse emere nennen nennen 244 To set the default minimum to 5 MINUTES 245 Setting Sample Interval to 5 Minutes sss 246 Edit Tank Data e ee MS 247 Process Data once tam pedet eias Ub pee pr ii tee p ER etd 248 PIED eT 249 Vessel iii eta oO RO o Ore Fon PIPER 250 E A pe etude potesta E ort ed redes po Penh dpt tea 251 Leak Det ction s rere ee e te eds 252 Tank Analysis Methods cio o tone ER he i RR t E SEHR 253 System Update Utility sess 255 Upgrading versions prior to v4 3 256 Before Updating Your Database ssssssssssseeeeeeene 256 Items notupdated Jte pce ete d YR GRO ates 256 R nno the Utility carita c ates ta b ate kde 257 Step 1 Open the Utility from the Start Menu sssssssese 257 Step 2 Clik RUD d serbe aet teet ctr enters pp lente tlg REN knot 257 Step 3 Back up Files in ProjeCt Lus eec Hd ome o de 257 Step 4 Einish Updale s o it 257 Update Complete etre re ce perve von eee re 258 Update Failed s dest tte ette em Rte 258 Error messages and troubleshooting
39. Saving Reports section If any editing needs to be done refer to the Editing Reports section Creating column totals The user can display grand column totals or totals for each product or database system If only two rows are displayed in the table return to the Summary Report Setup dialog box to select a column totals option This dialog box is found under the Report menu Step by Step Select Edit click Add and click Summary Click on cell where you want the total to be placed The Row Column Summary dialog box appears Clicking Edit allows you to modify the column total appearance Click OK A number appears in the selected cell Administrator Manual Report Row Column Summary x Row Column Summary dialog box Summary Type Total Avg Column Summary Calculate Total C Row Summars Calculate Average Format Table Snap Width 17 Left Precision 2 C Center v Autc C Right f Font Courier New Bold Size 10 talic Enter the number of table cells to 3 be included in this surnmation Cancel Dynamic reports A Dynamic report is more flexible than a Summary report You can select points and corresponding variables from any active database and add them to the report You are also not restricted to a certain format You can use as many tables as you like or no tables at all Unlike Summary reports that list all the points found in a selected database
40. Step can be addressed Once selected a the default minimum and maximum Continued from the previous Step by Step instructions Creating Database values appear in the Minimum and Points Maximum Value edit boxes if the n the Edit Point dialog box the user selects a data format data source s formatis O engineering units and other parameters For a description of these attributes refer to the Edit Point dialog box key field explanations table at the end of this section the brief instructions below or the specific section relating to that topic From the Edit Point dialog box Type in the Description of the point From the Edit Point dialog box Select a Tag Category if applicable and select whether you want to display quality data with the point f necessary enter applicable Variable Format Details and Input Source information See sections below and the Edit Point dialog box table for more information Edit Point dialog box Edit Point gt WSIZEMORE Walves V 110 Status input Output Description J Disabled Tag Category Default Display Quality Data Variable Format Details Input Source Coded Coded Variable Bitfield Data Modifier Undefined Min Value Max Value e ox ADMO003GVAE1005 97 FuelsManager Defense Entering Variable Format information for an input or output point Left Select Data Storage Format dialog Select Data Stora
41. Table mi 2 Water volume Measured water level lookup in water table Product volume Measured product level lookup in product table Floating Roof Adjustment FRA Tanks with floating roofs require a correction to offset the effect of the displacement of the floating roof Default This correction is calculated in the following manner Product If no floating roof or level is lt Roof Landed Height No Correction Required If floating roof is not included in the strap table If floating roof is included in the strap table Japanese correction methods If the user selects any of the correction methods designated Japan the floating roof correction is calculated in the following manner If the 4th digit after decimal point of density is Zero such as p15 X XXX0 Administrator Manual Traditional tank calculations Where FRW Floating Roof Weight If the 4th digit after decimal point of density is other than ZERO such as p15 X XXXO 4th digit after decimal is 1 9 If p15 X XXNX then the density will divided by Low and High Low density is p15L X XXNO and High density is p15H 2 X XXNO 0 001 FRAL FRW p15L Rounding 4th digit after decimal point FRAH FRW p15H Rounding 4th digit after decimal point Note In the Critical Zone Between Roof Landed Height and Roof Floating Height FRA FRAL FRAL FRAH y P15 p15L FuelsManager applies the full p15H p15L amount of th
42. Value tool or select Add and click Value Click on area where the value will be inserted Select a point to define from the Database Edit dialog box to be represented by the value Click Select The Select Database Point dialog box appears The Select Database Point dialog box confirms the variable selection If the selection is incorrect select the appropriate button to edit the selection Value Attributes Database Point Data Database WSIZEMORE Point TankFarm Tank 4 Tank Variable Leak Rate Minimum Tank Minimum Leak Rate Scaling Type Double Units Font Style Color Selection Data Format Field Width Arial 13 point Precision forts I Convert Units M Bold talic o Background Align G Lett Use Bkg Rectangle conte r C Right Ok Cancel Click OK to save the value The Value Attributes dialog box appears Setthe value appearance formatting and the positioning of the value Once complete click OK The value appears in the selected area Inserting a bar graph The Bar tool is used to draw vertical horizontal or deviation bar graphs based on a numerical point s range Step by Step Select the Bar tool or select Add and click Bar Click on area to define the corner and hold down the mouse button Drag the cursor to end position and release the mouse button Select the appropriate database point and corresponding variable by clicking the Database Point or
43. Vapor Gas Density 0 00 100 00 pounds cu foot Leak Rate 10 00 10 00 U S Gallon hour Edit Tank Data dialog General page Leak Rate Minimum values Maximum values and Engineering Units ADMOOSGVAE 1005 247 FuelsManager Defense 248 Edit Tank Data dialog Process Data page Process Data The Leak Rate value can be set to a communication source assignment an OPC Data Source can be calculated from ArchiveManager data Volume Gross Volume Net Volume Remaining Net Volume Available Net Standard Density Mass Solids Level Flow Water Volume Gauge Position Density Temperature Solids Volume Transfer Mode Leak Rate Edit Tank Data gt WSIZEMORE Tank Farm Tank Tank 4 Not Assigned Not Assigned Calculated Manual Entry Manual Entry Calculated Calculated Calculated Calculated Manual Entry Calculated Manual Entry Calculated Calculated Not Assigned Not Assigned Calculated Manual Entry s Calculated Manual Entry Communication Device and OPC Administrator Manual Alarms Alarms The leak rate alarm is used to trigger real time alarms associated with calculated Note Leak Detection alarms are real time leak rate The leak data alarm is used to trigger a real time alarm when ony functional for Real Time leak H i i analysis there is not enough quiet time in the tank to produce a valid Leak Test Report d Edit Tank Data WSIZEMORE Tan
44. a Low Low alarm is activated LEVEL ALARM HOLDOFF This variable is the sometimes known as deadband or hysteresis It is the amount by which the alarm limit must be cleared before the alarm is deactivated For example if the High level alarm setpoint is 10 and the level alarm holdoff is 1 the level must return to a value of 9 before the High level alarm is deactivated This variable is entered when configuring the tank point and cannot be modified from Operate ETA ALARMS Estimated Time of Arrival alarms ETA are intended to give the operator a warning a preset time before the relevant level alarm is reached This type of alarm is commonly used in facilities where the tanks are always filled or emptied to high or low levels Since the filling or emptying of large tanks can take days these are alarms are used to alert the operator that a particular tank is approaching a level where some action needs to be taken By default ETA alarms disabled they can be enabled via the Alarms tab of the tank configuration dialog box 354 Administrator Manual Tank Alarms Data Tank Alarms Data LEVEL HIHI ETA HIGH HIGH LEVEL ETA This variable is the estimated time to arrive at the High High level alarm setpoint based on the current flow rate The alarm is activated when the time remaining before reaching the High High level setpoint is less than the advisory limit defined by the Trans Adv Setpoint see Product Transfer Data section LEVEL HIGH E
45. add edit and delete the point variables with the Add Edit and Delete buttons 162 Administrator Manual ArchiveManager Adding point variables to ArchiveManager Step by Step From the Archive Manager Configuration dialog box click Add The Select Point Variable dialog box appears Click on the point variable you want to add The selection is highlighted Click OK The system adds the variable you selected and returns to the Archive Manager Configuration dialog box Select Point Variable Type Tank Point Variable ABS Bottom Sediment and Water Advisory Units Transfer Advisory SP Units Air Density Air Density Alarm amp Ack Density Density Alarm amp Acknowledgement Alarm amp Ack Digital Digital Alarm amp Acknowledgement Alarm amp Ack Flow Flow Alarm amp Acknowledgement Alarm amp Ack Gauge Gauge Alarm amp Acknowledgement Alarm amp Ack Level Level Alarm amp Acknowledgement Editing point variables Step by Step Click on the point variable you want to change The selection is highlighted Click Edit The Edit Variable dialog box appears Click Variables The Select Point Variable dialog box appears Select a point variable and click Select The system returns you to the Edit Variables dialog box showing the Point you selected Change the width and precision of the variable by entering them in the current entries When you finish modifying the variable click OK T
46. and file name To configure a report to print periodically enter the number of minutes between print times in the print interval field In addition enter the number of minutes past the hour that you want the print interval to synchronize to in the Print Time field To configure a report to print at a particular time of day enter the required time in the Print Time field If the print time is midnight type in 24 00 instead of 00 00 The Print Status section allows the user to set the initial print status The Inactive option keeps the report from printing In Operate the operator is able to enable an inactive report An Active report will print at its designated time once the file is saved and generated The report does not have to be opened in the Operate program nor does the Operate program have to be active in order for it to print at its scheduled time Select OK when completed ADMOOSGVAE 1005 213 FuelsManager Defense Report Details dialog box Report Details Print Status Print Time C Active Print Interval in Minutes fe Inactive Print Time HH MM Printer File Name Print To File Editing reports FuelsManager enables the user to edit reports of both categories Dynamic and Summary Any item that was created in the reports can be edited such as labels values and tables as well as report formats and print times After a report is edited and the changes are save
47. any changes that have been made and closes the Automated Data Output configuration dialog Clicking this button causes all specified output files to be written immediately This is very useful for verifying tank variables header files and other options before saving the configuration data ADMOOSGVAE 1005 269 FuelsManager Defense 270 Configuring Automated Data Output This section describes how to configure Automated Data Output to export the desired variables to the proper output files Initial Setup Refer to the Dialog Descriptions section for field explanations on the configuration dialog box used in this procedure Start the configuration program by selecting Start Programs Automated Data Output Automated Data Output Select the variables to be logged from the Available Tank Variables field and click the gt gt Add gt gt button You can select all the variables to be logged at once and add them simultaneously or add them one at a time Alternatively you can click the Default button and add to or remove from the default set of tank variables Keep in mind that the order in which the variables are displayed in the Tank Variables to be logged field is also the order in which the variables will be written to the output file If you want to use a database point value to trigger the file creation define that point in the Trigger Point and Trigger Value fields Then enter the Reset Value to the value you want
48. available for Level Temperature Density Flow Level Rate and Vapor Pressure process variables Also a time hold off value is available for the Movement Reverse Flow and No Flow alarms 115 FuelsManager Defense In order to assist the user when entering alarm limit information the Edit Tank Data Alarm dialog box displays the minimum and maximum available values for each alarm limit along with the applicable engineering units In addition when a new tank point is created the Level Alarms are automatically enabled and the alarm limits are set to 95 90 10 and 5 116 Administrator Manual Creating and editing tank points Other alarm types Several additional alarms exist for each tank however these are not configured from the Alarms Page These alarms are defined in the Tank Digital Global Alarm Definition The default Tank Digital Alarms include Database Configuration Tank Calculation Error Strap table Error API Correction Error Critical Zone Transfer Advisory Setpoint Transfer Advisory Shutdown Specialized alarms These can be edited and applied to all tanks in the system However you cannot edit these alarms on a tank by tank basis Specialized alarms The following tank alarms have special meaning that may not be as easy to understand as the simple level temperature or process alarms For this reason a brief description of their functionality is given in the following table for more inf
49. configured See the Database section of this manual the resulting data written by Automated Data Output may be invalid 266 Automated Data Output Configuration Dialog 3 Automatic Data Output Available Tank Variables Tank Variables to be logged Ambient temp for ctsh gt gt Add gt gt Available Volume Net CSS Bit 12 Bottom Sediment amp Water Bottom Sediment amp Water Time Default Calculation Error ae Combined Bottom Volume H20 Solids fecision Current Transferred Volume 5 Database Configuration Error Density 2 Move Up Move Down Snapshot File Parameters Trigger Point Trigger Value Reset Value Trigger Time 1 Trigger Time 2 rens AP fens 2 Snapshot File Trigger File al al Periodic File Parameters Snaphot Periodic File Options File Interval Mins Version Export Quality Info ol 1 Export Header HTML Files File Header File ol XML Files File al Available Tank Variables This list includes all possible tank point variables Tank Variables to be This field lists all of the tank point variables that are logged currently selected to be logged gt gt Add gt gt This button adds the currently selected variable in the Available Tank Variables list box on the left to the Tank Variables to be logged list box on the right That variable will then be removed from the Available Tank Variables list box Remove This
50. current High alarm limit In addition by clicking on the appropriate cell in this column the user can change the High alarm limit High alarm limits are available for Level Temperature Density Flow Level Rate and Vapor Pressure process variables Also the High limit is available for the Movement alarm in this case the High limit value defines how much the tank level volume has to move before an illegal movement alarm is activated This column displays the current Low alarm limit In addition by clicking on the appropriate cell in this column the user can change the Low alarm limit Low alarm limits are available for Level Temperature Density Flow Level Rate and Vapor Pressure process variables This column displays the current Low Low alarm limit In addition by clicking on the appropriate cell in this column the user can change the Low Low alarm limit Low Low alarm limits are available for Level and Temperature process variables only This column displays the current alarm hold off value sometimes called deadband or hysteresis In addition by clicking on the appropriate cell in this column the user can change the Hold off alarm value This value defines the amount by which the alarm limit must be cleared before the alarm is deactivated For example if the High level alarm setpoint is 10 and the level alarm hold off is 1 the level must return to a value of 9 before the High level alarm is deactivated Hold off parameters are
51. dat in the FuelsManager project directory FM_TankPoint dat is a proprietary database file and is only accessible through FMDataManager exe Library Tnkcnfg dll is the Tank Configuration client component of FuelsManager and includes the Edit Tank Data dialog Applying the Software Seals Tank seals can be configured from the W amp M tab of the Edit Tank dialog in Configuration Edit Tank Data gt SUTCLIFFE2 Test W amp M Tank General Volume Process Data Alarms Vessel 1 Vessel 2 W amp M Strap Water Table Leak Detection Calibration Seals Tank v Level Y Temperature iv Density Water Level BSW Volume Gross Volume Net Volume Remaining Net Volume Available Net Standard Density Mass Solids Level Flow Water Volume Gauge Position Density Temperature Solids Volume Tank Status VCF Volume Roof Correction Vol Remaining Gross Val Available Gres Seal ID 5 Administrator Manual Sealing TankPoint variables in FuelsManager Changing a Seal State for a Process Variable A checkbox indicates the state for the Tank Seal and each input Process Variable Seal A checkmark means that the state is sealed Step by step Make the change by checking or clearing the appropriate checkbox under Calibration Seals The Update Seals button becomes available This happen
52. data over a network Each FuelsManager workstation on the network has its own licensing key The FuelsManager Professional Edition can also act as a data server and provide inventory data to other FuelsManager Professional or Standard Editions Standard Edition FuelsManager Standard is intended for standalone systems or as a client to a Professional Edition FuelsManager Standard Edition supports predefined graphics and reports but does not allow these standards to be modified custom graphics or reports cannot be created FuelsManager Standard Edition cannot serve data to other FuelsManager stations and or be used with the optional Product Movement Package FuelsManager Standard and does not support Inventory Management functionality Edition Features The features and abilities of the Standard and Professional editions are detailed in the following table For more information contact Varec at 1 866 MY VAREC Predefined tank templates tabular and Y v graphical tank groups Select industry standard volume correction Y Y methods including API ATSM IP JIS Polynomial and others All measured and calculated storage tank Y Y parameters are displayed in the engineering units you specify Administrator Manual Licensing Options All parameters can be controlled online through the industry standard Windows dialog boxes and user interface Allows seamless communications to various manufacturers tank gauges via the RTU 8130
53. e asda das 77 Alarm graphic and alarm help u itus c toe entered 77 Assigning an alarm graphic sssssss eee 78 Alarm eventalegoty tatem teo ise nae EO rece rite 78 Event definition ad ce hoa ter e e eol te m a a 78 Build An Alar proG888 cete e dre ep e d RR e Eee 78 Alarm Test Parameter e e eh er UE He ede ER rau 79 Build snalarmitestsds iM e M tees 79 Alarmitest value ze ree Sete da dere 80 Edit alarmitest zs cde ettet ium tee ete tede dett aditus 81 Importing and exporting global alarms sssm rc 81 Irport global alarm i A co ve etate e 81 Export global al amp rrm uter tre ober ree heat dr irt qas 81 Databases AL aid edu ve te RN 83 Introduction to databases nccino ccoo cocino eme 84 Point Typ6 s uice aa ib Rad alee 85 Tank Point e ee Diabete n WEB Ge 85 ajo jid POAT eck EE 85 GOutpUbPoltt erras ot esee ettet t e e ei Aha re c ctetu Rn 85 Triggered Porta rtt oe at veu bsc ias 85 Point attributes eo ta iaa 86 Engineering UNITS atracado Cet Mees aec ida 86 SGale litmits re etr cente tote etva ven e uc ees 86 D ta SOU on tail 86 Manual INPUT aiiai todo da 87 A eia ttt re oe dere e i 87 Local iriput 2 s eee e ee YD pO d RR NE E ib 87 ORG si ditur ret Reti FREUE RR pide EAE RR tnc RR E dea 87 Data format un xen reta ba ea p ERI PO tr RR ECONTRA EDU LT S D 88 Modifierassignhrmient aot e e e Trete t reda 88 Alarms and events oae cheese er Sto Det an 88 Tag cateo Y e aii 89 viii A
54. for VCF Level and Temperature variables These parameters are only available when a Japanese volume correction method is selected in the correction type lists These options allow you to define specific options as to when the water volume and volume due to BSW are subtracted from product volume during the volume correction calculation In addition the Mass Weight option allows you to define the method to be used for the calculation of product mass This group defines the number of samples time between samples and the value below which changes in data are ignored The parameters entered control how FuelsManager calculates the Flow Level Rate Mass Flow and Net Flow process variables FuelsManager calculates flow by sampling the tank s volume and then calculating a rate of change volume i e Gal hr Users can tune how FuelsManager calculates this flow rate by the Sample Rate Sample Size and deadband parameters on the General tab FuelsManager will sample the volume at the rate defined by the sample time parameter calculate a flow rate based on this volume change then average the individual flow rates over the number of sample defined by the Samples parameter Volume Gals Samples to Avg 6 Sample Time 30 secs Volume values Gals Calculated Flow values gal sec 12305 12345 30 12345 Time secs 12305 Average over 6 samples 2 10833 gals sec Administrator Manual Creat
55. from the database to field equipment Typically outputs are derived from an operator issuing commands however they can also be derived from an internal calculation process Output points may be configured to update the local process value immediately from the command value or to update the database point value based on inputs from the field equipment Triggered Point Triggered points are used as an intermediary between points FuelsManager uses a triggered point to monitor another point When it sees a change in the point the point gets sent to another point in the database Triggered points are typically used to monitor database input from a gauge Once the point changes the triggered point sends it to another point such as an output point for an OPC server or a PLC ADMO003GVAE1005 85 FuelsManager Defense 86 Select Data Source Water Volume dialog Point attributes When creating FuelsManager database points the user must define certain point attributes These attributes define how the data is stored the source of the data the range and type of data any alarm or event processing and who can access the data Engineering units Engineering units can be configured for all point types These engineering units are used to calculate the value and used to represent the value in graphics and reports If engineering units are changed the user is given the option of automatically recalculating the scale limits Scale
56. gross volume for the effects of product thermal expansion FuelsManager normally calculates this from temperature density and selected correction method the variable can also be linked to automatic gauging systems or manually entered if required VOLUME STRAP VOLUME This process variable is the observed volume of the product in the tank as read from the tank strapping table FuelsManager normally calculates this from the tank gauge reading and the tank strapping table however the value can also be measured by automatic tank gauging systems or manually entered ROOF CORRECTION ROOF VOLUME This process variable is the volumetric effect of the tanks floating roof If a floating roof type tank is defined FuelsManager normally calculates this from the roof weight and roof position However the value can also be measured by automatic tank gauging systems or manually entered VOLUME REMAINING GROSS GROSS REMAINNG VOLUME This process variable is the Gross Volume of product that can be added to the tank FuelsManager normally calculates this by subtracting the current Gross Volume from the Gross Volume at the maximum working level However the value can also be measured by automatic tank gauging systems or manually entered by the operator VOLUME AVAILABLE GROSS GROSS AVAILABLE VOLUME This process variable is the Gross Volume of product that can safely be issued from the tank FuelsManager normally calculates this by subtracting the Gross V
57. gt lt ProcessVariablelnformation gt lt LineNumber gt 0000003 lt LineNumber gt lt ProcessVariablelnformation gt lt ProcessVariable gt Product Code lt ProcessVariableValue Value No Product gt lt ProcessVariable gt lt ProcessVariablelnformation gt lt LineNumber gt 0000004 lt LineNumber gt lt ProcessVariablelnformation gt lt ProcessVariable gt Level lt ProcessVariableValue Value 11 00 00 gt lt ProcessVariable gt lt ProcessVariablelnformation gt lt LineNumber gt 0000005 lt LineNumber gt lt ProcessVariablelnformation gt lt ProcessVariable gt Temperature lt ProcessVariableValue Valuez 77 60 gt lt ProcessVariable gt lt ProcessVariablelnformation gt lt LineNumber gt 0000006 lt LineNumber gt lt ProcessVariablelnformation gt lt ProcessVariable gt lt FMLogXML gt Administrator Manual Calculation Methods FuelsManager Defense 274 Volume correction methods This section describes the correction methods and tank calculations used in the FuelsManager program Since the volume of the product in a tank varies with the temperature and density the user must use a correction method to correct for variations in temperature and density of the product Data rounding Selecting any of the correction methods designated Japan allows the user to configure the following special data rounding methods Volume Correction Factor VCF None 0 00001 0 0000001 L
58. is erased from the list Click OK to save changes The system returns you to the Movement dialog box ADMOOSGVAE 1005 235 FuelsManager Defense Note This feature is used mostly when users want to enter a name other than the default level name available during Tank Node configuration Note Each Node name must be unique Node Name dialog Note Only those nodes that have not been assigned as a source or destination can be deleted If you have chosen a node assigned as a Source or destination the Delete button will not be enabled 236 Editing Movement Paths This section describes how to edit defined Movements Sources and Destinations can only be added or deleted Nodes the basic component of Sources and Destinations can be deleted or modified Modifying Nodes Step by Step From the Movements dialog box click Nodes The Nodes dialog box appears This dialog box lists all nodes and lets you select one or more nodes Click on the desired node The Node is highlighted and the Modify button is enabled Click Modify The Node Name dialog box appears Type in the new name and click OK The system returns you to the Nodes dialog box highlighting the new node name in alphabetical order The Save button becomes enabled Click Save The system saves your changes Node Name Cancel Deleting Nodes Step by Step From the Movements dialog box click Nodes The Nodes dialog box appear
59. is sealed by FMDataManager TankGroup will display data as sealed on tank group displays if FMSystem dll library and TankGroup dll library modules are sealed and the data is sealed by FMDataManager ADMO0OSGVAE 1005 337 FuelsManager Defense Setting the W amp M Password In order to set the W amp M password the user must know the existing W amp M password W amp M Password Old Password New Password Confirm New Password The same W amp M password is used for Tag Seals in FuelsManager Module Seals in FuelsManager WMSeal enable in 8130 RTU Step by step From Security select Password from the W amp M menu The W amp M Password dialog appears Enter the Old Password Enter the new password twice once in New Password and again in Confirm New Password Click Update 338 Administrator Manual Systems Seals Systems Seals To ensure the integrity of the FuelsManager historical data FuelsManager makes use of Windows XP amp 2000 folder file and object based security All system data stored in open format databases is configured with file security settings The System account has ownership read and write access while all other accounts have only read access FuelsManager services that write system data run under the System account thereby providing write access to all users but only in accordance with the FuelsManager Security configuration The FuelsManager application allows the W am
60. is used with the tank Under Tank Shell Correction the user can enable and indicate any Shell Insulation and area coefficient if applicable Under Gauging Setup you can set whether your gauging system uses Traditional Hydrostatic or Hybrid setups If using either the Hydrostatic or Hybrid gauging setup the user must enter the bottom Pressure Transmitter Setup Offset PSI amp Height You can also enable and enter the Top and Middle transmitter settings If using Hydrostatic or Hybrid gauging setup you can enter the Minimum Level and Density Deadband The user can select whether to use Local Gravity settings Just check the Use Local Gravity check box and enter the m Sec You can also enter the Elevation in feet and Latitude in Degrees Minutes and Seconds You can only enter Latitude if you are not using Local Gravity Enter the Level Offset Edit Tank Data dialog box Vessel 1 tab MAXIMUM FILL This field allows the user to configure the maximum safe level to which the tank can be filled FuelsManager uses this value in the calculation of remaining and available volume s The maximum fill level can be User Defined user can enter any value High Maximum fill level is the same as the high level alarm limit High High Maximum fill level is the same as the high high level alarm limit Note Selecting the User Defined option also enables the Maximum Operating limit level alarm This alarm functions independently of the High a
61. iter tutes ceed eme td tutum ta Sp caesa 292 Pre d9Bor e s a ue eod A D HE Ct ts 293 Japanese correction methods sssssssssse eem 293 Kaiji Kentel KyOUK al mrt en ibd iets 294 Shin Nihon Kentei Kyoukai 1 oo ce ceeececeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeceeeneeeeeenaes 294 Shin Nihon Kentei Kyoukai 2 ssssssss eee 295 Shin Nihon Kentei Kyoukai 3 ssssssssssseeeeee ens 295 MASS tien ots tnde tags te ime urba tage me e ees 296 Dl do 296 Japanese correction methods sssssssss eem 296 Welgbt lizalt sz nere etit eR RD epus 296 xvi Administrator Manual Weight in a pressurized tank ssssssssssee eem 296 The Molarmethog 33 te Hum ret ea eee re HERR E 297 Food oilimethogd s xerit ote Anh era e aide di e Rd 297 Chinese Correction Method ssssssssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeennnn 297 Available volume available mass ssssss mes 298 Remaining volume remaining mass eeens 299 LPG quantity calculation from liquid density 300 Overall calc lation SCHEME uy a etes 300 DetailSfor Gachr Step gt scc ir tent re ke eed enis DII ad ee becas ci te Edd 300 jou EE II 300 jj 300 A 301 DIO esi hee et ette tetti it tec OR 301 SLED Oct TO 303 jor m KT 303 wore EIU 304 USD P IO 305 jon 305 SOPA irte ott tede e aeta Reddite daa 305 O 305 SLED ia a 307 Stel S DEI P 307 ici E 307 Sample LPG calculation rrt et eet E ER Lol eg 308 Stored Dala ei eo RW ape eda
62. may poll the field devices or accept unsolicited data from the devices based on device capabilities Translation may include simple data type conversion engineering units conversion or more complex calculations such as tank calculations Relays information from the device to the FMDataManager upon changes to device dynamic data Transmits data to field devices by processing output requests from the FMDataManager ReportManager This program controls the scheduling of reports according to the print times specified when each report is created Alarm Event reports are categorized into Alarm Groups Each Alarm Group is scheduled to print at a specific time and interval If no alarms or events occurred within the interval a report will still be printed indicating that no alarms or events occurred during the interval ArchiveManager This program controls the extraction of information from FMDataManager and stores it to an alternate data source usually a third party ODBC compliant relational database ADMO003GVAE1005 27 FuelsManager Defense 28 The FuelsManager Configuration application appears as a window containing a menu bar FuelsManager Applications FuelsManager can be configured and maintained through several Windows based user applications FuelsManager Configuration Operate Draw and Report FuelsManager Configuration The FuelsManager Configuration application is used to configure maintain and administrate all
63. mode The DataManager must be in STANDBY or ACTIVE mode Opening Report Step by Step From FuelsManager Configuration User Interface menu select the Create Reports command The Report Editor dialog box appears Exiting Report Step by Step From the Report Editor dialog box click File Select Exit Pre defined standard reports FuelsManager has provided several defined reports used to display standard tank information that reflect common facility needs These can be edited to conform to the facility or used as a guideline These reports include the Inactive Tank Active Tank Operating Tank and Current Tank Inventory reports These standard reports are listed and described below Inactive Tank Report Displays information about all inactive tanks in the system Active Tank Report Displays information about all active tanks in the system Operating Tank Report Lists all tanks known to the system Administrator Manual Report Current Tank Inventory Groups the data by product Also displays level Report temperature gross volume net volume and remaining volume data Totals for gross volume net volume and remaining volume are given for each product W Fvctsuanager Report Editor File C Program FjlesYruelsManogerWAProjectWeportsvcurriaventory rp j An example Operating F s Ed Vew Format Table Page He Tank Report as it would appear in the Report program PRODUCT EXAMPLE DATABASE POINT TAG UND
64. modulus to calculate the increase in radius The F factor necessary for temperature correction is again used to convert change in radius to change in liquid volume The units of Youngs modulus are generally known in bar The units of length used in the calculation of stress do not matter but the pressure must be in bar to match the units of Youngs modulus The following equations are based upon the use of bar for Youngs modulus Note the P is in bar g and HC is in mm Calculate average pressure as PAV P DENL x HC 2 04 x 107 ADMO03GVAE1005 303 FuelsManager Defense 304 where PAV Average vapor pressure Bar P Pressure in vapor space DENL Liquid density kg m H Liquid Level mm calculate external radius as ROUT R THICK where ROUT External radius R radius THICK Shell thickness calculate stress as PAV 2xR xROUT S x ME EE 2 ROUT R calculate increase in linear dimension factor as CORRP 1 Fx S YOUNG The value of S calculated is also used in correcting the total volume of the tank in step 9 Typical values for Youngs modulus are Carbon steel 2 1 x 108 bar Stainless steel 1 9 x 108 bar Corrected liquid volume VLC VL x CORRT x CORRP Step 7 The corrected volume at liquid temperature is converted to a volume at 15 C using the volume correction factor VCF calculated in Step 3 as VLC15 2 VLC x VCF Where VLC15 Volume 9 15 C VLC Volume at liquid tempera
65. mouse button after dragging an item Select To pick an item on a menu button or to highlight text or graphics usually via a single click Selecting does not initiate an action Choose To pick an item to carry out an action Often needed to select an item before choosing it usually via a double click Administrator Manual Window Elements Program Icon Provides a pop up menu which allows window modification Menu Bar Lists of available menus Most applications have a File menu Edit menu and a Help menu as well as menus unique to the application Dialog Box A movable window that is displayed on screen in response to the user selecting a menu option It provides the current status and available options for a particular feature in the application Window Title The Window title can be the name of an application document group directory or file depending on the type of window in which it appears Maximize Button Use this button to enlarge the application window so that it fills the entire desktop Restore Button This button can restore an application window to its previous size and location ADMOOSGVAE 1005 FuelsManager Defense Administrator Manual Table of Contents Installation and Setup 1 Before You Begin coole eee a io Ee FU 2 Whatsim Ihe BOX ee ete etes De peereie te OR 2 FuelsManager install CD ROM sssssem eene 3 Optional features and communication drivers s s s 3 Licensi
66. of engineering units refer to the Glossary The Database Value Attributes dialog box appears Click OK when the appearance formatting and positioning of the value have been completed The value appears in the selected area or cell Creating totals and averages After all values have been inserted you have the option of displaying totals or averages at the bottom of a column or at the end of a row The user is able to insert multiple column averages and totals however total or averages cannot be used outside of a table 210 Step by Step Select Edit click Add and click Summary Click on the cell where you want the total to be displayed The insertion can exist in any cell at the end of a row column or any cell in between as long as there are cells to total or average The Row Column Summary dialog box appears Click either the Column Summary or the Row Summary option button to select a row or a column summary Click either Calculate Total or Calculate Average option button Type the number of cells to include in the summation or average This number includes the cells to the left in a row or the number of cells above the insertion point Entering this number allows for more than one total average to display The number excludes the cell containing the total or average Click OK A value appears in the selected cell Administrator Manual Report Adding pages This option applies exclusively to Dynamic reports since the num
67. option is selected the following applies Alarm settings In the Alarm tab are recalculated to reflect your Outage selection High High must be less than High and activates when the tank level is equal to or less than the setpoint High must be less than Low but greater than High High and activates when the tank level is equal to or less than the setpoint Low must be less than Low Low but greater than High and activates when the tank level is equal to or greater than the setpoint Low Low must be greater than Low and activates when tank level is equal to or greater than the setpoint Volume calculations are based on the Strap table with the exception of Water Volume and Bottom Volume for Outage These volumes are calculated as if the Strap table was an Innage table Strap Water and Hydro Definition Modes FuelsManager can be configured to calculate gross volume by one of two different methods Combined product and water tables Separated product and water tables These selections control how the product and water tables overlap and how FuelsManager should interpret the volumes at the point where the two overlap For more details see the Product amp Water Strapping Tables section of the Tank Calculations chapter Leak Detection If your system has the Leak Detection feature installed a Leak Detection tab appears on the Edit Tank Point dialog box For details on these configuration parameters please refer to th
68. or TankGate interfaces Comprehensive real time alarm and event management Print or save standard reports of your daily operations including alarm events historical data and others An OPC client server interface allows seamless integration of data to and from OPC equipped systems Inventory Management functionality such as pump and valve control allows you to control and monitor your facility User configurable tank detail templates displays and reports can be modified for your specific business operations Additional communications drivers are provided to allow direct connectivity to tank gauging devices PLCs DCS and other I O systems Provide data to multiple FuelsManager Defense Standard Edition workstations Integrated movement system designed to track bulk product transfer to and from your facility or from tank to tank within your facility Periodic or triggered logging of user specified data to CSV HTML or XML data files Integrated statistical analysis of historical data designed to detect possible leaks from underground storage tanks Offline analysis of historical data provides throughput calculations to assist with EPA Title V permitting Manage inventories throughout the office or across the enterprise using an intuitive web based user interface ADMO0O0SGVAE 1005 Standard Edition v Professional Edition v FuelsManager Defense Caution Turn off your computer to avoid possible shoc
69. particular tank point This provides a method of verifying the data associated with the tank point is weights and measures approved The W amp M property tab in the Edit Tank Data dialog box provides a list of Calibration Seals for a particular tank point variable A check box indicates the state for the Tank Seal and each input Process Variable Seal Step by Step To change the desired Seal State click in the Seal check box with the left mouse button The checkbooks is ticked Click the Update button f any Seal State changes are checked the prompt is for entry of the Weights amp Measures Password The Weights amp Measures Password must be properly entered to effect setting Tag Seals Alternately the prompt is simply for confirmation Edit Tank Data gt WSIZEMORE TankFarm Tank 4 Tank General Volume Process Data Alarms Vessel 1 Vessel 2 W amp M Strap Water Table Leak Detection Calibration Seals O Tank Seal ID 0 Selecting the Tank parameter prevents modifications to any tank parameters that can effect the calculated volumes Selecting an individual parameter prevents modification to the data source for that particular variable Administrator Manual Creating and editing tank points Strapping water table information FuelsManager allows each tank point to be configured with both a Product Strapping Table and a Water Table Follow the steps below to fill out the Strap
70. per Second in sec 160 Kilometers per Hour KPH 169 Knots KNOT 170 Meters per Hour m hr 168 Meters per Minute m min 166 Meters per Second m sec 165 Y Miles per Hour MPH 167 Millimeters per Minute mm min Millimeters per Second mm sec 163 380 Administrator Manual Units UNIT TYPE UNIT NAME ABREV INDEX Metric English Volume Barrels of Liquid bbl Liq 049 Barrels of Oil bbl Cil 048 Cubic Centimeter ca 040 Y Cubic Feet ft3 044 Y Cubic Inch in3 043 Cubic Meter m3 041 Cubic Yard yd3 045 Imperial Gallon gal UK 047 Liter L 042 Kiloliters kl 050 U S Gallon gal US 046 Volumetric Flow Barrels per Day Liquid BPD Liq 122 paip Barrels per Day Oil BPD Oil 118 Barrels per Hour Liquid BPH Liq 121 Barrels per Hour Oil BPH Oil 117 Barrels per Minute Liquid BPM Liq 120 Barrels per Minute Oil BPM Oil 116 Cubic Centimeters per Hour cc hr 091 Cubic Centimeters per Minute cc min 090 Cubic Feet per Day ft3 day 105 ADMO0O0SGVAE 1005 381 FuelsManager Defense UNIT TYPE Volumetric Flow Rate 382 UNIT NAME Cubic Feet per Hour Cubic Feet per Minute Cubic Feet per Second Cubic Inches per Hour Cubic Inches per Minute Cubic Meters per Day Cubic Meters per Hour Cubic Meters per Minute Cubic Meters per Second Cubic Yards per Hour Cubic Yards per Minute Gallons per Hour US Gallons per Minute US Gallons per Second US Imperial Gallons Per Hour Imperial Gallons per Minute Imperial G
71. point Move the cross hair cursor to the next point and click again Repeat this step for each additional point of the polygon Holding the SHIFT key while drawing forces orthogonal movement of the line from the previous point Press Enter to connect the last point and the first point Drawing an ellipse The Ellipse tool draws ellipses and circles Step by Step Select the Ellipse tool or select Add and click Ellipse Click on area to define center point and hold down the mouse button Drag the cursor in a diagonal direction to create the ellipse Release the mouse button at desired size and shape Note To draw a circle follow the procedure for drawing an ellipse except hold down the Ctrl key while you drag the cursor Administrator Manual Draw application Drawing an arc The Arc tool draws arcs and chords filled arcs Step by Step Select the Arc tool or select Add and click Arc Chord Click on area to define center point and hold down the mouse button Drag the cursor to make an ellipse for the arc and then release the mouse button at desired size and shape Position the cursor on the ellipse where you want the arc to start and hold down the mouse button The Message Window directs you to Define Arc End Point Drag cursor to point on ellipse where you want the arc to end and release the mouse button Label tool A Label is used to place text inside the graphic Labels may be left center or rig
72. running as a Windows service the files Snapshot csv Test csv and Test html will be automatically produced as a specified regardless of whether the Automated Data Output Configuration application is open Administrator Manual Configuring Automated Data Output Sample output files For reference purposes sample output files are included below Snapshot CSV ES Microsoft Excel Snapshot CSV nf Ele Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help DnamaBl amp nvikaemeco BELA 40 00 D Aria 0 BzU ESZSsHss t4u dG 5 A Al System Name yp 8 C DD HE A c H E System Name Point Tag System Date and Time Product Code Level Temperature Standard Density Gross Volume Net MASTERS X TankFarm Area1 Tank1 1 24 2000 11 08 No Product 30 60 123 0 9 46875 MASTERS TankFarm Area1 Tank2 1 24 2000 11 08 lt No Product gt 15 75 40 28115 234 14 I4 4 TF TH Snapshot I lt sda Ready p et Ge NUM ae Test HTML Elle Edit View Favorites Tools Help Sie amp 5 El gt i Search Favorites History Mail Print Edit Discuss RealGuide Back Fomord Stop Refresh Home Address E CATEMP Testhim E System Name Point Tag System Date and Time Product Code MASTERS TankFarm Areal Tankl 01 24 00 11 10 03 No Product MASTERS TankFarm Areal Tank2 01 24 00 11 10 03 No Product E Done LI T Sw
73. saves changes to an existing file Save As is particularly useful when you have created a complex display that you want to use again with minor modifications Purging files The Purge option enables you to delete unwanted symbols and graphic files from your system When you purge a file the Symbol and Condition Indexes are updated accordingly Merging files Draw allows you to merge previously created files with the file in which you are currently working Step by Step Click Merge File from the File menu item Point and click on the location where you want the merged file to appear Drag the mouse to create a box where the merged file appears The Merge Graphic File dialog box appears Type the name of the file you wish to merge or select one from the File list box Click OK to complete the operation and return to the current display screen Administrator Manual Visual Dynamic Tools Generating files After a graphic or symbol has been saved it is necessary to then generate the file Generating a symbol makes it available for placement in a graphic and generating a graphic makes it available to the Operate program Step by Step Select Generate Run Files from the File menu item The system displays a message box advising you that it is verifying the point dynamics of your graphic This means that the FuelsManager system is checking all dynamic data records to verify the validity of all point names and variables u
74. suas soled ait dl 152 Restrictions to O PONS oca ta tror ctr tec e ta dh 152 TYPES OF OPORI detnr ttm bereit rtt rte e curtem tbt eee teca 153 Malntenance eerte eo etie eH X et dre et hr RU 154 Change interface mode ueste tbt detener bte eg tpa ead 154 Device Maintenance x eed e dna e d ao dec tee ee re eS 155 Archiving Information sss eee 157 ArchiveManadqgget onu a e ea ette dr te ees 158 Opening ArchiveManager ssssssseeeeeeeeeeee eee 158 ArchiveManager configuration ssssssssssse eee 158 Selecting a real time database sssssssssseeeeeee 159 Adding or connecting to an archival data source ssssess 159 Disconnecting from an archival data source s 160 Setting the ArchiveManager schedule sieer 161 Archive input and output POINTS t ER e Pret c t E i ts 161 Specify archived points cirrosis net ere Rt er s 161 ArchiveManager EOM Backup sse 162 Point Vania bless s duas ere bt meter e reb tinal rote HO NALE 162 Adding point variables to ArchiveManager sss 163 Administrator Manual Editing point variables atenta dept ER n 163 Deleting point variables i atn nerit a a TONER gre 164 eoo a E 164 Tank polntirecords tatiana eade ie mra Ar 165 Input POINT records te erar ne UO P re tb dg elit Ense tu 166 Output poinb records tail 166 Creating Graphics oo iniciacion 167 Draw application sssssss Hee 168 Open
75. table Product Table 5ft Product 1ft Oft Product L 4f 2ft Water Water Table gea Y 0 0 0 0 1ft 1000 gal 1ft 1000 gal 2ft 2000 gal 2ft 2000 gal 5ft 5000 gal 20 ft 20 000 gal Measured product level 5ft Measured water level 1ft From the product table the product volume 5000 gal ADMOOSGVAE 1005 285 FuelsManager Defense Example 2 shows how the product and water volumes are calculated when the water level is higher than the top point in the water table 286 Inventory Management recognizes that the measured product level is below that of the bottom point in the product table so it uses the top of the water table to extend the range From the water table 1ft 2ft top minus 1ft measured water level 1000 gal Total product volume for 5ft of product and 1ft of water 6000 gal From the water table 1ft of water 1000 gal Example 2 Water level higher than the top point in the water table 7 Product Table 5ft Product 1ft ot Product 1ft 2ft Water Water Table on T 0 0 0 0 1ft 1000 gal 1ft 1000 gal 2ft 2000 gal 2ft 2000 gal 5 ft 5000 gal 20 ft 20 000 gal Measured product level 5ft Measured water level 3ft From the product table the product volume 5000 gal Inventory Management recognizes that the measured water level is above that of the top point in the water table so it uses the bottom of t
76. text background color as well as the bar graph color The background refers to an opaque box and appears behind the text Defaults settings Draw allows you to set or change various default settings of any object These defaults apply to text font size and color text background mode and color pen color thickness and appearance and brush style and color These defaults can be set in the Attributes menu Step by Step From the Attributes menu select the appropriate command to change the default setting Administrator Manual Draw application Setting the default font Step by Step From the Attributes menu select Text Font The Select Text Font dialog box appears Select the desired font size and attributes This default applies to any text created such as labels and values Setting the default text color Step by Step From the Attributes menu select Text Color The Set Default Text Color dialog box appears Selecting Palette from the Set Default Text Color dialog box displays all the colors available This default applies to any text created such as labels and values Setting the default background mode Note The Text Color amp Background Box displays your new Step by Step choice of color This color remains From the Attributes menu select Background Mode to display a cascading the same until the default is menu changed A check mark appears next to the current default mode Notice how the Text Co
77. the Automated Data Output section This feature is used to periodically write the contents of several tank point variables to an output file Automated Data Output basic functions include Reading specified variables up to a total of 98 from all tank points in the FuelsManager database at specified intervals or when a specific Process Value is triggered Writing these values to output CSV HTML and XML files 264 Administrator Manual Program Location Program Location The Automated Data Output service starts automatically whenever Windows is started however it can be configured at any time from the Start Programs FuelsManager Automated Data Output The configuration process includes specifying which tank point variables should be logged and what events initiate the log process Up to 98 tank point variables can be logged simultaneously though usually substantially fewer are needed Also there are three different types of triggers that can be defined to initiate the log process Snapshot file Periodic File HTML File XML File ADMO0O0SGVAE 1005 A Snapshot file is a CSV file written when a particular point value takes place and is designed as a snapshot of the data at the moment in time at which the trigger was tripped This file can be written whenever a specific FuelsManager database value is met whenever a specific file exists or at two individual static trigger times Trigger Point A trig
78. the conditions set for the test To disregard any changes made in the Define Alarm Process and the Define Global Alarm dialog boxes click Cancel Importing and exporting global alarms Global Alarms can be imported or exported as a comma delimited text file with the csv extension This is useful if alarms are defined for another database that you want to define within the separate database Import global alarm Step by Step From the FuelsManager Configuration application Database menu select the Alarms command the Global Alarm Definitions dialog box appears Click Import the Import Alarm Definition File dialog box appears Select the comma delimited text file you want to import and click OK The system imports the alarms and displays them in the Global Alarms Definitions dialog box Export global alarm Step by Step From the FuelsManager Configuration application Database menu select the Alarms command the Global Alarm Definitions dialog box appears Click Export to export all alarms or select the global alarm to export The Export Alarm Definition File dialog box appears Enter an export file name and click OK The system saves the global alarm s in a comma delimited text file with the csv extension ADMO003GVAE1005 81 FuelsManager Defense 82 Administrator Manual Databases FuelsManager Defense Note The FuelsManager Configuration application contains most of the configuration p
79. the product density and tank level This type of measurement technique can be used without a level gauge FuelsManager provides configuration parameters for up to three pressure instruments as shown below The following shows the use of three pressure instruments however FuelsManager allows for configuration with 1 2 or 3 transmitters Level L Top Pressure P Middle Pressure P Bottom Pressure P In addition FuelsManager allows for the configuration of the exact position of the tank including the latitude and elevation above sea level These parameters allow for corrections due to the effects of local gravity and air density as defined below ADMOOSGVAE 1005 311 FuelsManager Defense Note Alternatively the user can enter the local manually 312 D Air Density 353 x exp e eie Air Temp 273 16 Where Elevation is in meters Air Temp is in C Local Gravity 9 80616 0 025928 x A 6 9 x 10 x A 3 086 x 10 x Elevation Where A cos 2x Position in Radians For convenience FuelsManager allows for the entry of the tank position in deg min sec of latitude The following is used to convert the position in deg min sec to the position in radians em E Mins Sess Radians Cus x Deg 60 3600 The position of the pressure transmitter is critical to the hydrostatic and hybrid tank calculations since the positions can be affected by the thermal expansion or c
80. ts ceca e Re nn 63 Graphic Files dialog D OX cita Ene rang n 64 Additig a graphic Tle lames date bae etta denies 64 Help file NAM SS cot et A e 64 Input and output points in the database ssssss 64 Buttons in the Draw application sssssem nro 64 Text help file diee b ee lo us 65 Winidows help format catala dad 65 Help Files Configuration dialog box sss 65 Adding ahelp Til amp iea verti trie Ge ott ten p podes Fd 66 Start definitionss eas te a o D M e M NU Mona 66 Creating a Start Getinition aanere e ra 67 ADMOOSGVAE 1005 vii FuelsManager Defense Administering Alarms sss eene 69 AMOS ut e RD has geal aed ER rani Tes rie ir e Ee PRO 70 m E Hu 70 Alani 8c Event OJS iii A DO FE gone ei Rand 70 Pre configured alarmis s erem rrr ciet beer Loeb brace Lot LIRE NOR PA BAUR 71 User Defined alaftris ver eg eei degit ed te RO et ee data 71 Configuring alaning a te Alan ie t e de at dae 72 Creating global local alarms and templates ssssssssssssese 75 Global alarm definition seen ene inadai e 75 Creating and modifying global alarms from the Points menu 75 Alarm Assignments dialog box ssssssss eee 76 EocalAlarmlimitS 5 eh os rada o Eg nd en qe e P en tee adus 76 Alarm limit enable sssssssssssssnem eene nennen 77 Alarm templates os E t onde tein vest panas 77 Sharing QlObAalalariNSers case eco De t t Ee mee
81. used to generate an alarm if the tank command mode is selected to be Test The tank mode can be commanded to Test mode this is used by the operator in order to disable all level alarms typically used during tank gauge maintenance Enabling the Test Mode alarm ensures that an operator alarm will be generated when the test mode is selected thereby ensuring the mode is not selected accidentally LEAK RATE This variable shows the statistically calculated rate of leakage from a specific tank 358 Administrator Manual Tank Alarms Data Tank Alarms Data LEAK DATA Allows an Enable Disable State This alarm when enabled will alert every day at 12 00 AM to notify the operator that there is not enough valid data or quiet time data from the configured tank to produce a valid Leak Test Report DIGITAL ALARMS STANDARD TANK ALARM FLAGS This variable is the current standard digital alarm statuses associated with the Tank Available status are 0x1 DB Config Error 0x2 Tank Calc Error 0x4 Strap Error 0x8 API Corr Error 0x10 Critical Zone 0x20 Movement Alarm 0x40 Reverse Flow 0x80 No Flow 0x100 ETA HiHi Level 0x200 ETA High Level 0x400 ETA LoLo Level 0x800 ETA Low Level 0x2000 Testing 0x4000 Trans Adv SetPt 0x8000 Trans SD SetPt TANK MODE ALARM COMPOSITE TANK MODE ALARM This variable is a composite value that displays a coded variable representing the highest priority tank mode alarms for the tank Possible values are Normal
82. user must have appropriate privileges refer to the Security In most configurations operators do not have access to communication interface configuration The communications interfaces and associated devices of the CommManager are configured and maintained from the Communications menu found in the Configuration application Configuration can include creating an interface selecting a port creating a device and establishing connections from the database points to the designated field devices The procedures for creating interfaces and devices vary depending on the type of device you are using An interface is utilized to transfer data into or out of a system An interface is like a communication channel such as a serial port or network card Some examples include the Varec 8130 RTU Modbus Master Modbus Slave and Varec TSU INTERFACE Displays the interface description entered when the DESCRIPTION interface was created INTERFACE TYPE Displays the interface type Varec 8130 RTU Modbus Master Modbus Slave and Varec TSU PORT Displays the selected hardware port used by the interface It may be a serial port or another hardware communications channel LOCKED Indicates if the interface is available for configuration Administrator Manual Communications interface configuration Creating a new interface The types of interfaces that can be created are dependent on the drivers installed on the system Once drivers have been i
83. v 173 Displaying mo se coordiriates meine te Pct d irte tute 173 Displaying object Coordinates 2 5 eec ette a 173 Crealtirig user defined colors dcn im iere don ta 174 Graphics OorsymbolS 5 etate neo teo om ec vola e xr ae ed tea 174 Opening an existing graphic or symbol sssssssem 175 Creating a new graphic or symbol sssss e 175 Geometric 190 8 7 5 citet ade e d A eiie ree dee E cael 175 Drawing a line ii t ct tc nr e HO EUCH HG AER E CE GS PRESE RR P 175 Drawing a polyline acia ee POR ERR ERE ad 176 Drawirig a rectangle n en et ct eie cue c e um D a e 176 Dra WIND polygon eae s e t edet pet eret 176 Drawing an ellipse uc sete eese rre terere en eet a e ee 176 ADMOOSGVAE 1005 FuelsManager Defense xii DRAWINGFAN are aur rrr eee e pen eme eee reet 177 Eab6eltool 225 Re rap eh a re eee o e e e tree pce 177 Inserting a database value ssssss Hee 177 Inserting aDar graph r i hi oet tren ea e Ete ea pe a 178 Symbol index on rec rate tp ete re dort RR te ir 180 Placing symbol in a graphic teeth 180 Creating a Symbol sided aaa 180 Inserting A BUMO e Fe e e ep te re Feed bee ede ane dante 180 Command append octo to sexi te ero o ee tn em E REY 181 Graphic apperid usse tetuer dire titur at cece idit utu atu re a 182 Report apDend us ite etat ege p t E o RE HE aos 182 Flelp apperad io eviter rte tc reique leto ve Ene tS ote 182 Detail appen irs dfris ne cete eot n ate ord 182 Ins
84. volume for the effects of temperature Tank Shell Correction CTSh Volume correction for the temperature of the shell Compensates for the effect of ambient and liquid temperature effects on the shell of the tank CTSh is calculated as follows CTSh 1 ExpCoef x ATs AreaCoef x ATs x ATs Where ATs Ts Ref Temp 60 F ExpCoef MILD STEEL 12 4 x 10 STAINLESS STEEL 9 6 x 106 ALUMINUM 13 0 x 10 AreaCoef 4 0 x 10 For Non Insulated Tanks Ts 7xTl Ta 8 Where TI Tank Liquid Temperature Ta Ambient Temperature Administrator Manual Traditional tank calculations For insulated tanks Ta TI Liquid temperature Setting the Tank Material to Other allows the user to manually enter the ExpCoef and the AreaCoef Gross Observed Volume GOV The strap volume value needs to be corrected in order to arrive at the Gross Observed volume data The exact calculation used is dependent on the how the tank point was configured The following correction methods are available Default The following formula is used to calculate Gross Volume GOV TOV FW x CTSh FRA CORRVOL Where TOV Strap Volume at the current tank level FW Free water Tank Bottom Solids if any CTSh Tank Shell Correction FRA Floating Roof Adjustment CORRVOL Un measurable volume associated with tank pipe work Pre 1980 If a volume correction method with the 1980 designation is selected T
85. your tanks using the settings that exist in the Configuration Permissions that are set to the default for the operator group Tag permissions Security Actions View W amp M Security pa Categories amp Groups Operator 5 Administrator E e Access Alarm O Tag BF Permissions ad System Tag Smm O NewTagCategi B Users Ak Audit ADMOOSGVAE 1005 Name V Volume Correction Data E Process Connection Data MS Operations Data MO Engineering Data MAO Level HiHi LoLo Limit LAO Level HighiLow Limit MU Temperature HiHi LoLo Limit MO Temperature HighiLow Limit MU Density HighiLow Limit MO Flow HighiLow Limit MU Level Rate HighiLow Limit MO Pressure HighiLow Limit MO Movement Deadband MO Movement Holdoff MO Reverse Flow Holdoff MO No Flow Holdoff MO Level MO Temperature MU Density MO ssw MU standard Density M9 Solids Level The security dialog box showing a list of permissions 45 FuelsManager Defense Volume Correction Data BSW Movement Holdoff Operations Data Solids Level No Flow Holdoff Level HiHi LoLo Limit Density Temperature Temperature Temperature HiHi LoLo Limit Correction Factors Volumes Density High Low Limit Vapor Temperature Rates Level Rate High Low Limit Gauge Command Tank Transfer Status Movement Deadband Configure Tank Product Permissions that are set to the default for the operator group A o Administrator Manual Audit
86. 0 Process Value FlowRate Temp Density Step by Step Open the Data Source dialog box for the point you want to assign See Opening the Database IO Connections dialog box steps Click OPC The OPC Server Source Select dialog box appears From the list select the OPC server The list below will display the points within that OPC source Click the to open levels of the database and navigate to the specific data source point and select the point when it appears in the lower right list Click OK to close the OPC Server Source Select dialog Click OK to close the Select Data Source dialog Selecting a Local data source Step by Step Open the Data Source dialog box for the point you want to clear See Opening the Database lO Connections dialog box steps Browse to the database point you want to assign and click Select Click Local the Database Edit dialog box opens Click OK to close the Select Data Source dialog ADMOOSGVAE 1005 OPC Server Source Select dialog Note The local data source selection is only available for the Tank Point Ambient Temperature parameter 135 FuelsManager Defense 136 Engineering Units Conversion The Source Units defined on the Select Data Source dialog box instructs FuelsManager what engineering units the data value being received from the I O points are expressed in So if FuelsManager receives a value of 30 5 and the Source Units are set to feet FuelsManager knows to t
87. 1 consists of a movement that is still activate The system writes the amount transferred for that day into the Movement History database and tags the movement as Active Scenario 2 consists of a movement that is completed in this time frame The system writes the total amount transferred during the entire movement to the Movement History database The Historical Period field allows you to enter the numbers of days worth of data you want to be maintained in the movement history 1 through 999 days The System overwrites data that has exceeded this History Period with new data Administrator Manual Defining Movement Paths Defining nodes All available Source and Destination elements are called nodes You can add nodes anytime during the configuration process There are three types of nodes Tanks Units and Meters Tank nodes represent the facility s tanks Unit nodes represent a vehicle or other temporary storage container and Meter Nodes represent a flow meter through which the product is being moved Adding a Tank Node Step by Step From the Movements dialog box click Nodes The Nodes dialog box appears This dialog box lists all the nodes available for selection The defined nodes are listed by name and type From this dialog box you can add delete or modify nodes in the movement system Nodes dialog Node Type dialog Select Tank and click OK The Tanks dialog box appears This dialog box includes all database poi
88. 141 Secondary 171 Vacuum 201 Doing Profile 112 No 142 Seconds 172 Valid 202 Doing Dip 113 Not Ready 143 Series 173 Warmup 203 Finding Water 114 O R 144 Shutdown 174 Week 204 Following Water 115 Off Line 145 Start Sequence 175 Winter 205 Finding Datum 116 Off 146 Start 176 Xfr by Volume 206 Following Level 117 On Line 147 Starting 177 Xfr by Level 207 Servo 118 On 148 Stop Sequence 178 Year 208 NC 119 Open 149 Stop 179 Yes 209 One Hour 120 Opened 150 Stopping 180 I O Failed 210 Eight Hours 121 Opening 151 Summer 181 I O Disabled 211 One Day 122 Out 152 Timeout 182 Reverse Flow 212 One Week 123 Override 153 Timed Out 183 Trans Adv SetPt 213 One Month 124 OverRange 154 Top 184 Trans SD SetPt 214 Last Value 125 Over 155 Transitional 185 Scan Failure 215 Goto Zero 126 Parallel 156 Transfer 186 Gauge l O Fail 216 Goto Full Scale 127 Pressure 157 Transfer In 187 Device Alarm 217 Hand 128 Primary 158 Transfer Out 188 Field Cfg Modif 218 Invalid 129 Raise 159 Transferring 189 Raise Failure 219 Midnight 130 Raised 160 Trip 190 Lower Failure 220 Time of Day 131 Raising 161 Tripped 191 Upload Failure 221 Process 132 Ramp 162 True 192 DnLoad Failure 222 Fill 133 Ready 163 U R 193 Raise Head 223 Filling 134 Remote 164 Unauthorized 194 Lower Head 224 Empty 135 Reset 165 UnderRange 195 Run Immed Prof 225 Emptying 136 Resume 166 Under 196 Follow Wtr Lvl
89. 2 Fax 1 770 662 8939
90. 3 1 55 25 PM Pumps Pump S HIHI Temp ALARM HIHI Temperature Alarm Proces 2126 2003 11 32 05 AM Pumps Pump 2 HIHI Temp ALARM HIHI Temperature Alarm Pro Events Events are changes to a database point value that are not associated with an alarm definition but are important enough to be recorded Examples of events are Operator commands such as opening a valve or raising a tank gauge Value Change operator such as the operator entering a new manual value for water level or changing a high level alarm setpoint Value Change system such as a communication request from another system via OPC or a CommManager driver to change the density value or issue a command to reset a tank gauge Alarm amp Event Logs All Alarms and Events are recorded to the same log file and can be viewed via the FuelsManager Log File Browser feature FuelsManager creates one alarm and event file per day By default this file is written to the following folder Program Files FuelsManager FMProject Log Alarms and events can be printed manually or at specified times depending on the configuration of the Alarm Category to which the alarms belong see Security Section It is possible to reduce the number of events logged to the event log by disabling the logging of events from OPC data sources Administrator Manual Alarms Pre configured alarms Tank points contain pre configured alarms that are integrated in the tank point edit dialog
91. 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 Port 1 Fail Port 2 Fail Print Printer V1 Master Rackbus Master Upper Int Level Mid Int Level Upper Density Middle Density Bottom Density Rel Over Tens Calibration Act 311 Shipment 312 313 314 315 316 317 Receipt Water Drain Run Down Charge Blend Monitor 386 Modifiers Modifiers The standard FuelsManager modifiers are listed below Modifiers are used when the coded variable data format type is selected The user can select a modifier from the available list or create a custom modifier MODIFIER NAME Active Inactive Enable Disable Manual Off Auto Manual Auto On Off Open Close Raise Lower Run Stop Start Stop Start Stop Reset Trip Reset Up Down Fill Mode Tank Mode ITG 60 70 ITG 50 Tank Mode 2 NMS530 ADMO03GVAE1005 COMMAND COMMAND COMMAND COMMAND COMMAND COMMAND 1 Active Enable Manual Manual On Open Raise Run Start Start Trip Up Inactive Stop Raise Head Raise Head Stop Follow Level 2 Inactive Disable Off Auto Off Close Lower Stop Stop Stop Reset Down Xfr by Level Fill Lower Head Lower Head Fill Raise 3 Auto Reset Xfr by Volume Empty Clear Empty Stop 4 5 Xfr by Diff Xfr by Vol Run Run Immed Prof Run Upper Int Level Mass Test Follow Wtr Lvl Test Upper Density 6 COMMAND 7 Xfr by Diff Mass
92. 338 Systems Seals Ie petere v aba Herb e E ED RR 339 Glossary of Terms ssssssssssssssssee eene 341 Glossary of terms ota tere d T E at 342 Tank Points Process Data 343 Product Transfer Data oett tet oe tea detectors 352 Tank Alarms Data peor rette ERE RUE 354 Scaling and engineering units data sssssssssss 361 Tank configuration data sssssss eee 365 Input points process data oo cnet Hee 371 Output points process data 0 0 0 0 ccc cece eme 372 Triggered points process data nnee 373 Units EU be Be a dah be ee ede dvds 374 Polnt format o de EA RR RM mes 383 Coded Variables iiss ccs o ne doe echa ed e d e RI e s 384 Moditlers uer ee eon m RI D quce ei e e e gebe Rd ena 387 Tank strapping table ssssssssssse Hee 388 Index orc ace eer ae eevee ec e estate ca t eese sec ced Dc antc tae cs 391 xviii Administrator Manual Installation and Setup FuelsManager Defense Note If FuelsManager has not been configured the Administrator should perform the all the procedures in this chapter Before You Begin This section describes how to install FuelsManager This chapter also provides an overview of how a system could be networked In most cases FuelsManager is installed and pre configured on the computers before they arrive on site Further information on how to use the Operate user interface t
93. 37 FuelsManager Defense For data transmitted the From column defines the value in the FuelsManager database and the To column defines the value that will written to the communications interface In either case transmit or receive if a value is not defined in the lookup table no conversion is applied FuelsManager Translation Table Database Point Lookup PLC Valve 101 Procees zd m Value Start SES 404 o Value 101 Pause 102 caleta n Database point is of type Coup kane CONVERS coded variable and setto Mee Fi Start to the value Start NOUO FuelsManager Translation Table Database Point Lookup PLC Valve101 Procees Value 3 Value 30 Lookup Table converts PLC s value of 30 to value PLC sends value of 30 of 3 FuelsManager Translation Table Database Point Lookup PLC Valve 101 Procees Value 70 Value 30 Value of 70 is not in the Lookup Table so no conversion take place PLC sends value of 70 138 Administrator Manual Configuring translation tables Scaling Functions A scaling function defines mathematical formula that is applied to the value before it is received or transmitted by FuelsManager The following formulas are supported Y A X B Y X A B A Y X A B C C Y X A B A D C C In these formulas the variable Y represents the result of the scaling and X is the value before scaling The c
94. 3GVAE1005 299 FuelsManager Defense 300 LPG quantity calculation from liquid density Calculation of LPG quantity from liquid density at 15 C LPG C amp LPG C 1980 Overall calculation scheme 1 Measure level average liquid temperature average vapor temperature average pressure in vapor space 2 Input liquid density at 15 C Calculate VCF and hence liquid density at tank conditions Correct measured level for thermal effects and buoyancy This depends upon the nature of the gauge Convert corrected level to liquid volume Correct liquid volume for tank thermal expansion and pressure effects Convert liquid volume to equivalent volume at 15 C Calculate liquid mass from liquid volume at 15 C and liquid density at 15 C Correct total tank volume for thermal and pressure effects 0 Calculate vapor volume at measured temperature from corrected total volume and liquid corrected volume at tank conditions 11 From liquid density vapor temperature and vapor space pressure calculate vapor density 12 Calculate vapor mass from vapor volume and vapor density at measured conditions 13 Calculate total mass as liquid mass plus vapor mass 14 Calculate weight from total mass and liquid density 15 Display the required results Po c5 19 00 i 9 91 Details for each step Step 1 The Liquid temperature and vapor temperatures should both be weighted averages to reflect the volume in each vertical section In t
95. 9700 ADMO003GVAE1005 FuelsManager Administrator Manual www varec com gi Varec Inc 5834 Peachtree Corners East Norcross Atlanta GA 30092 USA Tel 1 770 447 9202 Fax 1 770 662 8939 Varec Copyright All rights reserved Printed in the United States of America Except as permitted under the United States Copyright Act of 1976 no part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of the Publisher Varec Inc 5834 Peachtree Corners East Norcross Atlanta Georgia 30092 Phone 770 447 9202 Fax 770 662 8939 Trademarks Acknowledged Trademarks of other products mentioned in this manual are held by the companies producing them FuelsManager is a registered trademark of Varec Inc Microsoft amp is a registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Acrobat Reader is a registered trademark F Systems Incorporated Crystal Reports is a registered trademark A Objects All other trademarks are acknowledged ADMO03GVAE1005 FuelsManager Defense Using This Manual The FuelsManager Defense Administrator manual explains not only the configuration and maintenance of the FuelsManager System but also explains how to use the FuelsManager applications Draw Report Configuration and Operate Before rea
96. Bit Number of Bits and Start Data Source Bit parameters on the Select Source dialog are enabled The Start Bit value defines the first bit position in the FuelsManager database point that should be processed The Number of Bits value defines how many bits in the FuelsManager database point should be processed starting with the Start Bit The Start Data Source Bit value defines the first bit position in the I O point that the start bit and subsequent number of bits should be written to The following example shows data transmitted by FuelsManager the same functionality applied to data received by FuelsManager Fuels Manager PLC Database Point Value 00000101 B 1 T 35 8 CF opo o o o 1 oT1 Start Data Source Bit 5 Points with the Bitfield Data option enabled allow up to 32 independent data source assignments This allows the combination of multiple bits into a single integer or the writing of single bits from multiple integers into a single PLC register MyNumber Process Value 0101 000 012345 OT 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 Start Bit 1 Number of hits 3 4 Again the following example shows data transmitted by FuelsManager the same functionality applied to data received by FuelsManager Administrator Manual Configuring bit field data sources FuelsManager Database Points 012345267 MyNumbert o 1 o 1 0 o 0 0 Start Bitz 1 Number of bitsz 3 Start Data Source Bi
97. CRC16 on all the point parameters that can affect the data integrity Users can make changes to other point parameters without affecting the WMChecksum value In order to allow the W amp M official to easily view the WMChecksum values for all the sealed points ViewRTU includes a View Weights amp Measures List menu option under the Options menu item This opens a Weights and Measures List dialog displaying all points in the 8130 RTU their WMSeal statuses and the WMChecksum value W amp M Seal Communications The status of the WMSeal parameter is communicated to FuelsManager via the PntStatus parameter in the particular RTU point The bit position of the WMSeal Administrator Manual Sealing the Point in 8130 RTU information is specific to the particular point type FuelsManager automatically knows which bit position contains the WMSeal information FuelsManager combines this WMSeal information from the 8130 RTU with its own W amp M Seal information in order to determine if the particular data value is W amp M approved ADMO03GVAE1005 329 FuelsManager Defense Edit tank data W amp M tab 330 Sealing TankPoint variables in FuelsManager The FuelsManager Tank Database includes Tag Seal Data for each tank The Tag Seal Data includes a seal for the Tank a seal for each input Process Variable and an integer Seal ID that denotes the revision of Tank Seal Data The Tank Database is stored in file FM_TankPoint
98. Configuration application If you don t do this you will not be able to view graphics created on the previous System Step by Step From the FuelsManager Configuration Menu bar click User Interface and then click Draw Graphics command The Draw Application opens Click on the File menu and select Batch Run Files from the sub menu select the Symbols command The Batch Compile dialog box appears see opposite select the Build All option A confirmation dialog box appears select OK When operation finishes select Cancel to close the dialog box To regenerate Graphics click on the File menu and select Batch Run Files from the sub menu select the Graphics command The Batch Compile dialog box appears select the Build All option A confirmation dialog box appears select OK When operation finishes select Cancel to close the dialog box User Interface File perate New gt Draw Graphics Open Create Reports Gaye Purge Merge File Detail Mode Detail Data ja iun Files Graphics Exit Draw Symbole Administrator Manual Upgrading from FuelsManager 4 3 Batch Compile dialog Batch Compile box Altered Symbol Files BATCH RUN GENERATION File Select All Command Status Unselect All aa Build All Regenerating reports After upgrading from the previous version of FuelsManager the user must regenerate all reports Failure to do so will result in the inabil
99. EFINED PRODNAME U LEVEL 32 FET 2 12 R7 32 12 S wM Select Oneration Tools and objects for reports A report can contain tables data values used to represent real time data points and labels used and identify the values Additional items that can be found in a report include column and row totals and averages These components are described below Tables FuelsManager provides the capability to display information in a Tabular format The user can create tables as well as edit and delete tables Some editing techniques include sizing the table defining the number of rows and columns inserting deleting columns and moving the table Labels A Label is text used to identify values Creating label attributes includes entering the label name selecting the appearance and positioning the label The user can select the label size font and style ADMOOSGVAE 1005 199 FuelsManager Defense 200 Summary Report Setup dialog box Values A Value represents real time data connected to a database Creating values include selecting a database and corresponding points and variables This procedure used to create values is the same procedure used in the Draw application Summary Report Setup Number Of Columns 2 19 3 MV Outline Table Independent Variable Select Database System All Tanks e Tank Points C Active Tanks T C Inactive Tanks Column Totals Set Table Sorting Order No Column
100. EVEL CHANGE UNITS This variable is the engineering units for the tank level change rate process variable This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified MASS FLOW MININIUM TANK MINIMUM MASS FLOW SCALING This variable is the minimum range for the tank mass flow process variable This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified MASS FLOW MAXIMIUM TANK MAXIMUM MASS FLOW SCALING This variable is the maximum range for the tank mass flow process variable This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified ADMO03GVAE1005 363 FuelsManager Defense Scaling and Engineering Units Data MASS FLOW UNITS MASS FLOW UNITS This variable is the engineering units for the tank mass flow process variable This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified VAPOR DENSITY MININIUM TANK MINIMUM GAS DENSITY This variable is the minimum range for the tank gas density process variable This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified VAPOR DENSITY MAXIMIUM TANK MAXIMUM GAS DENSITY This variable is the maximum range for the tank gas density process variable This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified VAPOR DENSITY UNITS GAS DENSITY UNITS This variable is the engineering units for the tank gas density process variable This variable can be viewed from the Opera
101. FuelsManager file directories ssssssssss eene 54 Program directory Program Files FuelsManagen occ 54 FM Project Program Files FuelsManager FMProject sssssss 54 MTOOlS eremo eq oiu fee des aar LM Penis ea 54 NR 55 Setting up file directOrles zs iere o tra ibid 55 Defining system resources ssssssssss eee 56 Products ett etre o trt ig stc A ec e PE a MEC aus 56 Creating a new product definition sssse 56 Assignment Options Product es 57 Use Correction Method ss uc iot eet th es ee e ceni deett Der her ence 57 Use Standard Densily e Rt tte REDE caia 57 Use Temperature O A eat er ete ee e tee edat 58 Importing exporting product definitions sss 59 Mo CT EMITTE 59 Creating SITBgs md o Te reo ede da pe det Hed e 60 Deleting Or editing a String ose ren treten eee 60 String configuration dialog box sssssss e 60 Importing exporting string information ssss 61 Iraporting Stritigs suso te n eir tet estre d 61 Code warlableS secet t eda tende mede dta ide beendet 61 Creating a new coded variable sss 62 Coded Variables Configuration dialog box 62 Deleting a coded Varlables ua eret t gl erste deeds 62 Importing coded variables oe certet te ns 62 MOGIT er ster EET E E O E EE 63 Modifiers Configuration dialog box ssssssm e 63 Creating amodi Er a em M e ea 63 Graphic Tle NaIMeS eter rete reete dei
102. FuelsManager specifications such as real time database configuration and device communications The FuelsManager Configuration application is for top level users such as administrators and maintenance personnel and is used for administration of the FuelsManager application suite The user can define start up options access define resources configure the database points and alarms configure or maintain the FMDataManager and CommManager Security can be accessed to set up users and groups and control data access FuelsManager Configuration also provides access to the Operate Report and Draw applications from the User Interface menu IE Configuration Inl x System Resources Database Communications User Interface Movement Help i hb gt FuelsManager ES Operate The FuelsManager Operate application allows an operator to track and monitor and or control all activity and product movements The Operate program is intended for operations personnel and can be configured with a login script to start automatically upon user log The Operate program lets the operator interact with the facility during run time It provides dynamic interaction with the FuelsManager database In Operate the operator can monitor and control equipment through the use of real time graphics reports and other windows The operator can also manage alarms and view trends Other functions may include monitoring database points and responding to data by issui
103. Help Append Select a file from the list and click OK to return to the Append Attributes dialog box The name is displayed in the File Name box at the bottom of the Append Attributes dialog box Detail append This option button is used when more information relating to a tank needs to be displayed The button displays the Tank Detail of the selected point Rs by Step Select the Detail option button in the Append Type group box Click Select in the Database group box The Select Database Point dialog box appears Select the appropriate database point and corresponding variable by clicking the Database Point or Variable buttons Refer to the Values section for more information Click OK Administrator Manual Draw application Inserting a bitmap The Bitmap tool is used to insert a BMP file Bitmaps can be used to represent equipment such as tanks pumps valves and pipeline segments to include images such as company logos and emblems or to include digital photographs such as plant overviews Step by Step Select the Bitmap tool or select Add and click Bitmap Click on area of insert to define corner Drag the cursor to define an area within which the symbol will be located and release the mouse button The Select BMP File dialog box appears Click on the desired file and click OK The bitmap is displayed The user is able to size the bitmap by clicking and dragging on the graphic Select BMP Fi
104. Historical Period should be set to 60 or 90 days For details on how to add the necessary additional tank point variables and configure the precision and historical period see the Archiving information section of this manual The following section details how to override the ArchiveManager minimum sample interval of 10 minutes and set the sample interval to 5 minutes 244 Administrator Manual To set the default minimum to 5 minutes To set the default minimum to 5 minutes ACHINE on cal Machine EJ HKEY LOCAL MACHINE ExporfOPoints REG D WORD 0x1 MinUpdateTime REG D WORD xs SpeotyExporPoints REG DWORD 0 HKEY LOCAL MACH INE registry settings ADMOOSGVAE 1005 245 FuelsManager Defense Setting Sample Interval to 5 Minutes Archive Manager Configuration Real time Database M Select Historical Database FM System Access Microsoft SQL Server Disconnect Start Time HH MM 00 00 Archive Input and Output Points Interval in Minutes 10 N Specify Archived Points Historical Period in Days 60 Automatic End of Month Backup Tank Point Variables Precision Bottom Pressure P1 Double Cathodic Protection Byte Date Installed Date Density Maximum Double Density Minimum Double Density Units Units Density Double Description Desc Flea Movin m Dei ia 20 Q C O C Cc O on Step by Step From the FuelsManager Configuration application click the Database menu and click ArchiveManager T
105. I L Ibs ft Change of State COS Level Deadband Change of State COS Temp Deadband External Module Address Channel for Communications Tank Gauge ID m millimeters s sixteenths Convert Level to standard Change of State COS Level Deadband External Module Address Channel for Communications Tank Gauge ID Baud Rate Data bits amp Parity Operating Mode Change of State COS Level Deadband Change of State COS Temp Deadband 325 FuelsManager Defense Sakura Level Tranmitter No TI 111 No TI 150 No Veeder Root TLS 350 No Whessoe Bus ITG No Whessoe Varec ATT4000 No WV1900 No 26 Administrator Manual Sealing the Point in 8130 RTU Applying the Software Seal Parameters that will be effected by the application of a Wi EDIT POINT software seal are Point Help E shown in an alternate color Current Point tt Point Desc NMS53 00 NMS53 Proservo Tank Gauge Point Tag NMS53 00 Weights amp Measures Seal Disable External Module Address 255 Channel for Communications 0 Tank Gauge ID 0x00 Gauge Scanning Mode F Ft M Meters m millimeters F Fahrenheit C Celsius G g mL A API L Ibs ft3 Gauge Command Undefined Dynamic Matrix Group 0 Vertical Matrix Position 0 Horizontal Matrix Position 0 Write Data Undefined Command Reply Data Undefined Status of Last Command Undefined Tank Level Displacer Position Tank Temperature Minimize Next m Download Connections Previous E
106. Last 191 Uninstalling FuelsManager 9 Unit Node Adding 232 Exporting 238 Units 374 Engineering 86 Update Complete 258 Update Failed 258 Upgrading versions prior to 4 3 256 USB Key 6 USB key 8 User Creating deleting or Renaming 39 Defined 71 Defining Properties 40 Interface 10 Multiple 21 Privilege 46 ADMOOSGVAE 1005 user Windows 38 Users 38 Creating and Editing 38 V Value 188 200 Version 4 3 10 Vertical 172 Vessel 1 Leak Detection 250 Tank Points 119 Vessel 2 Entering Information 123 Leak Detection 251 View Menu 33 Volume Available volume 298 Remaining volume 299 Volume Calculations 21 Volume correction 275 Volume Correction Factor 290 Volume Correction Factor VCF 274 Volume Correction Methods 274 Volume of Sediment and Water Correction Method 289 Volumetric Analysis Leak Detection 240 Ww Water Definition Mode 129 Water Table 127 Water Drain Movement Type 223 Weight in a Pressurized Tank 296 Weight in Air 296 Weights amp measures 126 Weights and Measures 322 Checksums 328 Windows Help Format 65 Terminology ii Windows Server 13 X Xfr Modes Movement Type 224 397 FuelsManager Defense 398 Administrator Manual This page is left intentionally blank www varec com Varec Inc 5834 Peachtree Corners East Norcross Atlanta GA 30092 USA Tel 1 770 447 920
107. Left Right 0 2 Top 0 5C Bottom D 5t Orientation Paper Type Portrait Letter 8 5 x 11 Landscape Cancel Setting the headers and footers The report header and footer appear on every report page inside the set margins The Edit Font button sets the header font appearance The footer font assumes the header s attributes but the font size remains at a fixed 10 point size These attributes are applied before or after the header is entered Administrator Manual Report The date and time appear in the bottom left corner of the first page The page number Page appears in the bottom right corner Its font attributes are the same as the header and footer fonts but at a fixed 10 point size Step by Step Select Format and click Headers and Footers Select Edit Font to change the font for the header and footer The header and footer can have different font types Select OK when completed entering all information Report Header Footer Report Header Footer Format Format dialog box Header C Footer Size 10 Font Courier New Bold Size 10 talc Cancel Edit Font Setting print times and report status In the Printer list box the user assigns a default printer to the selected report The selected printer can only be changed in the Report Editor dialog box Step by Step Select Format and click Report Details Select the print status printer and type in the time
108. Low Low minimum empty level is the same as the low low level alarm limit Note Selecting the User Defined option also enables the Minimum Operating limit level alarm This alarm functions independently of the Low and Low alarms and is intended to give an additional stage of level alarm monitoring ADMO0O0SGVAE 1005 369 FuelsManager Defense Tank Configuration Data GAUGE TYPE This parameter defines the type of automatic tank gauge used by this tank FuelsManager uses this parameter for display only This parameter can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified GAUGE TYPE MODIFIER This parameter defines the commands available to the operator for a particular automatic tank gauge For example V Raise Lower FLOAT MASS This parameter is used for LPG volume correction methods where float type automatic tanks gauges are used It defines the mass of the float FuelsManager uses this to compensate the level value reported by the tank gauge FLOAT DENSITY This parameter is used for LPG volume correction methods where float type automatic tanks gauges are used It defines the density of the float FuelsManager uses this to compensate the level value reported by the tank gauge FLOAT DIAMETER This parameter is used for LPG volume correction methods where float type automatic tanks gauges are used It defines the diameter of the float FuelsManager uses this to compensate the level value reported by the tank g
109. Movement Alarm No Flow Reverse Flow or Testing FuelsManager calculates this alarm based on the current product movement of the tank and the currently operator selected tank mode ALARM API CORRECTION API CORRECTION ERROR This variable is a coded variable value that displays a status of either Normal or API Corr Error if the Density or Temperature is outside of the range for the selected volume correction method ALARM CALCULATION CALCULATION ERROR This variable is a coded variable value that displays a status of either Normal or Tank Calc Error if FuelsManager is unable to perform the tank volume calculation due to an internal error ALARM CRITICAL ZONE LEVEL IN CRITICAL ZONE This variable is a coded variable value that displays a status of either Normal or Critical Zone if the current tank level is between the Fully Floating and Fully Landed heights ALARM DAtabASE CONF DAtabASE CONFIGURATION ERROR This variable is a coded variable value that displays a status of either Normal or DB Config Error if FuelsManager is unable to perform operation for this tank due to an internal configuration error ALARM ETA HIGH LEVEL HIGH LEVEL ETA ALARM ADMO0O0SGVAE 1005 359 FuelsManager Defense Tank Alarms Data This variable is a coded variable value that displays a status of either Normal or ETA High Level if the ETA High level alarm is active see above for details of ETA alarms ALARM ETA HIHI LEVEL HIGH HIGH LEVEL ETA ALARM
110. OImPmaricd cu cud it e rtr tee to tee di e 194 Viewing file groups cu noie nd eror teda Fe qute cued request nt eum rar d te dca ed 194 Th amp gtraphie Index nio pde id 194 Thi amp symbol INdEX iia bee ete ee re ue tds 194 The condition dnadex 3 2 8 aet ettet ets 195 Keyboard shortcuts for draw tools o n 196 Administrator Manual Opening Report EXITINGHRE Ort csset etre Fe n e ENERO ERR Meer Re Pre defined standard reports sss eene Tools and objects for reports THADIOS E ikclo ET WEES LE Column row totals and averages sssssssss eee Summary reporte setate ttn ed er te eet Object Functions in summary reports sssssssse narnia rca Creating a new summary report sssssssssmHe eee eee Summary report Setup dialog box n se Creating a table in a summary report ninio Table Format dialog box sssse Creating labels in a summary report oo eee sss Creating values in a summary report sss Creating column totals Dynamic TepOortS xiii RUN Riera te teo aiai Object Functionality of dynamic reports Creating a new dynamic report ssssssssssssseeenene Creating tables in a dynamic report sssssssss no nancnnn rca Creating labels in a dynamic report Creating values in a dynamic report sss Creating totals and averages ssssssssssssemeeeemeee Adding pages xac er be tein coe P e Pe OR eh t Ads Deleting Bages J
111. OPY DELETE EXPORT IMPORT ADMO0O0SGVAE 1005 AND POINT LIST Database Edit dialog box The Current Database System displays the system database on which the Database Point list is based ACTIVE LEVELS The Active Levels field displays the number of database tag levels for the selected database The Database button allows the user to select an alternate FuelsManager database to configure The Point Name and the Point List display the tagname for the currently selected database point The icon at the left of the point list defines the type of point Users can search for known database point names by typing in the tagname in the Point Name field The Prev Level and Next Level buttons allow the user to navigate up and down through the FuelsManager database tree The user can also move down to the next level by double clicking on the point in the point list The Select button picks the current point and closes the Database Edit dialog box This option is only applicable when the Database Edit dialog is opened from Operate or CommManager The Close button closes the Database Edit dialog box The Edit button opens the Edit Point dialog box for the selected point The format of the Edit point dialog box differs depending on the type of point selected The New button opens the Add Point dialog box allowing the user to select the type of database point to be created The Copy button opens the Point Copy Rename dialog box allowi
112. OW SCALING This variable is the maximum range for the tank flow process variable This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified FLOW UNITS FLOW ENGINEERING UNITS This variable is the engineering units for the tank flow process variable This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified PRESS VAPOR MININIUM TANK MINIMUM VAPOR PRESSURE SCALING This variable is the minimum range for the tank vapor pressure process variable This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified PRESS VAPOR MAXIMIUM TANK MAXIMIUM VAPOR PRESSURE SCALING This variable is the maximum range for the tank vapor pressure process variable This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified PRESS VAPOR UNITS VAPOR PRESSURE UNITS This variable is the engineering units for the tank vapor pressure process variable This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified LEVEL RATE MININIUM TANK MINIMUM LEVELRATE SCALING This variable is the minimum range for the tank level change rate process variable This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified LEVEL RATE MAXIMIUM TANK MAXIMIUM LEVELRATE SCALING This variable is the maximum range for the tank level change rate process variable This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified LEVEL RATE UNITS RATE OF L
113. SV support subfolders are not automatically created by FuelsManager These folders are created by your Varec project engineer 54 FuelsManager file directories The selected hard drive subdirectories and file contents vary according to your facility requirements Program directory Program Files FuelsManager The FuelsManager directory which is not displayed in the System Control Options dialog box contains all the FuelsManager system files The FuelsManager directory is always separate from the project directory and it is where the program was installed FM Project Program Files FuelsManager FMProject The FMProject directory is the main directory that stores all the project specific files such as CommManager data database definitions strapping tables and alarm definitions This directory also contains the Graphic Report and other subdirectories Archives Contains Archival and Movement databases when using MS Access database type CM Data Contains communication interface definitions CSV Contains exported configuration files Detail Contains all standard and custom tank detail graphics Graphics Contains all saved and generated graphic and seasonal files Log Contains all Alarm and Event logs Reports Contains all saved and generated report files RTU Contains RTU Configuration and DVR files Strap Contains all exported tank strapping tables Support Contains various other files used to configure your FuelsManager data
114. Setup dialog box appears In the Summary Report Setup dialog box the user sets the specifications of the Summary report The components of the dialog box are described below Summary Report Setup dialog box Summary Report Setup Number Of Columns 2 19 3 IV Outline Table Independent Variable Select Database System All Tanks f Tank Points C Active Tanks Danese C Inactive Tanks Column Totals Set Table Sorting Order No Column Totals c Group Entries by System Cc A Group Entries By Product Total Everything in Column In the Number of Type in a number from 2 to 19 This option is also available Columns when creating a table The Independent This option designates which tanks are to be displayed in Variable the report All Tanks Active Tanks Tank Mode is not stopped or Inactive Tanks Tank Mode is stopped Select Database Click Database to select which databases are to be included System in the report One or more databases can be selected Set table Sorting In the Set table Sorting Order section the user selects an Order option to group Tank point entries The entries can be grouped alphabetically and numerically by database systems by products or both If both the system and products are selected the points are grouped by system with products nested inside each system 202 Administrator Manual Report Column Totals In the Column Totals section the user selects how to display colu
115. Standard Volume GOV Gross Observed Volume FW Free water Tank Bottom Solids if any BSW Percentage of bottoms sediment and water impurities VCF Volume Correction Factor The value of FW in the net volume calculation is always zero The FW value is subtracted from the TOV as defined above The FW is zero in the net volume calculation it is subtracted from the Gross Volume see above The value of BSW in the net volume calculation is always zero 293 FuelsManager Defense 294 Water nor subter The value of FW in the net volume calculation is always zero VSW Subtracted from The BSW value is subtracted from the TOV as Net Volume defined above VSW Subtracted from The BSW is zero in the Net volume calculation it is subtracted from the Gross ri Volum ass vella Volume see above In addition if a correction method with the Japan designation was selected the following Net volume calculation will be applied Kaiji Kentei Kyoukai Floating Roof Tank Net volume of Kaiji Kentei Kyoukai Japanese authorization organization uses the following equation NSV TOV FW x CTSh x VCF x 1 0 BS amp W 100 0 FRA Where NSV Net Standard Volume TOV Strap Volume at the current tank level FW Free Water CTSh Tank Shell Correction VCF Volume Correction Factor BSW Percentage of bottoms sediment and water impurities FRA Floating Roof Adjustment Shin Nihon Kentei Kyoukai 1 Floati
116. Step by Step Open the Data Source dialog box for the point you set See Opening the Database lO Connections dialog box steps Click Manual The Current Type changes to Manual Entry Click OK to close the Select Data Source dialog ADMO0O0SGVAE 1005 133 FuelsManager Defense Select a Communication Interface dialog Note The exact process for selecting the device and I O point is specific to the interface selected 134 Selecting a Comm data source Select A Communication Interface System Name MSIZEMORE Select System Interface Description Interface Type Port Locked INTERFACE 004 Modbus Master UNASSIGNED Unlocked INTERFACE 007 Varec 8130 RTU UNASSIGNED Unlocked Step by Step Open the Data Source dialog box for the point you want to clear See Opening the Database lO Connections dialog box steps Click Comm The Select a Communication Interface dialog box appears and lists all available Interfaces Select the Comm interface that you want to assign and select the device and I O point from the selected interface Click OK to close the Select Data Source dialog Administrator Manual Assigning data sources Selecting an OPC data source OPC Server Source Select System NSIZEMORE p Selected OPC Server Endress Hauser DataManager 1 Scan Time 1000 mSec 100 10000 Endress Hauser ArchiveManager 1 Endress Hauser DataManager 1 Meters Alarm amp Ack Data M 300 M 40
117. System Registry along with the server name Administrator Manual Printers Printers Printers are used to print Alarm Event reports and Log File Browser reports that were created in Report The available printers and reports are listed in the ReportManager dialog box in Operate FuelsManager will recognize all local printers and allow the user to choose between them under the ReportManager If the Windows default print device is also a local printer FuelsManager will use that as its default printer If the Windows default printer is a network printer or if the desired print device s are network printers additional steps must be taken to ensure FuelsManager can utilize the device Using a Network Printer In all but a few cases FuelsManager will be set up to run as a service under Windows 2000 or XP Any application that runs as a service however is unable to enumerate network printers because printers belong to users and not to the system In order for FuelsManager to be able to see a network print device the printer must be set up to be accessed as a local port To accomplish this create a local printer on the local system that is mapped to the printer to the remote system Consult your Microsoft Windows documentation for further information ADMO003GVAE1005 15 FuelsManager Defense 16 This dialog box can be obtained by double clicking on the Services icon in the Control Panel window Startup The u
118. TA HIGH LEVEL ETA This variable is the estimated time to arrive at the High level alarm setpoint based on the current flow rate The alarm is activated when the time remaining before reaching the High level setpoint is less than the advisory limit defined by the Trans Adv Setpoint see Product Transfer Data section LEVEL LOW ETA LOW LEVEL ETA This variable is the estimated time to arrive at the Low level alarm setpoint based on the current flow rate The alarm is activated when the time remaining before reaching the Low level setpoint is less than the advisory limit defined by the Trans Adv Setpoint see Product Transfer Data section LEVEL LOLO ETA LOW LOW LEVEL ETA This variable is the estimated time to arrive at the Low Low level alarm setpoint based on the current flow rate The alarm is activated when the time remaining before reaching the Low Low level setpoint is less than the advisory limit defined by the Trans Adv Setpoint see Product Transfer Data section TEMPERATURE ALARM COMPOSITE TEMP ALARM STATUS This variable is a composite value that displays a coded variable representing the highest priority temperature alarms for the tank Possible values are Normal High High High Low Low Low This alarm is calculated by FuelsManager based on the current temperature and the alarms limits configured for the tank TEMP HIHI LIMIT CURRENT HI HI TEMP LIMIT This variable is the limit for a High High temperature alarm If t
119. Tank1 ValveStatus and Area31 Tank1 PumpStatus can be added to a tank detail via the Use Template mode The input point Area31 Motor BearingTemp cannot be added to the tank detail Step by Step From the File menu click Detail Data from the sub menu select the Use Template option Click on the Hand selector icon in the toolbar and then select the desired value Select the Attributes command from the Edit menu The Value Attributes dialog box appears Click Select next to the Variable entry The Template Configuration dialog box appears Inthe Tag Name edit box enter the Level 0 database name Input or Output point as it appears in the system database In our previous example you would enter Valve Status or Pump Status n addition to the Tag Name the user also selects either the Input or Output point type selects which parameter should be displayed i e Process Value Engineering Units etc and selects the data format of the parameter Click OK Template Configuration Dialog Tag Name Point Type Input C Output Variable Alarm Status Alarm V Display Quality Data ADMOOSGVAE 1005 Note The Tag Name field in the Template Configuration dialog box is case sensitive you must enter the Level 0 tag name exactly as it appears in the database Template Configuration dialog box 189 FuelsManager Defense 190 Editing objects Editing objects involves moving copying and deleting sel
120. Totals C Group Entries by System tf Group Entries By Product Total Everything in Column In addition to selecting a database point and point parameter other attributes include font appearance positioning field width precision and engineering units These attributes are set in the Database Value Attributes dialog box displayed during value creation The user has the ability to customize or automatically set the field display Field Width is the number of characters allowed for the value Precision is the allotted number of decimal places if the value is numerical The user can also convert to new engineering units if necessary The attributes also include font appearance and positioning The user can select the value size font and style The table Snap option is enabled for aligning the value if the Snap to table option under the table menu is checked Variables are parameters of a point such as time temperature and density A single point can have multiple variables For example a point is defined as Tank Farm A Tank 22 Tank Point The variables associated with the Tank Point may be temperature sediment and tank level The variables available for Input and Output points are different from those available for Tank points Some examples of Tank point variables include temperature level and density Input and Output point variables may include an alarm status or process value For a complete listing of point p
121. UME CORRECTION TIME This process variable is the last time that the tank volume correction was updated This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified VAPOR DENSITY VAPOR DENSITY This process variable is the density of the gas in the vapor space above the product in the tank This variable is normally entered by the operator but can be linked to automatic tank gauging systems to allow remote commands to the tank gauges This data is normally only applicable to tanks containing liquified hydrocarbons or tanks using hydrostatic or hybrid tank calculations VAPOR DENSITY TIME VAPOR DENSITY TIME This process variable is the last time that the tank gas density was updated This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified VAPOR PRESS P3 VAPOR PRESSURE P3 This process variable is the pressure of the vapor space above the product in the tank This variable is usually measured by automatic tank gauging but can be manually entered by the operator This data is normally only applicable to tanks containing liquified hydrocarbon or those using hydrostatic or hybrid tank calculations VAPOR PRESSURE TIME VAPOR PRESSURE TIME This process variable is the last time the Vapor Pressure P3 was updated This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified This variable is usually measured by automatic tank gauging but can be manually entered by the operator This data i
122. Variable Format Details Input Source Input output point Add Edit Remove Description System Endress Hauser DataManager 1 Mete MSIZE OPC Note Changes made to the Data Source settings or the Alarm Definition cannot be discarded by the Cancel button they have already been saved 100 Administrator Manual Creating and editing triggered points Creating and editing triggered points A Triggered Point serves as a monitor that views a single database point such as an input point from a gauge You can set the trigger point to send to an output point OPC server or PLC when it observes a change in the point its monitoring Note You must first select a point format before the other attributes can be addressed Once selected the default minimum and maximum values appear in the Minimum and Maximum Value edit boxes if the format is numeric Edit Point dialog box RE Wales Y 401 tregger x Triggered Disabled Tag Category Defautt y T Display Quality Data Variable Format Details Output Destinations input Source Undefined TT Bitfield Data Units Undefined Modifier Min Value ADMOOSGVAE 1005 101 FuelsManager Defense Entering Variable Format information for a triggered point From the Edit Point dialog box Variable Format tab Click Format to select the data storage format The Select Data Storage Format dialog box appears Make the Data Storage format selection an
123. Variable buttons Click OK The Dynamic Bar Attributes dialog box appears Edit the data source or define the attributes of the bar graph such as color and style in the Dynamic Bar Attributes dialog box Administrator Manual Draw application Dynamic Bar Attributes Database Point Data Database WSIZEMORE Point TankFarm Tank 3 Tank Variable Level Tank Level Type Double Bar Attributes Border Attributes Brush Pen Null Bar Style Value Range C Horizontal JV Use Variable Limits Vertical Maximum Deviation Bar Mormon Reverse Direction Select Brush to select the color pattern and style of the bar fill Select Pen to select the color size and style of the outline Select Color to select the background color of the bar graph Select either the Horizontal or Vertical option and corresponding Reverse Dir and Deviation option Select Use Variable Limits to have the bar graph object automatically track the minimum and maximum scaling limits of the database point it is linked to If you wish to set the bar graph s minimum and maximum limits independently of the associated database point clear the Use Variable Limits check mark ADMOOSGVAE 1005 Background Color Bkg Color o OK Cancel Dynamic Bar Attributes dialog box Note To bring the bar graph forward over a symbol click Pull to Front from the Edit menu 179 FuelsManager Defense 180 S
124. When creating a value for a Summary report the first step is to establish the Independent Variable for which all the database points will be derived The user then selects the point variables to be placed in the remaining columns In runtime the points and corresponding database are listed in the first column The remaining columns contain variables such as level and temperature Administrator Manual Report Refer to the Summary Report Summary dialog box displayed from the Report Menu to review the defined specifications if necessary Refer to the Values section for an elaborate description Step by Step Select Edit click Add and click Value Click on the first column cell in the second row The Database Value Attributes dialog box appears The Database Value Attributes dialog box allows the user to set the appearance field width and positioning of the Independent Variable The Independent Variable or tag cannot be changed from this dialog box The databases were selected earlier in the Summary Report Setup dialog box In runtime the database points assume the Independent Variable s appearance attributes Click OK when complete Example Database Point Tag appears in the selected cell This step only occurs once per report Click on the next column cell in the second row The Select Point Variable dialog box appears Choose the desired point variable and then click Select The Select Engineering Units dialog box app
125. Window option enables you to select and edit multiple objects This option creates an edit window by drawing a square marquee around a group of objects This window allows the user to edit move copy or delete all the objects in the window as a single unit Selecting the Move and Copy Window options can perform two of these actions Step by Step Select Window from the Edit menu item or press Ctrl W A check mark appears beside the option Selectthe first corner of the window and drag the cursor around the group of objects you want to edit To change the size of the window move the cursor to the border of the window Note that the cursor becomes a two headed arrow Drag the arrow to make the window the desired size Release the mouse button To move the window without moving its contents click anywhere on the window The cursor will become a four headed arrow and you can drag the window to any desired location on the display Select the Edit menu and click Move Window Alt M Copy Window Alt C or Delete Shift Del If the Move Window option was chosen move the window to a new location f the Copy Window option was chosen move the duplicated window to a new location Select Window from the Edit menu item to disable the Multiple Select option Undo last If you want to undo the last action performed click Undo Last from the Edit menu item Redrawing the screen During the editing process extraneous pixels may
126. ables i tuts te RERO ER RR RUE RO ede 278 Liquid Hydrocarbon Gas Table pesiin iieri eene 279 Asphalt Lablessz iust cocto t dete tere isa 279 Polynomial rt serine letra tes dad op v trt nd ed 280 Traditional tank calculations ssssssss e 281 Strap Table Volume TOV cu atia iet ftbi s 281 COylindricaltariKS ecc ors ot eder erra ee Er er de ONERE 281 Horizontal tanks irte dere E Lett hr piscina 281 Spherical tanks duse te ee e tfe av au eec te dade edt 282 Polynomial spherical tank s ne annen ra 283 Product and Water Strapping Tables eneeier 284 Integrated Product and Water Tables Combined ssssss 284 Separate Product and Water Tables Separated sssssss 287 A RM e s stupet tette 288 bruja ETE 288 Japanese correction methods cecce ee 288 Bottom Sediment Water BS amp W ssssssssssssseee 289 Volume of Sediment and Water VSW sssssssssssss 289 Ii m ii o 289 Correction VOlUIme ss nih bet red d OG P eti meet get Fa es 290 Volume Correction Factor VCF ssssssssssssseeeee eene 290 TFank Shell Correction ETS 4e cr ket i ree che eis 290 Gross Observed Volume GOV sssssssssssss eee 291 Default 3 5 aote Ta ret rare eee rct He Ros 291 Pre I9gO et UD MP eS ADU A A HA dn S AE 291 Japanese correction methods sssssssss eem 291 Net Standard Volume NSV sssssssssssssseeeeeeeeeeen nens 292 DG all sic
127. above sea level at the tanks specific location used in Hydrostatic Hybrid calculations LEVEL OFFSET Defines the offset value to be applied to the Level calculation as part of the Hydrostatic calculations Administrator Manual Creating and editing tank points Entering Vessel 2 information Edit Tank Data gt WSIZEMORE 41 2 Tank 4 Edit Tank Data dialog General Volume Process Data Alarms Vessel Vessel 2 W8M Strap Water Table Leak Detection box Vessel 1 tab Transfer Limits High High Maximum Fill ras 00 ftin Bth High C User Defined C LowLow Minimum Empty E0000 rinda Low C User Defined Gauge Gauge Type Undefined y Modifier Undefined LPG Float Characteristics Float Mass 000 g Float Density 000 API Float Diameter 10000 ft in 1 6th ADMOOSGVAE 1005 123 FuelsManager Defense 124 Edit Tank Data dialog box Vessel 2 tab MAXIMUM FILL MINIMUM EMPTY GAUGE TYPE MODIFIER FLOAT MASS FLOAT DENSITY FLOAT DIAMETER This field allows the user to configure the maximum safe level to which the tank can be filled FuelsManager uses this value in the calculation of remaining and available volume s The maximum fill level can be User Defined user can enter any value High Maximum fill level is the same as the high level alarm limit High High Maximum fill level is the same as the high high
128. accomplished by issuing Operator Commands in the Operate program where the operator can type in new data or select a command When this data source is selected a SET button appears next to the database point variable for example level in the Tank Detail In the Point Monitor display a modify button appears Entering an Operator Command sends the command directly to the FMDataManager FMDataManager immediately processes an Operator command and issues the command to the appropriate destination based on point configuration Operator Command requests are checked against the permissions assigned to the User Group If the command cannot be completed due to security or other reasons the system displays an operator message window describing why the command is disallowed CommManager The Comm option enables the user to connect to an external field device Depending on the point data format and variable type only some points can be assigned to the l O connections After selecting the Comm option the Communications Interface Configuration dialog box appears This dialog box lists all the interfaces available on the selected system Once an interface is selected the user clicks I O Point to view the I O connections Only I O connections compatible with the point data format and engineering units configuration are displayed For more details on Comm connections see the Communications section of this manual Calculated value This option def
129. ace is locked during configuration the run time operation of that interface is not interrupted and continues until the user configuring the interface clicks Done At that time the run time operation of the interface is interrupted just long enough Note The time period should be to modify its configuration and then normal operations resume This time period insignificant enough that the user will not notice any interruption of varies from one device to the next data to or from the interface Device configuration Device configuration varies widely between different types of devices The user needs to consult the device user s documentation for further instruction If an interface has a valid port configuration as well as a valid device configuration the interface can be placed in an active mode so that communication with the field device can occur If the device was not configured when the interface was created the device can be subsequently configured through the Communications Configuration dialog box Step by Step Select Devices in the Communications Interface Configuration dialog box The device specific configuration dialog appears Enter configuration parameters for the particular device There may be multiple dialog boxes that need to be completed for the configuration Click OK in the Device Configuration dialog box after all configurations have been made for the device Click OK in the interface type configuratio
130. ag Category which works with the Security module to determine the level of access for the viewing and changing of database point values Configure the data format for the input output point for a list of possible data formats refer to the Glossary If the data Storage format is a Coded Variable the Modifier button becomes available within the Edit Point dialog box For all other options except for Time and Date combinations the Units button becomes available Enable or disable FuelsManager processing of individual bits with this point Configure the engineering units for the input output point for a list of possible engineering units refer to the Glossary Configure the command modifier to be assigned to the input output point for a list of standard modifiers refer to the Glossary The Modifier button on only available for the Coded data type Configure the minimum and maximum scaling limits for the input output point Enable or disable the display of FuelsManager quality information text superscripts displayed in graphic and reports that define from where the data was derived The default setting is unchecked i e quality data is not displayed Alarm Defined Open the Alarm Assignments dialog box allowing you to define and assign alarm processes to the input output point see Administering Alarms Edit Alarm re open the Alarm Assignments dialog box allowing you to edit previously defined alarm processes for
131. ager then the data must also be sealed by the driver FMArchiveManager will mark data in the archive as sealed if the FMSystem dll library the DCSComm dll library and FMArchiveManager exe modules are sealed and the data is sealed by FMDataManager FMOperate will display data as sealed on graphics tank details and real time trends if the FMSystem dll library the DCSComm dll library and OperNT exe modules are sealed and the data is sealed by FMDataManager FMOperate will display data as sealed on historical trends if the FMSystem dll library and OperNT exe modules are sealed and the data is sealed in the archive FMOperate will display data as sealed in historical reports and historical trends if the FMSystem dll library and OperNT exe modules are sealed the data is sealed in the archive and the Archive mdb file is still owned by the SYSTEM In addition for the historical reports the Crystal report must have been designed to display W amp M seals using custom functions supplied in the U2FM dll which must also be sealed 336 Administrator Manual Sealing FuelsManager Modules RMClient will display data as sealed on reports if the FMSystem dll library the DCSComm dll library and the RMClient dll modules are sealed and the data is sealed by FMDataManager FMReportManager will print data as sealed on real time reports if the FMSystem dll library the DCSComm dll library and FMReportManager exe modules are sealed and the data
132. ained by the OPC Foundation an industry group with over 300 members from around the world including nearly all of the world s major providers of control systems instrumentation and process control systems The open OPC standard and the participation of the majority of the world s key automation and control providers makes OPC a powerful option in the inter operability field devices automation systems and business office applications OPC Data Access FuelsManager implements the OPC Data Access specification used to move real time data from PLC s DCS s and other control devices to HMI s and other display clients FuelsManager currently support the following OPC specifications OPC Data Access v1 0 OPC DA 1 0 OPC Data Access v2 05a OPC DA 2 05a The OPC DA specification defines interfaces for both OPC clients and OPC servers Typically clients are HMI or other data gathering display programs client applications can browse OPC servers and allow the user to select which OPC tags the client will read OPC servers typically provide communications to from devices further down the system hierarchy OPC servers encapsulate the specific details of talking to the device s and provide a well defined set of OPC tags that the client can connect to FuelsManager can operate simultaneously as both an OPC client and OPC server FuelsManager can be an OPC client and communicate with OPC server for Tank Gauges PLC s and other remote l O to g
133. ak Detection 241 Mass Flow 318 Master System Files 25 Measured Data Tank Calculation 315 Merging Files 192 Message Window 170 Meter Node Adding 233 Movement 225 Microsoft Software Development Kit 65 Mode Auto Start 52 Current 52 Modifier Assignment 88 Modifiers 63 387 Module Seal Weights and Measures 322 Modules Weights 8 Measures Seals 335 Movements 225 Editing 236 Movement Groups 235 Movement Types 221 Multiple Objects Moving Deleting and Copying 191 N Nederlands Meetinsituut Weights and Measures 322 Net Flow 319 Networking 13 New Product definitions Creating a 56 Next 190 Node Meter 233 Tank 231 Nodes Defining 231 Deleting 236 Exporting 238 Importing 238 Modifying 236 Unit 232 Numeric to Numeric Lookup Table 137 0 Object Deleting 190 Displaying object coordinates 173 Resizing Objects 192 Offset 172 On Line Configuration 21 Help 22 OPC 87 90 Matrikon OPC Tag Studio 91 Administrator Manual Selecting an OPC data source 135 Server Source 88 server support 90 Open 12 Open Graphic File 12 OPERATE 28 Operating Tank 198 Operator group rights 40 Optional Drivers 3 Output Destinations Triggered point 103 Output File HTML File 265 Periodic File 265 Snapshot CSV 271 Test HTML 271 Testxml xml 271 XML File 265 Output Point 85 Process Data 372 373 P Pages 211 Deleting 211 Parall
134. al data source Without the archival data source the system will not have a destination to store the data ADMOOSGVAE 1005 159 FuelsManager Defense 160 Select Data Source dialog box ArchiveManager Configuration dialog box The default FuelsManager installation creates a machine Data Source called FMSystem Access This is Preconfigured to point to the ODBC data source selected during installation a Microsoft SQL or Access database Select Data Source File Data Source Machine Data Source Data Source Name Diamond Oracle Database System ECDCMusic Excel Files FM Movement Log FM System Access FosPro Files Word Historical Reports iTanks Archive lt A Machine Data Source is specific to this machine and cannot be shared User data sources are specific to a user on this machine System data sources can be used by all users on this machine or by a system wide service Type Description System User System System User System System OK Cancel Help LK Select a Data Source from the list of existing options or click New to add a new data source to the list Enter the login information The information entered depends on the ODBC data source selected There may be additional configuration dialog boxes to be completed For further information refer to Windows ODBC Help Click OK The system returns you to the Archive Manager Configuration dialog box showing the Data Source yo
135. all the To tanks Totals is only available for Shipment and Receipt movements and is the sum of amount transferred ADMO0O0SGVAE 1005 227 FuelsManager Defense Movement history The movement history allows the operator to view all product movements totals and discrepancies on a daily basis Operators can open multiple movement history windows and visually compare movement data from different days The movement history is a Microsoft Access MS SQL database and may be accessed offline in order to create custom reports using 3rd party reporting tools The movement system writes records to the movement history at the following times f a movement is stopped either manually by the operator or automatically on non zero flow if the Stop on Non Zero Flow option is selected If a movement is active at the system close out time The default close out time is midnight but can be configured to be any single time during the day 228 Administrator Manual Defining Movement Paths Defining Movement Paths In FuelsManager setting up movement paths involves the following procedures 1 Defining Nodes 2 Defining Sources and Destinations 3 Defining Groups Optional Each procedure is described in order in this section Before you start Before you start configuring Movements make sure that the database is not in SHUTDOWN mode Otherwise the user is not able to access the configuration dialogs The database mode can be al
136. allons per Second Kiloliters per Day Kiloliters per Hour Kiloliters per Minute Kiloliters per Second Liters per Hour Liters per Minute Liters per Second Million Liters per Day Million Gallons per Day US Million Gallons per day UK Millions of Barrels per Day Liquid Millions of Barrels per Day Cil ABREV ft3 hr ft3 min ft3 sec in3 hr in3 min m3 day m3 hr m3 min m3 sec yd3 hr yd3 min gph US gpm US gps US gph UK gpm UK gps UK L hr L min L sec MBPD Liq MBPD Oil INDEX 104 103 102 101 100 094 093 092 107 106 110 109 108 114 113 112 098 097 096 123 119 Metric English Administrator Manual Point format Point format The storage formats available only to Input and Output points are listed below All Tank points are of a fixed data o 3 w Dt Character 8 Bit Signed 128 to 127 Short 6 Bit Signed 32768 to 32767 Coded 16 Bit Index to Coded Variable 0 to 65535 Dword 32 Bit Unsigned 0 to 4 294 967 295 Double 8 Byte Double Precision Floating Point 1 7 E 308 15 digits Time 8 Byte Time Only NA User Defined String 16 Bit Index to User String 0 to 65535 ADMO03GVAE1005 38 Coded Variables Coded Variables This list contains all the standard coded variables that came with your FuelsManager system The standard FuelsManager variables and their corresponding codes are listed below 1 Januar
137. ame dialog box appears Node Name Type in the Unit Node name and click OK Click Save The system saves the unit node to the Movement system Click Close The system returns you to the Movements dialog box Administrator Manual Defining Movement Paths Adding a Meter Node Step by Step From the Movements dialog box click Nodes The Nodes dialog box appears This dialog box lists all the nodes available for selection The defined nodes are listed by name and type From this dialog box you can add delete or modify nodes in the movement system Click Add The Node Type dialog box appears Select Meter and click OK The Meter Node dialog box appears Meter Node Name IV Resetable Volume Rollover Mass Rollover Data Sources Vere vopom Seiec Gor Gross Volume 1 Net Volume Mass Cancel Type the Name of the meter node Make the necessary settings for the meter node Clear the Resetable checkbox if you do not want the meter to be resetable Define what the maximum volume and mass the meter is capable of counting to before rolling over to zero Type these amounts in the Volume Rollover and Mass Rollover fields These parameters are only available if the meter node is not resetable Inthe Data Sources grid assign the meter node to its FuelsManager database points by clicking the corresponding button in the Select column To clear meter node database point assignments click the but
138. an Input point OUTPUT Files contain all the attributes associated with an Output POINTS point TRIGGER Files contain all the attributes associated with a Triggered POINTS point TANK POINTS Files contain all the attributes associated with a Tank point STRAP TABLES Files contain tank and strap table file names SOURCE Files contain the Database tag variable data source type ASSIGNMENTS database system interfaces device and connected O communication point entries For example Tank 1 Low Stop VALUE NONE Tank 1 Gauge _LEVEL COMM GRAY1 TSU 1 Tank 1 Level Tank 1 Gauge TEMP COMM GRAY1 TSU 1 Tank 1 Temperature Tank 1 Gauge DENSITY CALC Tank 1 Gauge LVL_H20 MANUAL MANUAL Files contain the Database tag variable and value entries VALUES The value is an assigned command for example STOP Tankfarm Tank A301 BSW 0 Tankfarm Tank A301 STD_DENS 67 10898 FORCED Files contain Database tag variable and value entries The VALUES value is a forced value For example Area42 Tank37 LEVEL 220 CALC VALUES Files contain Database tag variable and value entries The value is the calculated value Uncalculated points contain the Uninitialized parameter for Example Tank 2 Gauge FLOW Uninitialized Tank 3 Gauge DENSITY 75 87801 Administrator Manual Importing and exporting points The Input Output Triggered and Tank point data types add points to the database The other data types are reference values assigned to th
139. arameters refer to the Glossary Administrator Manual Report Column row totals and averages The user is able to display column row totals or averages in a report Values in a column can be totaled all together or individually for each product or database system Summary reports A Summary report acts like a spreadsheet The first column lists all the Tank points active inactive or both and corresponding databases These points can be grouped by tank product or by database system The remaining columns list point variables such as level and density You can select what variables the report displays Object Functions in summary reports TABLE Exactly one table is required OF ROWS IN The FuelsManager database sets the number of rows TABLE User cannot enter a number LABELS Can only be inserted in the first row as report column headers VALUE The first value entered in the table establishes or tags the databases to which the Tank points will be derived Each subsequent value created represents the selected variables of one or more Tank points such as temperature and density COLUMN ROW Only column totals and column averages can be TOTALS AND displayed AVERAGES ADMOOSGVAE 1005 201 FuelsManager Defense Creating a new summary report Step by Step Within the Report Editor dialog box from the file menu select New and then select the Summary Report command from the sub menu The Summary Report
140. arm Name Description Data Format Used Analog Alarm Template for Standard Analog Float template Leak Alarm Standard Leak Detection Alarms Float template RTU Comm RTU Communication Coded 0 RTU Status RTU Status Word 0 Tank Digital Standard Tank Digital Alarms Word 27 Tank Gauge Default Tank Gauge Alarms Word 27 Tank Mode Alarm Standard Tank Movement Alarms Word 27 The Global Alarms Definitions dialog box lists all the Global Alarms and Alarm Templates found in the system The user can create delete or edit a selected Alarm Template or Global Alarm When assigning alarms to a Global Alarm or Alarm Template the Alarm Name is used A Data Format is assigned to each Global Alarm or Alarm Template Only database points of the selected format can use the selected Global Alarm or Alarm Template Administrator Manual Alarms Creating global local alarms and templates From the Define Global Alarm dialog box the user can create a Global Alarm or Alarm Template by entering a name and description selecting its attributes and entering alarm limits Step by Step From the FuelsManager Configuration application Database menu select the Alarms command the Global Alarm Definitions dialog box appears Click New the Define Global Alarm dialog box appears Type the alarm name and description The name and description appear in the Global Alarm Definitions dialog box Select either the Global Definition option to create a Glo
141. ars Select the Details tab in the Edit Point dialog box Click Alarm Defined option button in the Edit Point dialog box Click the Edit Alarm button The Alarm Assignments dialog box will appear ADMO0O0SGVAE 1005 Note If the Global Alarms dialog box is opened during database edit only the Global Alarms or templates matching the selected point s data format are displayed Note When building an alarm limit for an Alarm Template the Test Value must be entered as a percentage from 0 00 to 1 00 Note Tank points have predefined alarms so this procedure does not apply 75 FuelsManager Defense 76 Alarms Assignments dialog box Alarm Assignments dialog box In the Alarm Assignments dialog box the user can select the alarm type select a graphic file and select a help file to accompany the alarm select an alarm event category or select an event definition The user can edit existing alarms and control the status of each alarm limit The user can also configure the point for Event Processing at the bottom of the dialog box Alarm Assignments Alarm Limits Alarm Limit Enable Local Alarm Edit Template Limit Global Alarm Alarm Name Alarm Graphic Select Alarm Help Select Alarm Event Category Default Event Definition Event Enabled Cancel Help r Local Alarm limits Local alarms are unique to the point to which they are assigned The creation process invo
142. ased on the current level and the alarms limits configured for the tank LEVEL HIHI LIMIT CURRENT HI HI LEVEL LIMIT This variable is the limit for a High High level alarm If the tank level exceeds the HiHi Alarm value then a High High alarm is activated This variable is entered when configuring the tank point but can be modified from Operate by a user with sufficient privileges LEVEL HIGH LIMIT CURRENT HIGH LEVEL LIMIT This variable is the limit for a High level alarm If the tank level exceeds the High Alarm value then a High alarm is activated This variable is entered when configuring the tank point but can be modified from Operate by a user with sufficient privileges LEVEL LOW LIMIT CURRENT LOW LEVEL LIMIT This variable is the limit for a Low level alarm If the tank level falls below the Low Alarm value then a Low alarm is activated This variable is entered when configuring the tank point but can be modified from Operate by a user with sufficient privileges LEVEL LOLO LIMIT CURRENT LO LO LEVEL LIMIT This variable is the limit for a Low Low level alarm If the tank level falls below the LoLo Alarm value then a Low Low alarm is activated This variable is entered when configuring the tank point but can be modified from Operate by a user with sufficient privileges LEVEL LOLO LIMIT CURRENT LO LO LEVEL LIMIT This variable is the limit for a Low Low level alarm If the tank level falls below the LoLo Alarm value then
143. at this tank is fitted with Cathodic protection used for reporting and information only TANK SHELL CORRECTION ENABLE CORRECTION If this option is selected FuelsManager compensates the Net Std volume for the thermal expansion effects of the tank shell If the option is not selected the Tank Shell Correction factor equals 1 hence no correction TANK SHELL CORRECTION SHELL INSULATION If this option is selected FuelsManager uses the insulated tank correction equation when compensating the Net Std volume for the thermal expansion effects of the tank shell If the option is not selected the non insulated tank correction equation is used TANK SHELL CORRECTION AREACOEF This parameter defines the shell area expansion coefficient used in the tank shell correction calculations Manual entry of this value is not allowed except when the Tank Material is set to Other PRESSURE TRANSMITTER SETUP 368 Administrator Manual Tank configuration data Tank Configuration Data These parameters define the position of the top middle and bottom offsets for the respective pressure transmitters in Hydrostatic Hybrid calculations MINIMUM LEVEL This parameter defines the lowest level of which Hydrostatic Hybrid tank calculations can be performed DENSITY DEADBAND This parameter defines the minimum change in density that will cause the Hydrostatic Hybrid tank calculation to be executed LOCAL GRAVITY Enables the entry of the earth s gravity i
144. ate COS Level Deadband Change of State COS Temp Deadband External Module Address Channel for Communications CIU Address Tank Gauge ID Type of Instrument Scan Commands for Instrument F ft M Meters m millimeters F Fahrenheit C CelsiusK kg m A API L Ibs ft Change of State COS Level Deadband Change of State COS Temp Deadband Administrator Manual Sealing the Point in 8130 RTU Point Type Enraf 873 GSI Model 2000 ITT Barton 3500 L amp J MCG1000 L amp J MCG1500 L amp J MCG2000 NMS53 SAAB L 2 Radar Tank Side Monitor ADMO03GVAE1005 WMSeal Yes No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Parameters Sealed Module Chan CIU Addr ID TOI ScanCmd LevelUnits TempUnits LevelDeadband TempDeadband Module Chan CIU Addr ID TOI ScanCmd LevelUnits TempUnits LevelDeadband TempDeadband Module Chan ID LevelUnits LevelConvert LevelDeadband Module Chan ID BaudRate ComParams ModeLevel Deadband Temp Deadband Parameter Description External Module Address Channel for Communications CIU Address Tank Gauge ID Type of Instrument Scan Commands for Instrument Faft M Meters m millimeters F Fahrenheit C Celsius Change of State COS Level Deadband Change of State COS Temp Deadband External Module Address Channel for Communications Tank Gauge ID Gauge Scanning Mode Faft M Meters m millimeters F Fahrenheit C Celsius G 9 ml A AP
145. ather data from the field At the same time FuelsManager can be providing data to DCS s and other business systems via its OPC server interface Administrator Manual OPC server support Office Systems ERP Systems DCSs SCADA Systems FuelsManager OPC Server Tags FuelsManager s OPC server exposes all database points created in the FuelsManager real time database to OPC clients The exact structure of the OPC tags will depend on the database structure defined for your project Also the method for browsing and selecting the tags will depend on the OPC client software being used The dialog below shows the OPC tag structure as seen via the industry standard Matrikon OPC explorer client PLCs q Tank gauges Remote I O Matrikon OPC Tag Studio dialog ie Matrikon OPC Tag Studio Matrikon OPC Explorer FuelsManager Group File Edit View Help e x xet B s Tag Entry Tags To Be Added TankFarm Tank 1 Tank Level Tas Item ID rankFarm Tank 1 Tank Volume al Data Type Empty Default E IV Create Active Access Path BIN S Eiter Level Data Type Filter Empty Defaut v v Write Access Y ReadAccess Branches Items Available Items in Server Endress Hauser DataManager 1 E TankFarm E Tank 1 i A Tank Tank 2 x Tag TankFarm Tank 1 Tank Level Path Validated No Data Type Empty Default Create Active Yes Readable Volume Available Net eae m
146. auge STRAPPING TEMPERATURE This parameter defines the temperature at which the tank strapping table was made FuelsManager uses this parameter to correct for roof volume in tanks where the mass of the floating roof has been accounted for in the strapping table but the current temperature differs from that at which the tank was strapped STRAPPING DENSITY This parameter defines the density at which the tank strapping table was made FuelsManager uses this parameter to correct for roof volume in tanks where the mass of the floating roof has been accounted for in the strapping table but the current density differs from that at which the tank was strapped STRAP TABLE TYPE This parameter defines whether the strapping table starts at the minimum and increments to the maximum level volume pair innage or starts at the maximum level volume pair and decrements to the minimum outage STRAP WATER TABLE MODE This parameter defines the mode of Strap and Water tables used Combined or Separated Combined uses a single table for both water and strap calculations Separated uses individual tables for strap and water calculations POLYNOMIAL SPHERE This parameter enables the special Polynomial Sphere strapping table when selected in Tank Geometry The Polynomial Sphere strapping table uses a polynomial equation to calculate volume based on level 370 Administrator Manual Input points process data Input points process data Input Po
147. bal Alarm or the Template option to create and Alarm Template Select the point data format Type in a test condition by entering the Test Type the Test Value and the Result or use the Build feature In the Print edit box type in a priority 0 Lowest through 3 Highest Enter the attributes such as Use Hysteresis and Reset Holdoff value and a Display Style selection The Display Style section applies to the Define Global Alarm dialog and controls how the test values are displayed Click Add to enter the test condition into the condition list Click OK when all test conditions are entered Global alarm definition The new Global Alarm or Alarm Template is ready for alarm assignment The user can assign these alarms during database configuration Creating and modifying global alarms from the Points menu Global Alarms can also be created and modified using the Points menu The disadvantage of using this menu option is that the user cannot view all the system s Global Alarms Only the Global Alarms related to the selected data format appears The advantage is that the user can edit or create a Global Alarm on the fly Local Alarms are unique to the point to which it is assigned Step by Step From the FuelsManager Configuration application Database menu select the Points command the Database Edit dialog box appears Select the input or output point that the alarm is to be defined Select Edit The Edit Point dialog box appe
148. base Templates Contains template files for Bitmaps Databases example projects Graphics Reports and Symbols FMTools The FMTools subdirectory contains FuelsManager applications used to assist in the configuration of your database Dmp exe Application used to create a diagnostic file detailing the FuelsManager application files and the installation environment Administrator Manual Setting subsystem run modes FMSim exe An OPC client application that can be used to simulate changing tank values useful for testing and demonstrating purposes FMSysUpdate An offline utility used to upgrade FuelsManager database from previous versions to the current version ViewRTU The ViewRTU directory in FuelsManager serves as the installation directory of the ViewRTU software It includes all ViewRTU system files drivers and bitmaps Setting up file directories Note Unless absolutely s necessary it is recommended that you keep the default file directories This will assist Varec support staff in diagnosing any problems ADMO003GVAE1005 55 FuelsManager Defense Product Configuration dialog box 56 Defining system resources Resources utilized by FuelsManager are defined in the system resources within the FuelsManager Configuration application Resources that can be defined are Products Strings Coded Variables Modifiers Graphic File Names Help File Names Start Definitions Products Product specif
149. before end of month 0 Tank Analysis Drop list of leak analysis methods that are valid for the tank Method gauge selected from the Vessel 2 page The methods include Net Volume Unrounded Net Volume and Barton Series Tank Analysis This field is typically for real time tank analysis The types Type supported include Static Continuous and Real Time Use Automatic Allows the user to enable and disable automatic printing This Printing field is only functional if Real Time is the current selection in the Tank Analysis Type drop list Print Time Allows the selection for the time of day the Real Time Leak Test Report will be printed This field is only functional if Use Automatic Printing is selected Number of days Allows the setting of the printing interval for the Real Time before end of Leak Test Report in relation to the last day of the month This month field is only functional if Use Automatic Printing is selected Administrator Manual Leak Detection Tank Analysis Methods There are three possible tank analysis methods that can be used in FuelsManager All three methods compare test readings at different times to calculate leak analyses Net Volume The Net Volume method collects net volume readings from the tank when performing tests This method uses up to four decimal places in its VCF calculations which is an API standard Barton Series The Barton Series method collects pressure readings from the tan
150. bel Attributes dialog box appears In the Label Attributes dialog box the user enters the label name An Edit button is available to format the appearance of the label The table Snap option buttons aligns the label within a cell Enter the text in the Label Text edit box Click Edit to format the font appearance of the label These changes can be made before or after the text has been entered into the label text edit box Align the label by selecting the appropriate option button This option only applies to labels placed in the table with the Snap to table option selected in the table pull down menu Click OK A label appears in selected area ADMO0O0SGVAE 1005 209 FuelsManager Defense Creating values in a dynamic report When creating a value for a Dynamic report only individual points are used The process involves selecting a default database selecting the point and then selecting the corresponding point variable All types of points can be used in a Dynamic Report Input Output Triggered and Tank points Step by Step Select Edit click Add and click Value Click where you want the value to be displayed This can be within a table or not Select a point from the Database Edit dialog box to be represented by the value Click Select The Select Database Point dialog box appears Make appropriate selections and click OK The Select Engineering Units dialog box appears if the point variable is numerical For a complete list
151. below these defined alarm limits an alarm occurs in the database The alarm is then displayed in the Operate program Administrator Manual Point attributes Event Processes occur if the point s numeric value changes by a specified amount or if a command is issued Refer to the Administering Alarms section Tag category Each database point can be assigned Tag Category which works with the Security module to determine the level of access for the viewing and changing of database point values The Tag Category can be set to determine which database points may be viewed or modified by a user or operator When setting up the Security module all FuelsManager users are placed into an appropriate User Group operators administrator etc and each User Group is assigned a Tag Category Refer to the Security documentation for further information ADMO003GVAE1005 89 FuelsManager Defense 90 OPC server support OPC server support in FuelsManager provides Collection of field data from remote I O PLC and other devices via Varec or 3rd party OPC servers Access to measured and calculated tank data via LAN An interface to host systems DCS which provide an OPC client Easy configuration of interchanged data using one dialog box What is OPC OPC OLE for Process Control is an open technical specification that defines a set of standard interfaces based on Microsoft s OLE COM technology The standards are defined and maint
152. ber of pages in a Summary report is undefined Once a page has been added more tables values and summaries can be placed onto the page just created Deleting pages The user can delete a page in Dynamic reports All data that is on the page will be removed completely Maneuvering through pages The Page menu applies only to Dynamic reports This option allows the user to add pages to the report and to maneuver through the report pages Formatting reports Summary and Dynamic reports can have the default font report layout headers and footers defined ADMOOSGVAE 1005 211 FuelsManager Defense Select Text Font dialog box Report Layout dialog box 212 Setting the default font Step by Step Select Format and click Font The Select Text Font dialog box appears Select the type of font size and attributes for the default font setting Click OK when completed Select Text Font Font Font Size C Arial i Standard C Times New Roman Size0 8 iv Courier New Attributes Bold ttalic Setting the report layout Step by Step Select Format and click Report Layout to display the Report Layout dialog box Set the margins in inches The report header and footer will adhere to the top and bottom margins if they are defined The Paper Type option allows the user to select either a legal 81 2 x 14 inches or letter 81 2 x 11 inches setting Report Layout Margins in inches
153. box Alarm definition includes enabling the alarm and entering a value Pre configured alarms are available for certain parameters Tank Level ETA Temperature Leak Rate Density Leak Data Tank Flow Vapor Pressure Level Rate Unauthorized Movement Tank Mode Reverse Flow No Flow Applicable to systems using the optional Leak Detection feature Operate application provides graphical representation to the user for alarms the example shows level alarms User Defined alarms If your system requires alarms for additional tank parameters that do not have pre configured alarms the user has the option of creating them For example the water level parameter does not contain an alarm To compensate the user first defines an Input point for water level and then defines the alarm ADMO003GVAE1005 7i FuelsManager Defense 72 Alarms for Input and Output points are not pre configured The user must create and define these alarms User defined alarms can be one of three forms Alarm Templates Global Alarms or Local Alarms Form ALARM TEMPLATES GLOBAL ALARMS LOCAL ALARMS Description Multiple database points requiring alarm limits of the percentage value regardless of the minimum and maximum i e High 95 Low 5 When applied to a particular database point the percentage limits are translated into actual Alarm setpoints Multiple database points requiring alarms based o
154. button removes the currently selected variable from the Tank Variables to be logged list box on the right That variable will then reappear in the Available Tank Variables list box on the left Administrator Manual Automated Data Output Configuration Dialog Default Precision Trigger Point Trigger Value Reset Value Trigger Time 1 Trigger Time 2 ADMO03GVAE1005 This button deletes all variables from the Tank Variables to be logged list box and then adds the Automated Data Output default set of variables to that list box This default list is generally accepted as the most commonly used set of variables and includes the following System Name Point Tag System Date and Time Product Code Level Temperature Standard Density Gross Volume Net Standard Volume Available Volume Net Remaining Volume Net Flow Rate The precision of the data in the output files can be entered here The Precision field defines the number of decimal places you want in the values logged If you enter 0 no decimal places will be logged A FuelsManager point can be entered and you can set the trigger value The Trigger Point that you use must be an Input point and must be set to a Manual Data Source When the trigger point equals the trigger value Automated Data Output will write the snapshot file This method can be used to manually initiate the log process when needed or to cause the log
155. by a variable index number as indicated in the Coded Variables Configuration dialog box Deleting a coded variable Step by Step In the Coded Variables Configuration dialog box select the variable to be deleted from the scroll box so that it appears in the edit box Click Delete The coded variable is no longer a part of the list Importing coded variables Custom coded variables are the only variables that can be imported or exported Step by Step From the Configuration dialog box select Resources and click Coded Variables The Coded Variables Configuration dialog box appears Click Import The Import Coded Variables dialog box appears Select the import file and click Open The system imports the file and returns to the Coded Variable Configuration dialog box Administrator Manual Defining system resources Modifiers Modifiers are a collection of Coded Variables Modifiers are used to group commands issued in the Operate application For example the OPEN and CLOSE command combination is one type of modifier The FuelsManager system contains a list of predefined modifiers FuelsManager reserves the first 18 modifiers for standard use Standard modifiers cannot be edited or deleted by the user but the user can create custom modifiers The user is able to define up to eight commands for a modifier These commands appear as selections when the operator issues a command Modifiers Configuration dialog box M
156. by subtracting the volumetric effect of the tank shell correction factor from the current strapping volume However this value can be measured by automatic tank gauging systems or manually entered by the operator VOL NET C amp W NET VOLUME MINIUS C amp W CORRECTION This process variable is the Net Std volume minus the correction for sediment and water FuelsManager normally calculates this by subtracting the correction for sediment and water from the current Net Std volume However this value can be measured by automatic tank gauging systems or manually entered by the operator TANK SHELL COR FAC TANK SHELL CORRECTION FACTOR This process variable is the tank shell correction factor used to correct gross volume for the effects of tank shell thermal expansion FuelsManager normally calculates this from product temperature ambient temperature shell material and type of tank shell the variable can also be linked to automatic gauging systems or manually entered if required C amp W COR FAC C amp W CORRECTION FACTOR This process variable is the correction for sediment and water used to correct gross volume for the effects of water and sediment in the bottom of the tank FuelsManager normally calculates this from water level and solids level variables the variable can also be linked to automatic gauging systems or manually entered if required BSW VOLUME VOLUME FOR BSW This process variable is the volume base sediment and water
157. c Report Creating Labels 209 E Edit Tank Data dialog box Alarm tab 117 Alarms tab 114 General tab 108 Polynomial Sphere tab 125 Process Data tab 112 Strap Water Table tab 127 Vessel tab 119 124 Volume tab 109 Editing Techniques 190 Engineering Units Conversion 136 Data 361 Source Units 136 EOM Backup ArchiveManager 162 Error messages update utility 259 Event 70 Definition 78 Log 47 Logging 22 Excel Start Definitions 66 Exporting Movement data 238 F File directories 55 ADMOOSGVAE 1005 file directories 54 file names Help 64 Flow 318 Flow calculations Tank Calculations 318 FMDataManager 25 FMSystemManager 25 Font Default 171 Food Oil Method 297 G Generated Reports Deleting 217 Generating files 193 Generating Multiple Files 193 Global Alarm Definition 75 Export 81 Import 81 Global Alarms 73 Creating and Modifying 75 Sharing 77 Graphic Adding a File Name 64 Creating 175 creating 168 file names 63 folder 14 Graphics or symbols 174 Index 64 194 Opening 175 Operate 169 Grid 173 Display 172 Gross Observed Volume 291 Group Adding Users 41 Creating Deleting and Renaming 40 Deleting a Movement Group 235 Groups 38 Defining Movement Groups 235 H Hardware Key 2 6 Headers and Footers 212 Help Text Help 64 Windows Help 64 Help File Adding 66 Horizontal 172 Hybrid Tank Calculations 311
158. c file is an CSV file written at regular intervals as specified in the Periodic Interval field There are options to export the column headers with the data as well as an option to include a custom Version column The Periodic Interval is the amount of time in minutes between updates to the Periodic File The Periodic File is overwritten each time this period expires and the counter begins when Automated Data Output starts which corresponds with when Windows starts If a value is specified in the Version field it is included in the periodic file as an additional column of data This affects both the Snapshot File Parameters and the Periodic File Parameters If this box is checked the file will contain the current status of the selected variables overrage underrage forced manual etc This affects both the Snapshot File Parameters and the Periodic File Parameters If this box is checked then the field names are included at the top of each column of the CSV file If this file is not checked then the data is written without a header This affects both the Snapshot File Parameters and the Periodic File Parameters The HTML file is a hypertext HTML file and it is also written periodically according to the Periodic Interval field This option can be used to publish data directly to a local or web server on a periodic basis Administrator Manual Automated Data Output Configuration Dialog Clicking on this button saves
159. cal Applications VCF Range 0 9741 1 0296 0 9756 1 0266 0 9597 1 0130 0 9670 1 0297 0 9597 1 0132 0 9660 1 0306 0 9671 1 0293 0 9683 1 0288 0 9496 1 0027 0 9675 1 0242 0 9647 1 0383 0 9729 1 0278 0 9745 1 0262 0 9583 1 0123 0 9660 1 0293 0 9585 1 0126 0 9646 1 0300 0 9661 1 0289 0 9673 1 0285 0 9492 1 0025 0 9664 1 0237 0 9634 1 0376 Thermal Expansion Coefficient in Alpha x 108 Thermal Expansion Coefficient in Alpha x 108 Temp Range 5 110 F 5 110 F 40 120 F 5 120 F 40 120 F 5 120 F 5 120 F 5 120 F 55 150 F 15 120 F 5 120 F 15 44 C 15 44 C 4 5 49 5 C 15 49 5 C 4 5 49 5 C 15 49 5 C 15 49 5 C 15 49 5 C 12 65 5 C 9 5 49 5 C 20 5 49 5 C Not Specified Not Specified Administrator Manual Volume correction techniques Liquid Hydrocarbon Gas Table APIF 24E 23E Light Hydrocarbon Density 60 F in Specific Gravity 0 350 0 688 50 200 F APIF 1980 Asphalt Tables Asphalt ASTM D4311 04 C Asphalt Density 15 C in 850 Unspecified 25 275 C kg m ASTM IP Table 7 Asphalt Density 9 60 F in 0 100 0 500 F API ADMOOSGVAE 1005 279 FuelsManager Defense Polynomial This technique is used for specialized products that do not fall within one of the correction tables already identified A table of density versus temperature data can be converted to a polynomial using the least square method of curve f
160. calculates this value However the value can also be measured by automatic tank gauging systems or manually entered 350 Administrator Manual Tank Points Process Data LIQUID MASS TOTAL NET VOLUME FASTSCAN COMMAND FASTSCAN STATUS ADMOOSGVAE 1005 351 FuelsManager Defense Product Transfer Data Product Transfer Data TRANSFER MODE TANK TRANSFER MODE This process variable is the mode by which the operator wants to transfer product to from tank possible values are inactive by volume by level or by differential volume This variable is used as part of the tank transfer feature and as part of the Product Movement System option This variable is normally entered by the operator but can be linked to automatic tank gauging systems to allow remote setting of the transfer mode TANK COMMAND TANK MODE COMMAND OUTPUT This process variable is the desired mode of operation of the tank possible values are stop fill empty run test reset or out of service This variable is used by the tank point to enable tank mode alarms For example if the tank mode is Stop and the product movement alarms are enabled and the level changes then activate an illegal movement alarm This variable is normally entered by the operator but can be linked to automatic tank gauging systems to allow remote setting of the mode or can be calculated by FuelsManager based on the flow process variable TANK STATUS CURRENT TANK MODE This p
161. ce Diagnostic capabilities vary from device to device Device Maintenance 8130 RTU Device System Name M Interface Desc INTERFACE 001 Interface Status Run Mode STANDBY Port 1 Address Description Current Retry j Last Scan Time m Time Between Scans Port 2 Address 322 Description Current Retry 999 Last Scan Time 90 000 him Time Between Scans Commands 1 Displays RTU Name es Tf Communications Port Stats ADMOOSGVAE 1005 155 FuelsManager Defense 156 Administrator Manual Archiving Information FuelsManager Defense ArchiveManager ArchiveManager is a FuelsManager subsystem that extracts information from FMDataManager and stores it to an alternate data source which is usually a third party ODBC compliant relational database This section describes how to configure ArchiveManager to archive points and associated variables to a relational database management system RDMS with an ODBC interface MS SQL Access etc This chapter also explains how to start and shutdown ArchiveManager Opening ArchiveManager You can access the ArchiveManager Configuration dialog box from the Database menu in the FuelsManager Configuration application Step by Step Click Database from the Configuration dialog box menu bar Select ArchiveManager The Archive Manager Configuration dialog box appears ArchiveManager configuration Before ArchiveManager can begin transferring
162. ch FuelsManager is communicating FuelsManager provides two types of translation tables Lookup Tables a simple table defining mapping of one set of values to another set of values Scaling Functions used to apply a mathematical formula to the value in order to scale a particular range of values to a different range of values FuelsManager allows the configuration of user defined names for translation tables Once a Translation table is defined it can be used as many times as need by multiple databases points This functionality allows the engineer to define all the required translations once and then simply assign them to the points as needed Translation tables can be associated with Input Output and Triggered points In addition they can be applied to individual Tank Point process values via the Select Data Source accessed from the Process Data tab Lookup Tables A lookup table defines a one to one mapping of one set of values to an alternate set of values This mapping can be numeric to numeric or coded variable string value to numeric Numeric to Numeric 20 2 30 3 Coded Variable to Numeric Stop 100 Start 101 Pause 102 Lookup tables can be applied to data being received by FuelsManager and data being transmitted by FuelsManager For data received the From column defines the data being received and the To column defines the value that will be written in to the FuelsManager database ADMOOSGVAE 1005 1
163. clude defining start up options FuelsManager users system resources and configuring database points alarms and field device interfaces Other features include maintaining field communications and accessing the Operate Report and Draw applications Opening Configuration Step by Step From Windows click Start and select Programs Select FuelsManager folder Select Configuration The FuelsManager Configuration application window appears 5 FuelsManager Configuration DER System Resources Database Communications User Interface Movement Help Exiting Configuration Step by Step From the System menu select the Exit command The Configuration dialog box closes Administrator Manual Setting subsystem run modes Setting subsystem run modes This section lets you start and stop the different FuelsManager services It also lets you set which of these services should automatically start when FMSystemManager starts System Control Options System Name System Serial Number Muvoo1 300 058 3520 Select Subsystem Name Project Directory C Program FilesFuelsManager Fl Default Tank Detail C Program FilesiFuelsManagerFl Browse Shutdown Shutdown DataManager Active None Shutdown DataManager Graphics Directory c Program FilesFuelsManager Fl Browse Reports Directory C Program FilesiFuelsManagerFl Browse Cancel Current Mode Shutdown Standby Active Auto Start Mode
164. criptions 43 Permissions 42 Resources 25 System Name 30 System Selection 51 SystemManager 25 T Table 199 Tag Category 89 Creating Deleting or Renaming 37 Permissions 45 Tag permissions 38 Tag Seal Weights and Measures 322 Tank Alarms Data 354 Configuration Data 365 Creating Tank Details 188 Cylindrical 281 Horizontal 281 Point 85 Point Process Data 343 Point Records 165 Polynomial Spherical 283 Spherical 282 Weights and Measures 322 Tank Analysis 242 Tank Calculation typical 315 tank calculations traditional 281 Tank Data Edit Movement 247 tank detail 20 Creating 188 Customizing 187 Tank Node Adding 231 Tank Nodes Exporting 238 Tank Points Data Source 113 General information 107 Vessel Information 118 Volume 109 tank points 107 Tank Shell Correction 290 Tank Strapping Table 388 Temperature 274 Temperature Limits Assignment Options 58 Template Mode 189 Test Conditions 80 Text amp Background 170 Text Color 171 Text Help File 65 The Molar Method 297 Administrator Manual Tools Alarms toolbar 70 Visual Dynamic 184 Transfer Movement Type 223 translation tables 137 Trends 22 Trigger File 265 Trigger Point Automated Data Output 265 Triggered Point Variable Format information 102 triggered points Creating and editing 101 Troubleshooting Update Utility 260 troubleshooting Update Utility 259 U Undo
165. cted from the Net Volume see below The FRA value is zero it is applied to the Net Volume calculation see below The FRA value is zero it is applied to the Net Volume calculation see below Net Standard Volume NSV Default Net volume net standard volume is defined as Gross observed volume corrected for BS amp W and temperature The following equation is used to calculate net volume Where NSV FRA BSW NSV GOV x 1 0 BS amp W 100 0 x VCF Net Standard Volume Floating Roof Adjustment Percentage of bottoms sediment and water impurities Administrator Manual Traditional tank calculations NSV Net Standard Volume VCF Volume Correction Factor Pre 1980 If a volume correction method with the 1980 designation is selected The following formula is used to calculate Gross Volume NSV GOV FW x 1 0 BS amp W 100 0 x VCF Where NSV NetStandard Volume FW Free water Tank Bottom Solids if any FRA Floating Roof Adjustment BSW Percentage of bottoms sediment and water impurities VCF Volume Correction Factor Japanese correction methods If a volume correction method with the Japan designation is selected The following additional options are available Water not subtracted Water Subtracted from Net Volume Water Subtracted from Gross Volume VSW not subtracted ADMO003GVAE1005 NSV GOV FW x 1 0 BS amp W 100 0 x VCF Where NSV Net
166. d it is necessary to regenerate the report so the changes appear when printed or displayed in the Operate program Opening an existing report Step by Step Select File from the Report Editor menu bar and click Open Select the desired report Click OK The report is displayed in the Report window Editing FuelsManager standard reports Since all of FuelsManager s Standard reports are Summary reports the editing procedures used are the same Editing a standard or Summary report includes changing the attributes of the Independent Variable creating new point variables editing tables labels and column totals 214 Administrator Manual Managing report files Editing report objects These procedures apply to both Summary and Dynamic reports Follow the appropriate procedure Managing report files Once you save a report the next step is to generate the report so it can be available for printing and display in the Operate program Generating a report converts it into a format that can be understood by ReportManager and Operate Saving reports All report files are located in the Report subdirectory of your project directory Generated report files contain the RRT file extension and saved report files contain the RPT file extension ADMOOSGVAE 1005 Note You cannot move a table to another page or outside the margins Note A label created in a table cannot be moved outside the table in a Summary report No
167. d Temperature Correction Factors Standard Density API Assignment Options Product In addition to the Name and Description of the Product Definitions you can also set the product to use a Correction Method Standard Density and Temperature Limits You can have different options for each Product Assignment Options V Use Correction Method Use Standard Density Use Temperature Limits Selecting one or more of the options above ensures that when a Product is assigned to a tank point the corresponding parameters are automatically applied to the tank Use Correction Method Select the Correction Method checkbox when you want to use Correction Methods This enables the Type and Specific list boxes Select the Type of Correction Method you want to use then select the Specific method You may be required to enter additional data in the Correction Factors fields Use Standard Density Standard Density lets you set the specific density that will be used for the Product This enables the Standard Density field so you can enter the appropriate figure ADMOOSGVAE 1005 Edit Product Definition dialog box Product Assignment Options Edit Product Definitions dialog 57 FuelsManager Defense Edit Product Definition Standard Density options enabled Edit Product Definition Temperature Limits options enabled 58 Edit Product Definition r Product Name 20 chars CRUDE Description 30 chars
168. d click OK to return to the Edit Point dialog The user can select to use Bitfield Data for the point Orclick the Units button to display the Select Engineering Units dialog to use for the point Just select the appropriate type unit and click OK to return to the Edit Point triggered dialog f needed the user can select a modifier by clicking the Modifier button Select the appropriate Modifier and click OK to return to the Edit Point dialog If you are using a numeric format the user can set the minimum and maximum value by entering the parameters in the Min Value and Max Value fields Entering Details for a triggered point Details triggered point Variable Format Details Output Destinations Input Source Alarm Event Configuration Edit Alarm Trigger Setup D Minimum Repeat Interval Secs D Maximum Repeat Interval Secs Input Translation Table None M2 oes Output Translation Table None y From the Edit Point dialog box select the Details tab The user can make Alarm Event configurations for the input output point here by clicking Edit Alarm and setting up alarms for the point Click OK to return to the Edit Point dialog In the Trigger Setup the user can set how frequently the triggered point checks the input source The input source and the output source can be set to different translation tables Select the Input Translation Table and the Output Translation Table from t
169. d sc ae 308 Calibration 7 poirits Only T9 sudo oie rb ner eerte 308 Hydrostatic amp Hybrid Tank Calculations ssssse 311 Hybrid Calculation miocardio 313 Hydrostatic CalGulation s 4 uic ie aia Lodel re E Re eat 313 Typical Tank Calculation naeia a Hem 315 Analytical and Measured Data sss eme 315 Tank Point Configuration Parameters sss 315 Flow calculations sssssss eem 318 FOW MH E EE 318 L evelit ato edet ot teta a etate Atl 318 Mass oj EE 318 NEW re ede imm rte eee tcd er epe b PERPE ER ut 319 Administering Weights and Measures sss 321 System Overview ssssssssssssssss eene 323 Sealing the Point in 8130 RTU ssssssssHH eme 324 Applying the sSoftware Seal unto ti far bett pna 327 W amp M CHECKSUM S eere doe qnie end he Tudor etd te dero ota eus 328 W amp M Seal Communications ssssssssssemeemeenns 328 Sealing TankPoint variables in FuelsManager ssses 330 Applying the Software Seals aeu e t aret ment a rv etu da 330 ADMOOSGVAE 1005 xvii FuelsManager Defense Changing a Seal State for a Process Variable ninio 331 Display of W amp M Indicator on Graphics amp Reports 334 Sealing FuelsManager Modules sssssss He 335 Changing a Seal State for a module ssssssssssse 336 W amp M EOglG d edet rd e Ur a erdt eb tee CRT 336 Setting the W amp M Password cion Hem
170. das 109 Edit Tank Data dialog box Volume tab sss 109 Process data into MEN eiecti ieri pte peteret rete th th Erbe ctus 112 Edit Tank Data dialog box Process Data tab 112 AMINO Mato era lao od eti Ur d 114 Edit Tank Data dialog box Alarms tab sss 114 Otneralarmitypes ica dd PP caa 117 Specialized Alarms tatiana 117 Edit Tank Data dialog box Alarm tab Specialized Alarms 117 Vessel information Vessel 1 amp Vessel 2 tabs sssssssssssssee 118 Entering Vessel 1 information ssssssssss ee 119 Edit Tank Data dialog box Vessel 1 tab sssssssss 119 Entering Vessel 2Ipformatiort cote died te ed 123 Edit Tank Data dialog box Vessel 2 tab ssssssssse 124 Polynomial sphere information sssssssss memes 125 Edit Tank Data dialog box Polynomial Sphere tab 125 Weights amp measures information ssssssssssseeenes 126 Strapping water table information sss 127 Edit Tank Data dialog box Strap Water Table tab ocio 127 Strap Water and Hydro Definition Modes sssss 129 keak Detection murcia aplica ios ced b c te eee au 129 Assigning data sources eieae eene 130 Database lO Connections dialog box ssssssssee 130 Opening the Database IO Connections dialog box ninia 131 Select Data Source dialog box commands and settings 132 ADMO03GVAE1005 Fue
171. data you must first configure the System to archive the correct data in the correct format on your planned schedule This includes Selecting a real time Database s the DataManager from which ArchiveManager will extract data Connecting to a data source ODBC compliant RDBMS Entering the Start Time Interval and Historical Period Selecting FMDataManager variables to be stored When you finish configuring ArchiveManager you must click OK to enable the new settings ArchiveManager Archive Manager Configuration Configuration dialog box Real time Database ATESTWSS Select Historical Database FM System Access Microsoft SQL Server Disconnect Start Time HH MM 00 00 Archive Input and Output Points Interval in Minutes Specify Archived Points Historical Period in Days Automatic End of Month Backup Tank Point Variables Precision Bottom Pressure P1 Double 17 Cathodic Protection Byte Date Installed Date Density Maximum Double Density Minimum Double Density Units Units Double Desc Rav hla Cancel 158 Administrator Manual ArchiveManager Selecting a real time database Note You must have permission to access these database systems or the data transfer fails Select FMDataManager Subsystem dialog box NSIZEMORE Adding or connecting to an archival data source Before ArchiveManager can begin transferring data you must first connect to an archiv
172. data for the input output point Input points have only one Select button whereas Output points have two Select buttons one to define the destination for the output and one for the input source Administrator Manual Creating and editing tank points Creating and editing tank points A Tank point includes predefined variables specifically designed for tank gauging applications such as tank level flow and temperature The Edit Tank Data dialog box allows for specification of the Tank point attributes Step by Step Continued from the previous Step by Step instructions Creating Database Points To configure each parameter for a tank point work through the following sections that correspond to the tab fields within the Edit Tank Data dialog box General information Follow the steps below to fill out the General tab Step by Step Enter a description for the tank point Leave the Detail field empty if you want to use FuelsManager s default tank detail display however if you require an alternate tank detail display for this tank enter the name of the tank detail Select the required engineering units for all variable types If required enter the minimum and maximum scaling limits for all variable types Note FuelsManager will give you the option to automatically re scale Edit Tank Data gt WSIZEMORE TankFarm Tank 4 Tank the minimum maximum alarm strapping tables and all other values if you change
173. data is for display purposes only ENGINEERING To edit the units click on the cell containing the units you UNITS COLUMN want to change the drop down list presented displays only units applicable to the variable type selected Following a change in engineering units FuelsManager will ask the user if the scaling limit and alarm limits should be automatically modified to reflect the new units Administrator Manual Creating and editing tank points Volume information Step by Step To select a product Click on the Product button Highlight a product from the Select A Product dialog box and then click Select Refer to the Adding Products section for further information on creating a product list If the selected product does not define the correction method to be used select the required correction type and any optional correction techniques as required in the Special Rounding and Calculation Option sections As required enter the Samples Sample Time and Deadband for the Flow Level Rate Mass Flow and Net Flow There is no set formula to determine these values The user must consider the tank geometry pipeline sizes and other factors before entering these parameters Edit Tank Data gt WSIZEMORE TankFarm Tank 4 Tank Edit Tank Data dialog box Volume tab General Volume Process Data Alarms Vessel 1 Vessel 2 W amp M Strap Water Table Leak Detection Correction Method B Correction Ty
174. databases from other network machines On Line Configuration FuelsManager also allows users with the correct privileges to configure local or networked DataManagers The user can configure the database while FMDataManager is active and fully operational as On line Configuration does not interfere with normal real time database functions Alarms Alarms can be set in FuelsManager that essentially compare a current database value against preset conditions If an Alarm is defined for a database value the comparison will be made each time the value changes Each Alarm has an associated priority that may be indicated by a distinctive audible tone and color and user access to alarm groups may be restricted through the Security setup All alarms returns to normal and acknowledgements are automatically logged to a daily alarm and event log disk file and the system can be configured to ADMO003GVAE1005 21 FuelsManager Defense 22 automatically generate a printout Refer to chapters on FuelsManager Configuration and Reports for further Alarm and Security information Events And Event Logging Events are based on changes to a database value by a defined amount or by operator command All Events are automatically logged to a daily alarm and event log disk file and can be configured to automatically generate a printout to a specified printer Trends Trends present data in a time versus magnitude format simulating a conventional strip char
175. details of the Test Mode alarm ALARM XFR ADVISORY TRANSFER ADVISORY ALARM This variable is a coded variable value that displays a status of either Normal or Trans Adv SetPt if the current tank transfer has reached the Transfer Advisory setpoint ALARM XFR SHUTDOWN TRANSFER SHUTDOWN ALARM This variable is a coded variable value that displays a status of either Normal or Trans SD SetPt if the current tank transfer has reached the Transfer Shutdown setpoint 360 Administrator Manual Scaling and engineering units data Scaling and engineering units data VARIABLE TYPE FuelsManager variables are divided into eleven types for each type of variable the user can configure the range of the data and the engineering units The range and engineering units are configured via the General tab of the tank configuration dialog box The range information is used as the default minimum maximum values for display objects like bar graphs and trends in addition to the minimum maximum values for operator command dialog boxes LEVEL MININIUM TANK MINIMUM LEVEL SCALING This variable is the minimum range for the level water level solids level and gauge position process variables This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified LEVEL MAXIMIUM TANK MAXIMUM LEVEL SCALING This variable is the maximum range for the level water level solids level and gauge position process variables This variable can be
176. determine if the alarm should be on or off For example suppose 0 1 is entered for the Reset Holdoff If the High High alarm becomes active the alarm will not clear until the value falls by 0 1 or greater 73 FuelsManager Defense 74 Global Alarms definitions dialog box Define Global Alarm dialog box DISPLAY STYLE this option determines how values are displayed in this dialog box Available options vary with the selected data format BUILD This feature allows the user to create the actual alarm limit tests and results Refer to Build An Alarm Process for more details ADD This feature will add the test condition to the conditions list for the alarm REPLACE This feature allows test conditions to be replaced by the new test condition defined in the Edit Test Condition dialog box EDIT This feature allows an already existing test condition to be modified DELETE This feature allows the selected test condition to be deleted for the alarm In the Used column template indicates an Alarm Template A number appearing in the Used column identifies the number of database points using the Global Alarm When a user edits a Global Alarm the changes affect all assigned database points Editing involves changing the name description data format and alarm limits Editing an Alarm Template does not affect those points that have already used the template Global Alarm Definitions Database WSIZEMORE Select Al
177. ding this guide you should become familiar with the operation of Microsoft Windows This manual has been supplied for system administrators managers engineers and other top level management The operator and other personnel can use this guide but a separate guide entitled FuelsManager Defense User manual is available for operators This manual includes step by step instructions for both the Standard and Professional editions of FuelsManager It is assumed that the FuelsManager System has already been installed and commissioned If there is any doubt of the state of the system contact an Administrator or Supervisor before continuing Windows Terminology FuelsManager operator interface is based upon the Microsoft Windows Graphical User Interface GUI standard and is SAA compliant System Application Architecture standard for open systems All top level menus dialog boxes and mouse driven interfaces adhere to the published standards for Microsoft Windows This manual uses the terms described in the table below when describing operator actions and windows elements for step by step instructions Actions in Windows Point To move the mouse pointer until it rests on the item of choice Click To quickly press and release the mouse button once Double click To quickly press and release the mouse button twice in succession Drag To hold down the mouse button while moving an object across the computer screen Release To quit holding down the
178. directory and then locate the Reports directory Delete the report with the RPT and RRT file extensions ADMO0O0SGVAE 1005 217 FuelsManager Defense Note FuelsManager Historical Reports are created using Seagate s Crystal Reports software package and access data from the FuelsManager Archive Database See ArchiveManager If order to modify the existing Standard Historical Reports or to create new reports you must purchase and install Crystal Reports version 7 0 or greater Crystal Reports is not included in the FuelsManager product 218 Historical reports Historical reports are created using Seagate Crystal Reports In order to modify or create new historical reports it is necessary to purchase Seagate Crystal Reports There are nine default report types that can be utilized for the Operate program Current Tank Inventory Report Tank Inventory Repeat by Date Active Tank Report Inactive Tank Report Last Full Day Tank Change Report 7 Day Tank Change Report Last Full Week Tank Change Report Last Full Month Tank Change Report Month to Date Tank Change Report By default FuelsManager installs the Crystal Report Print Engine the files necessary to preview and print Crystal Reports This means it is not necessary to install Crystal Reports on your FuelsManager machine in order to view and print reports It is only necessary to edit existing or create new reports In order for new reports t
179. dministrator Manual OPC seitver support ipee pente he a e HE e B re ed 90 What OB e eed esc eese qu toli bed dU DRM e UR Beas 90 OPC Data Acc qii o reb ecc e ob a eL o teste A EAT 90 ORG Server Tags cce ee tede tat ede Dad 91 FuelsManager Supported client and server interface ssssssuss 92 Creating database points ooo coin nono Hem 93 Database Edit dialogiDOX ichs pre eet tnter da 95 Add Point to Database dialog box sssssssss He 96 Creating input and output points sss HR 97 Entering Variable Format information for an input or output point 98 Entering Details for an input output point ninio 99 Entering Input Sources for an input output point ee 100 Creating and editing triggered points sssssse 101 Entering Variable Format information for a triggered point 102 Entering Details for a triggered point sse 102 Entering Output Destinations for a triggered point ninia 103 Entering Input Source for a triggered point sssssssse 104 Edit Point Dialog box 00 Te ede tee reete 105 Edit Point dialog box Input Output and Triggered Point 105 Creating and editing tank points cian 107 General information tooo eer ee Per co ec neve tna eb tac fa ede bene Dat 107 Edit Tank Data dialog box General tab sss 108 VOIUMEINTOPMALON at d debe tet aM dade eta o
180. ds ADMOOSGVAE 1005 STRAP TABLE This selection allows choice of the table type and alters the Note The Product Strapping Table can be configured in the registry to include or exclude the Water Volume Note The Polynomial Sphere tab replaces the Strapping Table tab when the user selects the Tank Geometry option Polynomial Sphere Edit Tank Data dialog box Strap Water table tab 127 FuelsManager Defense 128 DENSITY This field allows the user to edit the strapping table density This value is the density at which the strapping table was created and is used in FuelsManager volume calculations TEMPERATURE This field allows the user to edit the strapping table temperature This value is the temperature at which the strapping table was created and is used in FuelsManager volume calculations ADD This button allows the user to add a new entry at the end of the strapping table DELETE This button removes the currently selected entry from the strapping table INSERT This button allows the user to add a new entry at the currently selected position in the strapping table EXPORT This button allows the user to export the tank strapping table to a proprietary formatted text file This allows the user to edit the information offline using 3rd party tools like Notepad IMPORT This button allows the user to import a previously exported tank strapping table STRAP TABLE This group allows the user to configure the typ
181. e 60 00 LEVEL amp These columns display the volumetric constants to be CONSTANT applied between the specified level ranges The level COLUMNS column reflects the current engineering units for the tank CORRECTION This field allows the user to enter the level offset to be used LEVEL to correct the level process variable for the measurement error due to the low temperatures in tanks containing liquid hydrocarbons P CONSTANT This field allows the user to enter the volumetric constant to be applied to all level gauge values for more details please refer to the Tank Calculations chapter DENSITY This field allows the user to edit the density at which polynomial sphere constants apply This value is used in FuelsManager volume calculations TEMPERATURE This field allows the user to edit the temperature at which polynomial sphere constants apply This value is used in FuelsManager volume calculations ADMOOSGVAE 1005 125 FuelsManager Defense Note Each time the weights and measures Tank Seal Data is changed the Seal ID is increased This allows the weights and measures authority to know if seals have been removed and subsequently reapplied Edit Tank Data dialog box Weights amp Measures tab Note For more information about weight and measure functions see the Weight and Measure section of this manual 126 Weights amp measures information FuelsManager allows the user to apply a software seal to a
182. e Alarm Summary Alarms The purpose of Alarms is to notify operators of a significant inventory occurrences that may require immediate attention These occurrences are recognized by datamanager monitoring points and situations that are set to be monitored for alarms Administrators can set up criteria for an alarm such as a significant temperature or level change When one of those situations occurs the operator will be notified of the alarm In the Operate program the operator is notified of an alarm by audible alarms or flashing color coded visuals at the bottom of the Operate window Alarm Priorities determine the severity of the alarm and consequently the color and sound notifications Indicator box Buttons Alarm Mode button Operator infor Tank Group name Status LX JL v E Dote 8 Time Tag Description amp Variable Stotus AN6 2004 6 16 23 AM Tanks Tankl4 Gouge Tank 14 Level 4 16 2004 6 16 23 AM Tanks Tenk 4 Gouge Tonk 14 Level 411672004 6 16 13 AM Tanks Tank3 Gauge Tank 3 Level 4 16 2004 6 16 13 AM Tanks Tonk3 Gouge Tonk 3 Level 4 16 2004 6 15 37 AM Tanks Tank9 Gauge Tank 9 Level 4 16 2004 6 15 23 AM Tanks TanklB Gsuge Tank 18 Level A 6 2004 6 15 22 AM Tanks Tank18 Gauge Tank 18 Level AI 5 2004 6 15 16 AM Tanks Tank6 Gauge Tank 6 Level 4 16 2004 6 14 17 AM Tanks Tank12 Gauge Tank 12 Level 4 16 2004 6 13 42 AM Tanks Tank4 Gauge Tank 4 Level 27267200
183. e FRA Bottom Sediment Water BS amp W Product samples are periodically taken to determine its quality and purity Analyzing these samples results in a purity measurement referred to as percentage bottom sediment and water BS amp W The operator usually manually enters this value The BS8W value differs from the Water volume and Solids volume values in that the BS amp W impurities are suspended in the product the water and solids volumes have settled and rest at the bottom of the tank Volume of Sediment and Water VSW This is the volume associated with the percentage of impurities suspended in the product BSW and is calculated as follows VSW TOV FW x BSW 100 0 Where VSW Volume of Sediment and Water TOV Total Observed Volume BSW Percentage of Bottom Sediment and Water Free water This is the amount of water in the bottom of the tank and Tank Bottom Solids if any This is calculated as follows FW H20VOL SOLVOL ADMOO03GVAE1005 289 FuelsManager Defense 290 Where FW Combined Water and Solids volume H20VOL Water Volume SOLVOL Solids Volume Correction volume This is the un measurable volume associated with line segments and manifolds connected to the tank The operator usually manually enters this value Volume Correction Factor VCF This is the correction factor calculated via one of the methods defined in the table s above The value is used to correct the gross
184. e Input and Output Points and every selected tank input point and tank Specify Archived Points are selected output point that has been selected in the Points to be Archived dialog ADMO0O0SGVAE 1005 161 FuelsManager Defense Points to be Archived dialog box Points to be Archived WSIZEMORE Meters M 300 Temp OK Cancel Delete Step by Step f the Specify Archived Points check box is not checked click on it The system activates the Points button Click Points The Points to be Archived dialog box appears Click Add to access the database and select the point to be archived Continue adding points as needed Click OK to update the Points to be Archived configuration ArchiveManager EOM Backup The EOM Backup option is only available if the selected archival data source is a Microsoft SQL Server based database If another data source is selected the option will be disabled If selected the EOM backup option backs up the entire contents of the archive description tables and the last month of data from the archive data tables The data is backed up to files located in the SQL Server backup directory typically C Program Files Microsoft SQL Server MSSQL BACKUP This option will create two files named as follows lt tablename gt lt date gt dat Point Variables ArchiveManager lists the current point variables in the Tank Point Variables list in the ArchiveManager Configuration dialog box You can
185. e Leak Detection section of this manual ADMO0O0SGVAE 1005 129 FuelsManager Defense Left Database menu select the Source Assignments command Right Database IO Connections dialog box for descriptions refer to the table opposite 130 Assigning data sources Database 10 Connections Points Current Database System Connection Types Alarms y m SIZEMORE Database v None Manual Y Calc Y Comm ArchiveManager Le Selected Point Type Iv opc Tank C Input C Output C Triggered Retresh Database Point Connection Type Selected System Server Server Tac TankFarm Tank 1 Tank Level Manual TankFarm Tank 1 Tank Temperature Manual TankFarm Tank 1 Tank Density Calc TankFarm Tank 1 Tank Water Level Manual TankFarm Tank 1 Tank 95BSW Manual TankFarm Tank 1 Tank Volume Gross Calc TankFarm Tank 1 Tank Yolume Net Calc TankFarm Tank 1 Tank Volume Remaini Calc TankFarm Tank 1 Tank Volume Availab Calc TankFarm Tank 1 Tank Standard Densi Manual TankFarm Tank 1 Tank Mass Calc TankFarm Tank 1 Tank Solids Level Manual TankFarm Tank 1 Tank Flow Calc TankFarm Tank 1 Tank Water Volume Calc TankFarm Tank 1 Tank Gauge Position None TankFarm Tank 1 Tank Density Temper None TankFarm Tank 1 Tank Solids Volume Calc lt FuelsManager provides access to all data point assignments in one dialog box to simplify management of Points in a database CURRENT The Current Database Sys
186. e The Type Of Device amp j Port Type Allen Bradley DH DH Entis Host Interface Modbus Master Modbus Slave Mtu7 InterFace Varec 8130 RTU Varec TSU Model 6820 LAT Terminal Server Port Dial Up Modem Local serial port and Dial up modem The local serial port is used when using any of the serial communications from the local system The dial up modem is used when using a modem for communication The configuration of the local serial port and dial up modem involves the definitions of the baud rate data bits stop bits parity bit handshaking and the port identification Communication Port Configuration RS 232 485 Serial System Name WSIZEMORE Interface Desc INTERFACE 001 Baud Rate Data Bits Stop Bits Handshaking 38400 Es 1 Bits None C C 15Bit C C 7Bits C 2Bits C RTSICTS 8Bits ic Cancel Help LAT Terminal Server Port Local Area Transfer LAT systems support is for legacy systems running on NT systems only with the 900DSL communication server and the 8130 RTU Communications port configuration The communications port configuration is specific to the type of hardware the system utilizes to communicate with field devices In the case of a serial port interface parameters such as baud rate and number of data bits are available for configuration An interface must have a valid configuration for a hardware port before communications with a field device can occur The dialog box used to con
187. e a test value from the Select Coded Variable dialog box If the data format is a user defined string type the Test Value button will be enabled to configure the string in the String Configuration dialog box This dialog box lists the attributes of the selected user defined string type The user selects the appropriate string found in the list box If the data format is Time and Date the time and date must be typed in for the Result Code which is set to the system default time and date Alarm Test Codes dialog box Alarm Test Codes Code Description Not Equal Limit Less than Limit Greater than Limit Less than or Equal Limit Greater than or Equal Limit EQU Database Value equal to Test Value NEQ Database Value not equal to Test Value LES Database Value less than Test Value LEQ Database Value less than or equal to Test Value GRT Database Value greater than Test Value GEQ Database Value greater than or equal to Test Value BIT Bit Set in Database Value which matches Bit in Test Value MASK iu Bit s Set in Database Value matches any Bits in Test alue 80 Administrator Manual Alarms Edit alarm test Step by Step Inthe Define Global Alarm or the Alarm Process dialog box select the desired test Click Delete to delete the test or click Edit to change the test Edit the information in the Edit Condition box or by selecting Build Once changes have been made select Replace to have
188. e existing points in the database For example the Manual Values data type file assigns manual values The import function finds that particular database point and variable and then assigns the manual value To import a point file Note Before performing the tasks to import or export points the default value i e 123 456 789 in the Digit Grouping field needs to be changed to 123456789 on the Customize Regional Options Numbers tab After completing the Export and Import functions change the Digit Grouping field back to its default value i e 123 456 789 To export a point file ADMOOSGVAE 1005 143 FuelsManager Defense Copying and renaming points Database Points can be renamed or copied at any database level Point Copy Rename Point Copy Rename dialog 2j Source Points Tank Farm Destination Points Tank Farm Options Y Copy Description IV Copy Alarms IV Copy Tank Strap Water Table Step by Step From the Database Edit dialog box select the desired database point level Click Copy or Rename The Point Copy Rename dialog box appears with appropriate options to copy or rename The items in the Options section are not available when Rename is selected Inthis dialog box the user enters the Source points used to copy or rename the Destination points Each edit box corresponds to a database level For example if the user were editing a two level database point the lef
189. e movement system tank nodes unit nodes meter nodes movements and groups import the tank unit and meter nodes before the movements 238 Exporting amp Importing Movement Elements You can export movements from FuelsManager to a file and import that file to another FuelsManager with the Movement Import Export feature You import and export the tank nodes unit nodes meter nodes movements and groups separately Exporting Tank Unit and Meter Nodes Movements or Groups You must export tank unit and meter nodes or movements separately However you use the same process for each of them Step by Step From the Movements dialog box click Export The Import Export File Types dialog box appears Select either Tanks Units Meters Movements or Groups and click OK A dialog box appears asking for the filename and location for the export Select the directory for the export enter the file name and click Save The system saves the selected movement information to the file Importing Tank Unit and Meter Nodes Movements or Groups You must import tank unit and meter nodes or movements separately However you use the same process for each of them Step by Step Select Movements from the Configuration menu bar The Movements dialog box appears From the Movements dialog box click Import The Import Export File Types dialog box appears Select either Tanks Units Meters Movements or Groups and click OK
190. e of strapping TYPE table to be used either Innage or Outage A tank may be converted from Innage to Outage by simply changing the selection in the Strap table Type The system calculates the new Outage Strap table based on the Innage table and recalculates the new alarm setpoints A tank may also be converted from Outage to Innage by the same process INNAGE The Innage option button is the default value for new tanks and measures the actual fluid in the tank displaying the Level measurement values from low to high When the Innage option is selected the following applies Alarm settings under the Alarm tab are recalculated to reflect your Innage selection High High must be greater than High and activates when the tank level is equal to or greater than the setpoint High must be greater than Low but less than High High and activates when the tank level is equal to or greater than the setpoint Low must be greater than Low Low but less than High and activates when the tank level is equal to or less than the setpoint Low Low must be less than Low and activates when the tank level is equal to or less than the setpoint Volume calculations are based on the Strap table Administrator Manual Creating and editing tank points Edit Tank Data dialog box Strap Water Table tab OUTAGE The Outage option button measures the actual free space in the tank displaying the Level measurement value from high to low When the Outage
191. e tank transfer or the amount transferred thus far if a transfer is active TRANSFER TOTAL CURRENT TRANSFERRED BASED ON MODE This variable is the amount of volume level mass transferred into or out of a tank during the tank transfer or the amount transferred thus far if a transfer is active Units are based on the selected transfer mode 352 Administrator Manual Product Transfer Data Product Transfer Data TRANSFER MASS CURRENT MASS TRANSFERRED This variable is the amount of mass transferred into or out of a tank during the tank transfer or the amount transferred thus far if a transfer is active TRANSFER TIME REMAIN REMAINING TIME TO FILL OR EMPTY This variable is the time left to complete an active transfer based on the amount left to transfer and the current flow rate TRANSFER START TIME TIME AT WHICH TRANSFER BEGAN This variable is the time at which a currently active transfer started If no transfer is active this variable displays the time that the last transfer was started TRANSFER COMPLETE TIME TRANSFER FINISH TIME This variable is the time at which a last product transfer ended TRANSFER LEVEL SETPOINT TRANSFER LEVEL SETPOINT This variable is the current level shutdown setpoint If no transfer is active this variable displays the level shutdown setpoint for the last transfer TRANSFER VOL SETPOINT TRANSFER FINAL VOLUME SP This variable is the current volume shutdown setpoint If no transfer i
192. ears if the point variable is numerical At this time the engineering units to be displayed are undefined To view a complete list of engineering units refer to the Shared Systems Resources documentation Select the corresponding engineering unit Click Select The Database Value Attributes dialog box appears Select the attributes of the point and then select OK The value appears in the selected cell Database Value DataBase Value Attributes Attributes dialog box Database Point Variable Point Tag Point Name Type Tag Bold Engineering Units Format Table Snap Font Courier New Field Width 194 Size 10 Ei Precision Left To Converted To C Center talic C Right OK ADMOOSGVAE 1005 205 FuelsManager Defense 206 Select Point Variable dialog box Select Point Variable Type Tank Point Variable Point Tag Minor Correction Minor Correction Type Movement Holdoff Movement Holdoff Time ID of controlling Movement Net Flow Net Flow Time No Flow Holdoff No Flow Holdoff Time Overfill Protection Overfill Protection After the Independent Variable has been defined the remaining columns can be filled with Tank point variables such as temperature level and volume After all values have been entered the user has the option of displaying column totals If not the next step is to save and generate the report for viewing in the Operate program Refer to the
193. ect Features Select the features you want to install and deselect the features you do not want to install m Description Integrated systems covering all Ev Inventory Management Main Application ms c kth aspects of bulk liquid fj Movement System management and provides Leak Detection complete integration jv Automated Data Output vj Throughput Calculator ViewRTLI Configuration T ool E Communication Drivers Em FCC w Dispatch zl 0 00 MB of space required on the C drive 28562 01 MB of space available on the C drive InstallShield lt Back Cancel You can select or deselect options as needed and continue the installation ADM003GVAE1005 9 FuelsManager Defense Left User Interface menu from the FuelsManager Configuration application Right Draw menu File Batch Run Files sub menu 10 Upgrading from FuelsManager 4 3 As with all previous versions of FuelsManager upgrades are only supported from the immediately preceding version in this case FuelsManager version 4 3 Install FuelsManager Follow the steps for a new install but select Yes when offered the opportunity to back up the existing project The install wizard will create a folder entitled c FMProject lt CurrentDate gt Regenerating user Graphics and Symbols To complete the upgrade from FuelsManager v4 3 you must regenerate all user defined graphics and symbols from the FuelsManager
194. ected objects as well as modifying the attributes of the selected object These attributes include color style fill pen and condition An additional modifiable attribute is the database point variable selection Conditions and Symbols can also be edited or deleted Most of the editing options are found under the Edit menu This section describes the different techniques used to edit a graphic Editing techniques Before an object in the graphic or symbol can be changed or modified the object must be selected E by Step Click the Hand selector icon from the Draw toolbar Select the object An object selection can be cancelled after the object has been selected Click anywhere on an empty spot in the screen the handles disappear or press ESC Choose an command from the Edit menu to modify the object Deleting an object You can delete objects by selecting the Delete command in the Edit menu or by pressing SHIFT DEL Next amp previous The Next and Previous commands allow the user to change the selected object based on its layered position i e selecting overlapped objects Next PgUp allows you to select an object from the back or bottom to the front or top Previous PgDn allows you to select an object from the front or top of the layers to the back or bottom Attributes All objects found under the Add menu item can be edited using the same initial procedure Sp by Step Select the object Select At
195. ecurity Click Module Seals from the W amp M menu The Module Seals dialog appears Click the checkbox that corresponds to the module you want to change The Update Seals button becomes available Click Update Seals A prompt appears to confirm the changes Click OK If any Seal State changes are checked a prompt appears to enter the Weights amp Measures password Otherwise the prompt is simply for confirmation Enter the password The Weights amp Measures password must be properly entered to modify the Tag Seals W amp M Logic The following is a summary of the logic used when checking the Weights amp Measures seals Sealed modules that are changed in any way in the system will not appear with the W amp M approval indicator The module seals are read when the particular module is started and loaded So any changes in W amp M seal indication will only be effective when the module is restarted reloaded FMCommManager will mark data as sealed if both the driver library and FMCommManager exe modules are sealed Specifically for the 8130 RTU the files cmdc8130 dll and the cmds8130 dll in addition to the RTU point must also be sealed FMDataManager will mark data as sealed if the FMDataManager exe module is sealed and the process variable is sealed for the respective Tag If the process variable is calculated then the VolumeCorrection dll library module must be sealed If the process variable is an input from FMCommMan
196. ed by the modifier assigned to the database point selected ADMOOSGVAE 1005 181 FuelsManager Defense 182 Graphic append This option button displays another graphic A list of graphics can also be found under the Graphic Index option in the Master menu item 2 by Step Select the Graphic option button in the Append Type group box Click File in the File Name group box The Select Graphic Index Entry dialog box appears Select a file from the list and click OK to return to the Append Attributes dialog box The name is displayed in the File Name box at the bottom of the Append Attributes dialog box Report append This option button displays a report i by Step Select the Report option button in the Append Type group box Click File in the File Name group box The Select Report Index Entry dialog box appears Select a file from the list and click OK to return to the Append Attributes dialog box The name is displayed in the File Name box at the bottom of the Append Attributes dialog box Help append This option button displays instructions to direct the operator to perform a specific task Two types of Help files are supported Text Help and Windows Help Format Step by Step Select the Help option button in the Append Type Group Click File in the Graphic File Name group box The Select Help File dialog box appears The Select Help File dialog box allows the selection of an associated help file for the
197. ee the Tank Calculations chapter for more details Only available if a Japan Correction Type is selected on the Edit Tank Data Volume tab Sin Nihon Kentei Kyyoukai1 See the Tank Calculations chapter for more details Only available if a Japan Correction Type is selected on the Edit Tank Data Volume tab Sin Nihon Kentei Kyyoukai2 See the Tank Calculations chapter for more details Only available if a Japan Correction Type is selected on the Edit Tank Data Volume tab Sin Nihon Kentei Kyyoukai3 See the Tank Calculations chapter for more details Only available if a Japan Correction Type is selected on the Edit Tank Data Volume tab This field allows the user to configure the shape of the tank FuelsManager uses this value to determine how to interpolate between strapping table points possible values are Vert Cylinder Horizontal Cylinder End Caps Horizontal Cylinder Flat Ends Standard Sphere and Polynomial Sphere Selecting Polynomial Sphere causes the strapping table tab of the tank configuration dialog box to change to Polynomial Sphere This field allows the user to configure the total internal volume of the spherical tank Used in the LPG calculation method This field allows the user to configure the total height of the sphere at the point at which the automatic tank gauge is installed Used in the LPG calculation method This field allows the user to configure the radius of the sphere Used in the LPG calculation method
198. el Key 6 Parameters Mode 188 Password W amp M Password 338 Pen 170 Pen Attributes Default 171 Permissions 43 System 42 Petroleum tables 275 Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt Weights and Measures 322 Point export a point file 143 I O Point connections 152 ADMOOSGVAE 1005 import a point file 143 RTU Sealing 324 Variables 162 Point Format 383 Point Variable 163 Adding to ArchiveManager 163 Deleting 164 editing 163 points copying 144 importing and exporting 142 Polynomial 280 Polynomial Sphere 125 Pre 1980 291 293 Previous 190 Print Times 213 Printer Network 15 Printers 15 Process Data 112 Leak Detection 248 Process Variable Weights and Measures 331 332 Product and Water Tables Combined 284 Separated 287 Product Configuration 56 Product Definition Edit 57 Importing Exporting 59 Product Transfer data 352 Products Defining 56 Professional Edition 4 Project folder 14 Purging Files 192 R Real Time Analysis Tank analysis types 242 Receipt Movement Type 222 Records ArchiveManager 164 Redrawing 191 Regenerating 10 Graphics and Symbols 10 Tank Details 11 remote systems 30 REPORT 29 ReportManager 15 27 Reports 198 Deleting 217 Editing 214 Exiting 198 folder 14 Formatting 211 Layout 212 Managing 215 Opening 214 Regenerating 11 Saving 216 Standard Pre defined 198 Status 213 R
199. elect the file to import in the corresponding directory and then click Open Export Select the path to save the file to Type in a name for the file and click Save Strings User defined strings are messages that may be used in the Operate program These strings or messages can be used to instruct an operator to perform a specific task FuelsManager provides the user the ability to create User defined string types that may be assigned to Input and Output points For example if an alarm becomes active a message may be displayed instructing the operator to close a valve User defined strings can also be used to display advisory messages concerning equipment status For example a User defined string may be used to display Client Names Client Document Numbers and Destinations The string appears as a data format type in the database The User defined strings are added to the bottom of the data format list In the list the first string type label is USERO Each additional string type is labeled USER1 USER2 etc The string type name appears next to the label There are no standard FuelsManager strings All strings are user defined FuelsManager allows up to 16 unique User defined string types ADMO003GVAE1005 59 FuelsManager Defense Creating strings Step by Step In the Configuration dialog box select the Strings command from the Resources menu From the Strings sub menu select Add Type The String Configu
200. ent system when configured to use separate water and product tables In order to configure Inventory Management to use separate water and product tables simply use the Strap Water table tab of the Edit Tank Data dialog to either manually enter a water table or import a previously defined water table Edit Tank Data gt MWSIZEMORE Mankfarm tank tank4 C Strap Water C Hydro Def Density 60 00 API Temperature 60 00 F Strap Table Type G Strap Water Table Mode Combined C Separated Number Of Table Entries 2 Cancel When using product and water tables Configuration can be used to set the water and strapping table method for either integrated Product and Water tables or Separated Product and Water tables Under Strap Water Table Mode select either Combined or Separated Integrated Product and Water Tables Combined The key concept in the integrated product and water table mode of operation is that the top point of the water table is assumed to coincide with the bottom point of the product table Administrator Manual Traditional tank calculations In the integrated product and water table mode The product table begins were the water table ends Product Product Table Water Table Example 1 Water level lower than the top point in the water table Example 1 shows how the product and water volumes are calculated when the water level is 20ft y less than the water
201. er FMSystemManager performs master initialization and scheduling for the FuelsManager System It starts up the previously mentioned server programs on its local machine In addition it provides shared system resources Coded Variables Modifiers Engineering Units Strings Products Graphic File Names Help File Names and up to 16 sets of User Defined String tables and services that are used by all FuelsManager programs Each machine contains FMSystemManager which must be started before any other FuelsManager program FuelsManager can be set up to start FMSystemManager manually or as a service When started as a service FMSystemManager automatically starts when Windows opens It also executes under the SYSTEM account so it is not necessary for a user to be logged into the system for FMSystemManager to execute System Start up After loading and initializing the shared system resources FMSystemManager then starts up programs such as FMDataManager FMCommManager ArchiveManager and ReportManager The selection of programs depends on the local FuelsManager configuration The startup mode of each program can be configured using the FuelsManager Configuration application System Shutdown Shutting down FMSystemManager closes all FuelsManager programs such as the FMDataManager FMCommManager ArchiveManager and the ReportManager System Resources As mentioned previously FWSystemManager manages certain system resources that are maintained
202. er Volume is either not subtracted subtracted in the calculation of Gross Volume or subtracted in the calculation of Net Volume respectively ADMO03GVAE1005 365 FuelsManager Defense Tank Configuration Data VSW SUBTRACTION This parameter is only available when a Japanese correction type is selected The VSW subtraction options are None Gross Volume and Net Volume VSW is defined as the Volume associated with the percent BSW Bottoms Sediment and Water This parameter defines the method of VSW compensation VSW is either not subtracted subtracted in the calculation of Gross Volume or subtracted in the calculation of Net Volume respectively NET MASS This parameter is only available when a Japanese correction type is selected The Net Mass options are Mass Weight Weight in a Pressure Tank Idemitsu and Food Oil This parameter defines the method of Weight calculation MOLE CONSTANT This parameter is only available when Idemitsu is selected for the Net Mass calculation This parameter defines the Mole Constant value used in the Idemitsu weight calculation SAMPLES This parameter is used along with the Sample Time and Deadband parameters in the averaging calculation of Flow Level Rate Mass Flow and Net Flow It defines the amount of samples to be included in the average The same Sample parameter is used for Flow Level Rate Mass Flow and Net Flow calculations SAMPLE TIME This parameter is used along with
203. er the Categories Click on the tag name that is to be deleted from the Tag listing From the Actions menu select the Delete command Close the Security dialog box Security Actions View Waem A Security Name E Li Categories ET Alarm O Tag Groups B Users fh Audit The security dialog box can be used to create delete or rename Security Tag settings ADM003GVAE1005 37 FuelsManager Defense Note Users are only allowed to belong to one user group Note To be added to FuelsManager the user must also exist as a Windows user the particular Windows user group and permissions assigned to that group do not matter Note A complete list of system and tag permissions is provided later in this section 38 Users and Groups FuelsManager follows the typical user and user group security model The system administrator creates user groups and assigns privileges to these groups that restrict the specific FuelsManager features that the group is allowed to access The administrator then assigns users to these groups Users assigned to a user group can access the FuelsManager features defined for the group By default FuelsManager provides two preconfigured user groups Operator and Administrator It is possible to create new user groups to build a security model that matches the needs of the particular facility In addition to defining which categories the user group can access see above the admin
204. erential Volume or Mass These examples illustrate the different types of xfr modes 4 en Level lt TRequired End Level 4 m Volume Mass 4 nequired End Volume Mass Transfer by Volume or Mass Enter the amount of volume mass lo be transfer from the tank Transfer by Differential Volume or Mass Administrator Manual Definitions Definitions This guide uses the following terms when explaining how to configure the Movement System Movement summary Unit The movement system allows the creation of Source Destination designations called units examples could be Pipeline XYZ Truck Rack 123 Pumphouse A2B Units allow the operator to use meaningful names for plant items being utilized for product movements A unit has no measuring device so it has no way of monitoring product movement users cannot enter movement setpoints for a unit and movements involving units will not calculate discrepancies Meter Node A location in a product movement instance where a reading from a physical meter is possible You can associate FuelsManager input and output database points with meter nodes and have the meter data automatically collected or manually entered Receipt via Meter Node To Tank s One or More Tanks ADMOOSGVAE 1005 225 FuelsManager Defense Me A A E Shipment via To Tank s Meter Node One or More Tanks Closeout is defined as one of the following Stopping of
205. erting a bitmap tuii o rtt f Ee ket eta Pul Ed real ppc dud 183 Visual Dynamic Tools Hee 184 Defining a Dynamic CongditioDi tiii eco edant detecta etg 184 Assigriing a COfidltiOn 5 sois cert oue A OR a re Fe ee ea 185 Customizing your tank detail 2 55 5 c tm ttr Re rd e a 187 Creating a tank detail c eee ee En d te ad 188 Editirigrai values ode eee edt te pn e mete ae 188 Use parameters mode cete este be tore ote donne nitens 188 Use template MI aii e Gr dete re Ere Euh 189 Editirig objSCtS isse mr Red ea 190 Editing techniques i center eren e E ee YR ipee dps 190 D leting an objeGE siente tt nter or ttt ett rr ee te gta 190 Next amp DreviOus z3 uen e cmt eat ce aut ipaa ac demens 190 ge UE 190 Pushto back amp pulto front xor dd benc 190 Copying Single Objects aasi a eieaa etn A t etit rtg ua 191 Moving deleting and copying multiple objects sess 191 Unido laSt Jui eed erret eres e tt eta ede estes 191 Redrawing the Screen cocino eg eR e re pe p RH Hes 191 hesizing oD jecits ctt o p DO EH OR RR REDE EFE 192 Managing Tiles vol de coo Di re i EZ Pb ected Hec ots 192 EWINSBils m PER 192 Purging Tiles acie eniti eee erp iv et E ACE 192 Mergirigilles ettet ettet bee ete entm dies 192 Generating illes aste er eg ee cuiua bas 193 Generating multiple files ssssssseeeeen 193 Using Bo Selected c rmlarid ure t teet etre 194 Using Make COMMAND 194 Using Build All G
206. es From the Actions menu select the Properties command The properties dialog box appears Enter in the name of the server or click on the button next to the Report Manager box to browse for servers Select a printer via drop down box or by typing in the name of printer In the Start Time field enter the time of day that the alarms in this category should print Or in the Print Interval field enter the number of minutes between periodic printings of alarms in this category Select Print Enabled to activate alarm printing Click OK or Apply to have the properties stored for the alarm Close the Security dialog box Use the Start time Field in conjunction with the Print Interval field to synchronize what time periodic print outs will occur For example set Start Time to 00 10 and print interval to 60 minutes to have alarms for the category printed Alarm Properties Security Categories Alarm NewAlarmCa General Report Manager al Printer Start Time 00 00 hh mm Print Interval 0 minutes Print Enabled Alarm Properties dialog box can be used to create delete or rename Security Alarm settings 36 Cancel Administrator Manual Categories Creating Deleting or Renaming Tag Categories In this example we will Delete a Tag Category but you can also follow the instructions to Create or rename a Tag Step By Step Click on next to Categories to expand the tree structure Select Tag und
207. es that the tank is fitted with overfill protection Used for reporting and information only This field denotes that the tank is fitted with spill protection Used for reporting and information only This field allows the user to enable the compensation of the Net Std volume for the thermal expansion effects of the tank shell This field allows the user to configure the tank shell correction method to use the insulated tank correction equation This field is only available if the Enable Correction option is checked This field allows the user to configure the shell area expansion coefficient used in the tank shell correction calculations Manual entry of this value is not allowed except when the Tank Material is set to Other This option configures the tank to use traditional level tank gauging techniques This option configures the tank to use Hydrostatic tank gauging techniques 121 FuelsManager Defense 122 PRESSURE TRANSMITTER SETUP TOP PRESSURE TRANSMITTER SETUP BOTTOM DENSITY DEADBAND ELEVATION These parameters define the position and offset for the Top pressure transmitter in Hydrostatic Hybrid tank calculations These parameters define the position and offset for the Bottom pressure transmitter in Hydrostatic Hybrid tank calculations This parameter defines the minimum change in density that will cause the Hydrostatic Hybrid tank calculations to be executed Defines the elevation
208. esources 56 Restrictions I O Points 152 RTU Weights and Measures 322 Run modes setting 51 Run Down Movement Type 222 S Sample Interval Setting 246 Save Options Graphics 172 395 FuelsManager Defense Saving Files 192 Scale limits 86 Scaling 361 Scaling Functions 139 translation table 137 Seal Changing Seal State 336 Process Variable W amp M 331 Seals System Seals 339 W amp M Software Seals 330 Security 32 Leak Detection 243 Selection Alarm and Tag 42 Server 13 Server Tags OPC 91 Service 16 Shin Nihon Kentei Kyoukai 294 295 Shipment Movement Type 222 Shutdown 25 Shutdown Mode 52 Source Points 144 Sources Movement 234 Standard Density Assignment Options 57 tandard Edition 4 TANDBY 154 tandby Mode 52 tart Definition Creating 67 Start up 25 tatic Analysis Tank analysis types 242 Stopping FuelsManager 17 Strapping 127 S S S S ep 396 Strapping Tables Definition Mode 129 Product and Water 284 Strap Table Volume TOV 281 String Creating 60 Deleting or editing 60 Importing 61 Importing Exporting information 61 Strings 59 Summary Report Creating a table 203 Creating Values 204 Object Functions 201 Symbol 10 Creating 175 180 Index 180 194 Opening 175 Placing in a Graphic 180 symbol opening 175 System Architecture 23 Defining system resources 56 Permission Des
209. essfully renamed and which failed Click OK Changes or new points appear in database Point Copy Rename dialog box SOURCE POINTS _ These fields define the FuelsManager database point to be used as the source for the copy rename action Wildcard characters allow the user to copy an entire database level at once DESTINATION These fields define the FuelsManager database point to POINTS be created by the copy rename action Wildcard characters allow the user to copy an entire database level at once COPY Copy the description of the source point to the destination DESCRIPTION point COPY ALARMS Copy the alarms associated with the source point to the destination point COPY TANK STRAP Copy the tank strapping table of the source point to the TABLE destination point COPY PRODUCT Copy the product assigned to the source point to the destination point ADMO0O0SGVAE 1005 145 FuelsManager Defense 146 Administrator Manual Communications 147 FuelsManager Defense Note Make sure that the CommManager is not in Shutdown mode Otherwise the user will not be able to access the configuration and maintenance dialog boxes 148 Communications interface configuration The Server architecture module CommManager is responsible for exchanging data between the FMDataManager module and external field devices such as tank gauges and remote terminal units To be able to access the Communications menu the
210. evel This includes both Product and Water Level None Nearest Integer i e 123 5 millimeters is truncated to 123 millimeters Temperature This includes Product and Gas Temperature None 0 25 Degrees 0 000 0 124 0 00 C 0 125 0 374 0 25 C 0 375 0 624 0 50 C 0 625 0 874 0 75 C 0 875 1 124 1 00 C 0 5 Degrees 0 00 0 29 0 0 C 0 30 0 79 0 5 C 0 80 1 29 1 0 C Administrator Manual Volume correction techniques Volume correction techniques Custody transfers and billing are used based on volumes at a given temperature or Standard Temperature FuelsManager provides the following temperature correction techniques All correction techniques are based on internationally recognized standards developed by the American Petroleum Institute API American Society for Testing and Materials ASTM Institute of Petroleum IP Japanese Institute of Standards JIS Gosstandart of Russia GOST and Chinese National Standards GB T The goal of a correction technique is to calculate a Volume Correction factor VCF and to use this factor to calculate standard volumes from measured volumes The VCF is defined as Correction for temperature for a liquid Compensates for the effect of temperatures on a liquid Corrects a volume at an observed temperature to a standard temperature Petroleum tables 6A 5A Generalized Crude API gravity 60 F in API 0 40 0 300 F Oil
211. factor as MW x P 1 013 DENV osas TV 273 2 x Z The units of DENV are kg m Step 12 Vapor mass is calculated as the product of vapor volume and vapor density both at tank conditions as MV VV x DENV 1000 Note that MV is in tonnes to match the units of liquid mass Step 13 Total mass is the sum of liquid mass and vapor mass MT MV ML Where MT Total mass MV Vapor mass ML Liquid mass Step 14 Total weight is calculated from total mass and liquid density as WT MT x 1 1 2 DENL15 0 99985 ADMO03GVAE1005 307 FuelsManager Defense 308 Sample LPG calculation Stored Data Calibration 7 points only m Total tank volume VT 114 211 m3 Coefficients of thermal expansion mild steel Gauge wire aW 0 000017 Gauge meeting aM 0 000017 Tank Shell aT 0 000017 Youngs modulus YOUNG 206x108 bar Float data Mass m 1033 5 Diameter d 288 Density of DENL1 999 1 Liquid of Time of Calibration C C g mm kg m Administrator Manual Sample LPG calculation Tank data Radius R 3000 mm Tank Height HT 6000 mm Shell Thick THICK 18 mm Input Data Level H 5062 mm Liquid Temp TL 218 5 C Vapor Temp TV 21 3 C Vapor Pressure P 9 1 barg Check Data Liquid Density DENL 15 C 505 0 Step3 VCF 0 98982 Volume Correction Factor DENL 499 76 Liquid Density liquid temperature Step4 AH 15 86 Gauge correction for float buoyanc
212. figure a port is first displayed during initial configuration The port can be edited by selecting the Port button inside the Device Configuration dialog box Administrator Manual Communications interface configuration The port list box displays the selected communication ports from the list of available ports not assigned to other interfaces There will always be an UNASSIGNED entry in the list The UNASSIGNED selection disables all other controls in the dialog box until a valid port is chosen An interface may be configured with its hardware port UNASSIGNED but the interface may not be activated until a port is chosen If the device is currently ACTIVE it will be set to STANDBY Once a valid port is chosen other communications parameters may be set Choices will be restricted to those which are supported by the device Locked interfaces and devices A Lock status is set when a user is configuring an interface or device If another user is configuring the same interface from another FuelsManager System configuration access to this interface will not be allowed A message will be displayed noting which user has the interface locked and from which system this user is working If the interface is unlocked configuration can proceed normally Anytime a user clicks Done at the end of a configuration process the action saves the configuration updates the run time interface and resets the configuration lock of the interface When an interf
213. files the system will automatically start the update The window logs the updates Updating System Data Updating Product Data Updating Alarm Group Data Updating DataManager and Movement Data Updating Graphics Data ADMOOSGVAE 1005 257 FuelsManager Defense Update Complete If the update is successful the last line of the log will display Update Complete This means that the update was successfully performed and your system is now running the 6 0 database Update Failed If the utility is unable to complete the update the last line of the log will display Update Failed 258 Administrator Manual Error messages and troubleshooting Error messages and troubleshooting Error messages Missing System File Update is Not Available You may get this message in the FMSystemUpdate window Invalid file message re will keep the utility from mu FMSysUpdate updating This message means that either the utility does not recognize the system file as a version that it can update or that there are files missing If your version is not 4 0 4 1 or 4 2 the utility cannot update your database system If this is so the Run button is disabled System Data File Version 4 3 If the utility recognizes the version as 4 3 System Data File Version 4 3 then the system is already updated and you do not need to run this utility In this case the Run button is also disabled Unsupported Graphic Revision in File 3401 SYM
214. from the Gauge Type drop list Edit Tank Data dialog Edit Tank Data gt SIZEMORE Tank Farm Tank Tank 4 Vessel 2 page General Volume Process Data Alarms Vessel Vessel 2 wem Strap Water Table Leak Detection r Transfer Limits High High Maximum Fill 4 010 0t ftin 16th High User Detined Low Low Minimum Empty 00 00 ftin 16th Low User Defined r Gauge Gauge Type Undefined y Modifier Undefined r LPG Float Characteristics Float Mass 00 g Float Density aco API Float Diameter 5 00 Ot ft in 16th ADMOOSGVAE 1005 251 FuelsManager Defense Note The Leak Detection page will not appear if the Leak Detection feature is not installed or the user does not have the Configure Leak Detection security permission Edit Tank Data dialog Leak Detection page 252 Leak Detection The Leak Detection page allows the user to configure Real Time analysis on configured tanks Also automatic printing of a Real Time Leak Test Report at the defined print time and day before end of the month can be configured Edit Tank Data gt WSIZEMORE Tank Farm Tank Tank 4 General Volume Process Data Alarms Vessel 1 Vessel 2 WAM Strap Water Table Leak Detection Properties Tank Analysis Method Unrounded Net Tank Analysis Type Real Time Auto Printing v Use Automatic Printing Recurrence Print Time 12 004M Number days
215. g box open select the Local Alarm option button Select Template to apply a predefined alarm template for the selected database point The Global Alarm Definitions dialog box will appear Only templates that match the point data format are displayed Select the desired template and click Done The Define Alarm Process dialog box appears The attributes of the selected template appear in the dialog box Modify any of the desired test conditions for the template then click OK Sharing global alarms Many points can share global alarms Once a Global Alarm is created it becomes available for assignment Not only does this save time in the creation process but also when editing the alarm When a Global alarm is edited the changes apply to all assigned points Step by Step From the steps above with the Alarm Assignments dialog box open select the Global Alarm option button Click Select Global The Global Alarm Definitions dialog box will appear Only alarms that match the point data format are displayed Selectthe desired alarm and click Done The Alarm Assignments dialog box appears The desired alarm will appear in the Alarm Name box under Global Alarm option button Alarm graphic and alarm help You can set up your alarms to make help graphics and help files available that can assist the operator when dealing with an alarm There may be specific reasons for certain alarms and specific tasks the operator must perform as a
216. ge Format Select Engineering Units box Select Unit Type Select Engineering Unit Right Select ARETES cubic centimeters j Unsigned 8 bit Oto 255 cubic meters Engineering Units Signed 18 bit 32767 ii Dialog box Unsigned 16 bit 0 to 65535 ps cubic inches Long Signed 32bit f 2 147 483 648 cubic feet DWORD Unsigned 32 bit 0to 4 294 967 295 Floating Point 3 4E 38 7 digits Long Float Point 1 7E 308 15 digit Time amp Date y Date Only Time Only Administrator Manual Creating input and output points Entering Details for an input output point Variable Format Details Input Source pa tab Input utput poin Alarm Event Configuration Alarm Defined Edit Alarm Input Translation Table None Sd MESA From the Edit Point dialog box select the Details tab The user can make Alarm Event Configurations for the input output point here by clicking Edit Alarm and setting up alarms for the point See Administering Alarms section for more details Click OK to return to the Edit Point dialog The user can select an Input Translation Table by making a selection in the list The user can also view and edit translation tables by clicking the browse button Translations Translation dialog Scaling Functions Import ADMO003GVAE1005 99 FuelsManager Defense Entering Input Sources for an input output point Input Source tab
217. ge alarms are e 0x01 Scan Failure e 0x02 Gauge l O Fail 0x04 Device Alarm 0x08 Field Cfg Modified e 0x10 Raise Failure 0x20 Lower Failure e 0x40 Upload Failure 0x80 Download Failure e 0x100 OverFill 348 Administrator Manual Tank Points Process Data GAUGE ALARMS BIT XX GAUGE ALARMS This process variable represents the individual elements of the Gauge Alarm Flags Where gauge alarms bit 00 represents the state of the lowest bit of the gauge alarm flags and gauge alarms bit 15 represents the highest bit of the gauge alarm flags Possible values for each gauge alarms bit are Normal or the coded variable associated with the particular bit In the example above gauge alarms bit 00 Normal or Scan Failure TEMP TANK AMBIENT AMBIENT TANK TEMPERATURE This process variable is the ambient temperature of the air surrounding the tank This variable is normally entered by the operator but can be linked to automatic tank gauging systems In addition this variable supports linking to a local FuelsManager database point this allows multiple tanks to read one common ambient temperature VOLUME CORRECTION TANK VOLUME CORRECTION This process variable is the unmeasurable volume associated with line segments and manifolds connected to the tank This variable is normally entered by the operator but can be linked to automatic tank gauging systems to allow remote commands to the tank gauges VOL CORRECTION TIME VOL
218. ger point and a trigger value can be entered Automated Data Output will wait for that specific database point value to equal the trigger value and will then write the snapshot file Trigger Time 1 2 Two trigger times can be specified directly These times indicate exactly when the snapshot file should be written This option is very useful for things like daily inventory reports or statements Trigger File This option triggers a snapshot file whenever a specific file is detected The file is then deleted as soon as the operation is complete to reset the trigger The Periodic file is a CSV file written at regular intervals as specified in the Periodic Interval field There is a check box option to export the column headers with the data as well as an option to include a custom Version column The HTML file is a hypertext markup language HTML file and it is written periodically according to the Periodic Interval field There is an option to include another HTML file as a header so that company logos etc can be included on the output This option can be used to publish data directly to a local or web server on a periodic basis The XML file is an extensible Markup Language XML file and it is written periodically according to the Periodic Interval field It can be used alongside or instead of the HTML file 265 FuelsManager Defense Automated Data Output configuration dialog Note If a tank point variable is not
219. ging systems or manually entered by the operator VOLUME AVAILABLE NET NET AVAILABLE PRODUCT This process variable is the Net Volume of product that can safely be issued from the tank FuelsManager normally calculates this by subtracting the Net Std Volume at the minimum working level from the current Net Std Volume However this value can be measured by automatic tank gauging systems or manually entered by the operator STANDARD DENSITY STANDARD DENSITY 344 Administrator Manual Tank Points Process Data Tank Points Process Data This process variable is the current corrected density of the product at the standard temperature as defined by the selected correction method This variable can be measured by automatic tank gauging manually entered by the operator or calculated by FuelsManager from the observed density current temperature and correction method MASS PRODUCT MASS This process variable is the mass of product FuelsManager normally calculates this by multiplying the Net Std Volume by the Std Density However this value can be measured by automatic tank gauging systems or manually entered by the operator MASS TIME TIME OF LAST MASS UPDATE This process variable is the last time that the tank mass was updated This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified SOLIDS LEVEL BOTTOM SOLIDS LEVEL This process variable is the level of solids in the tank the operator usually manua
220. he Archive Manager Configuration dialog box appears Change the Interval entry to 5 and click OK The system closes the Archive Manager Configuration dialog box and updates ArchiveManager with the new settings 246 Administrator Manual Edit Tank Data Edit Tank Data All leak relevant data must be configured in the Edit Tank Point Data dialog for each tank when a leak analysis is performed The minimum leak rate value maximum leak rate value and leak rate units for the tank are configured on the General page of the dialog Edit Tank Data gt WSIZEMORE Tank Farm Tank Tank 4 Note The fields described in this General Volume Process Data Alarms Vessel 1 Vessel 2 WEM Strap Water Table Leak Detection section for the Edit Tank Data dialog only apply to those related Description Tag Category Default to Leak Detection For descriptions of other fields on the Edit Tank Detail Display Quality Data Data dialog refer to the Databases section of this manual Variable Type Minimum Maximum Engineering Units Level 40 00 00 ft nch 16th Temperature 300 00 300 00 Degrees Fahrenheit Volume 0 00 10 000 00 U S Gallon Mass 0 00 10 000 000 00 Pound Density 0 00 100 00 Degrees API Standard Density 0 00 100 00 Degrees API Flow 1 000 00 1 000 00 L S Gallon min Pressure Units 0 00 30 00 pound sq in PSI Level Change Rate 10 00 10 00 feet per minute Mass Flow 3 000 00 3 000 00 pounds per hour
221. he following formula is used to calculate Gross Volume GOV TOV FRA CORRVOL Where TOV Strap Volume at the current tank level FRA Floating Roof Adjustment CORRVOL Un measurable volume associated with tank pipe work Japanese correction methods If a volume correction method with the Japan designation is selected The following additional options are available GOV TOV FW FRA 1 0 BSW 100 0 CORRVOL ADMO03GVAE1005 291 FuelsManager Defense 292 Where TOV FW FRA BSW CORRVOL Water not subtracted Water Subtracted from Gross Volume Water Subtracted from Net Volume VSW not subtracted VSW Subtracted from Gross Volume VSW Subtracted from Net Volume Roof Type Kaiji Kentei Kyoukai Roof Type Shin Nihon Kentei Kyoukai 1 2 or 3 Strap Volume at the current tank level Free water Tank Bottom Solids if any Floating Roof Adjustment Percentage of bottoms sediment and water impurities Un measurable volume associated with tank pipe work The value of FW in the gross volume calculation is always zero The FW value is subtracted from the TOV as defined above The FW is zero in the gross volume calculation it is subtracted from the Net Volume see below The value of BSW in the gross volume calculation is always zero The BSW value is subtracted from the TOV as defined above The BSW is zero in the gross volume calculation it is subtra
222. he liquid phase there should be little temperature gradient and a single measurement should be adequate In the vapor phase a gradient may be more apparent and the average of the vapor temperature at the surface and at the top of the tank should be used Measured values H gauge reading of liquid level in mm average vapor temperature C Step 2 Density is to be input by the operator This should be the liquid density at 15 C and should be in units of kg m Input value Administrator Manual LPG quantity calculation from liquid density DENL 15 liquid density at 15 C kg m eum of VCF and hence liquid density at tank conditions may be calculated as follows X DENL15 500 25 YI 0Q296 0 2395x X 0 2449167 x X 0 105 x X3 0 01658334 x X Ne 363 8 4 924927 x X 13 66258 x X 6 375 x X 1 087503 x X TR 288 2 Y2 TT 1 TR 1 3 VO 1 1 52816 x TT 1 43907 x TT 0 81446 x TT 0 190454 x TT VD 0 296123 0 386914 x TR 0 427258 x TR 0 0480645 x TR TR 1 00001 Vi VO x 1 Y1 x VD TR TL 273 2 Y2 TT 1 TR 1 3 PONE 1 1 52816 x TT 1 43907 x TT 0 81446 x TT 0 190454 x TT VD 0 296123 0 386914 x TR O 427258 x TR 0 0480645 x TR TR 1 00001 V2 VOx 1 Y1 x VD VCF V1 V2 VCF should be rounded to 5 decimal places The density of liquid at liquid temperature is given by DENL DEN15 x VCF Step 4 The following formu
223. he lists The user can also view and edit translation tables by clicking the browse button next to the input list 102 Administrator Manual Creating and editing triggered points Entering Output Destinations for a triggered point For triggered points the output destinations are the points that get populated as a result of the input source changing Variable Format Details Output Destinations input Source Output destinations triggered point Edit Remove Description ADMOOSGVAE 1005 103 FuelsManager Defense Entering Input Source for a triggered point For triggered points the input source is the point that the trigger point will monitor Input Source Variable Format Details Output Destinations Input Source triggered point Edit Remove Description 104 Administrator Manual Edit Point Dialog box DESCRIPTION DISABLED TAG CATEGORY FORMAT BITFIELD DATA UNITS MODIFIER MIN VALUE MAX VALUE DISPLAY QUALITY DATA ALARM EVENT CONFIGURATION ADMO03GVAE1005 Edit Point Dialog box dit Point di log Define a descriptive name to be use for the point This name can be displayed on user graphics and reports in addition it forms part of the alarm entry if an alarm condition should occur Disable the processing of a particular input output point The default is unchecked i e the point is processed Each database point can be assigned a T
224. he product table to extend the range From the water table 2ft of water 2000 gal From the product table 1ft of water 1000 gal Total water volume for 3ft of water 3000 gal Administrator Manual Traditional tank calculations Subtracting the 1ft of water volume from the product volume 5000 1000 gal equals Product volume 4000 gal Example 3 Water level equals the top point in the water table Example 3 shows how the product and water volumes are calculated when the water level is 20ft y equal to the top point in the water table Product Table 5ft Product ft of Product I L qg 2ft Water Water Table on t This example shows how the product and water volumes are calculated when the water level is equal to the top point in the water table 0 0 0 0 1 ft 1000 gal 1 ft 1000 gal 2ft 2000 gal 2ft 2000 gal 5ft 5000 gal 20 ft 20 000 gal Separate Product and Water Tables Separated When configured to use the separate product and water table mode Inventory Management assumes no correlation between the water and product tables Since this mode of operation provides no correlation between the product and water tables it is assumed that the tables start at the same point and overlap in the lower part of the tank ADMOOSGVAE 1005 287 FuelsManager Defense 288 Separated strapping and water tables example Product Table Water
225. he system saves your changes and returns you to the Archive Manager Configuration dialog box Edit variable Variables Variable BSW Type Double Width 17 Precision 3 ADMOOSGVAE 1005 Select Point Variable dialog box Note When adding numeric variables to Archive Manager you should also add the variables min max units and engineering units Failure to do so will prevent FuelsManager from displaying historical trend plots for the variable and will make the data archived less useful to external Systems Edit Variable dialog box 163 FuelsManager Defense 164 Deleting point variables Step by Step n the Tank Point Variables display window in the Archive Manager Configuration dialog box click on the variable entry you want to delete The selection is highlighted Click Delete The system deletes the entry from the Tank Point Variables window Once a variable has been added to the ArchiveManager configuration and the user has confirmed the addition by clicking OK on the ArchiveManager Configuration dialog box it cannot be deleted Records ArchiveManager creates two records for each type of point selected one for data and the other for the description Data Records are updated at the selected interval and are subject to the Historical Period field and contain process data Description Records are only updated on change and are not subject to the Historical Period field and contain configura
226. he tank temperature exceeds the HiHi Alarm value then a High High alarm is activated This variable is entered when configuring the tank point but can be modified from Operate by a user with sufficient privileges TEMP HIGH LIMIT CURRENT HIGH TEMP LIMIT This variable is the limit for a High temperature alarm If the tank temperature exceeds the High Alarm value then a High alarm is activated This variable is entered when configuring the tank point but can be modified from Operate by a user with sufficient privileges TEMP LOW LIMIT CURRENT LOW TEMP LIMIT This variable is the limit for a Low temperature alarm If the tank temperature falls below the Low Alarm value then a Low alarm is activated This variable is entered when configuring the tank point but can be modified from Operate by a user with sufficient privileges TEMP LOLO LIMIT CURRENT LO LO TEMP LIMIT This variable is the limit for a Low Low temperature alarm If the tank temperature falls below the LoLo Alarm value then a Low Low alarm is activated This variable is entered when configuring the tank point but can be modified from Operate by a user with sufficient privileges ADMO0O0SGVAE 1005 355 FuelsManager Defense Tank Alarms Data TEMPERATURE ALARM HOLDOFF This variable is the sometimes known as deadband or hysteresis It is the amount by which the alarm limit must be cleared before the alarm is deactivated For example if the High temperature alarm setpoi
227. ht T justified and may include an optional background rectangle Also you have a choice of fonts and various sizes Step by Step Select the Label tool or select Add and click Label Click on area of insertion The Label Attributes dialog box appears Label Attributes dialog Label Attributes box Label Text Current Font Edit Text Color Font Arial 7 Palette Size 13 Backaround Color Options o Palette Y Bold talic L BackGr Rectangle Cancel Transparent Enter the Label name format appearance of the label or set up the label alignment Click Edit to format the font appearance of the label Center Text in Rectangle only applies when Back Ground Rectangle is used Select a text and text background rectangle color by clicking on Palette button The edit box displays the number assigned to each color in the palette Click OK A label appears in selected area Inserting a database value The Value tool allows you to display data from a database When the graphic is 1 23 opened in the Operate program the value of the database point is displayed ADMOOSGVAE 1005 177 FuelsManager Defense Note The default font attributes also apply to the Value object 178 Value Attributes dialog box Creating a Value involves selecting a point for example Tank 10 from Tank Farm 20 a point parameter i e temperature tank level and a system database Step by Step Select the
228. ications are created saved edited and deleted using the resources command in the FuelsManager Configuration application They are saved in the Product Index which can be accessed during database edit and then assigned to Tank points Creating a new product definition Step by Step In the Configuration dialog box select select the Products command from the resources menu The Product Configuration dialog box appears Click Add to create a new a product code The Edit Product Definition dialog box appears Enter in the name of the product description of the product assignment options correction method if any and temperature alarms if any The product name can be up to twenty alphanumeric characters and the description can be up to thirty alphanumeric characters Enter any appropriate Assignment Options for the product definition Click OK to save the product definition Product Configuration Product Server MSIZEMORE Number of Entries 6 Product Code Product Description CRUDE Crude Oil JET DERV Diesel Fuel GAS Gasoline HOIL Heating Oil Jet A Fuel TRANS Pipeline Transmix Si Administrator Manual Defining system resources Edit Product Definition Product Assignment Options Name 20 chars Y Use Correction Method Description 30 chars Crude Oil Use Temperature Limits Use Standard Density Correction Method Temperature Alarms Type Specific api F T Tabie 68 54 y Standar
229. ice An illustration of the W amp M seal indication is provided below a FuelsManager Operate W amp M Tank Detail USUTCLIFFE21Test W4M Tank dE Display Alarm Point Tools Movements Trend Window Help Tank Point HET Product CS Measured Values Love MEEA ES 12 20 2004 3 38 36 PM 12 22 2004 11 53 44 AM Water Level Set 12 22 2004 11 53 47 AM ft in 16th Any FuelsManager user defined reports will include W amp M indicators The system checks the database for the Seal and displays the subscript if applicable The indicator appears at the footer of each report page Administrator Manual Sealing FuelsManager Modules Sealing FuelsManager Modules FuelsManager includes a Seals database This database exists on each computer in a FuelsManager network and is stored in the FMSecurity dat file under the FMProject directory For each module in the database the system stores the Path a CRC16 Checksum determined at the time the module is sealed and a Seal State that indicates whether the module is or is not sealed Access to the Module Seals Database is provided through the FMSecurityServer interface of FMSystemServer exe W amp M officials can administer Module Seals in FuelsManager from Security The Module Seals dialog shows all the modules contained in the Module Seals database for the Current System Modules can be added and removed The dialog shows the following for each module Seal Sta
230. ics Edit Tank Data gt WSIZEMORE TankFarm Tank 4 Tank General Volume Process Data Alarms Vessel 1 Vessel 2 W M Strap Water Table Leak Detection Characteristics Optional Protection Tank Shell Correction Cathodic Protection Enable Overfill Protection T Spill Protection AreaCoef Gauging Setup Landed Height ftin 16th Floating Height 3 00 00 ftin 16th Roof Mass 487 00 lb Roof Type Roof Mass in Strap Traditional Hydrostatic Hybrid Tank Geometry Vert Cylinder X Pressure Transmitter Setup OffSet PSI Height ftin 16th Tank Volume 0 gal US Tank Height 0 00 ftin 16th T Midde 7 00 00 Tank Radius 0 00 ftin 16th Bottom ph poo Shell Thickness 0 00 ftin 16th Wok m Minimum Level 0000 ftin 16th Date Installed 5 18 2003 y Vni iani veg Tank Material Unknown A T D oms Expcoet f0 Elevation D k Install Temp F Latitude i p p D M S Level OffSet ft in 16th F Top Administrator Manual Creating and editing tank points Entering Vessel 1 information Step by Step Click the Vessel 1 tab Enter information about the basic physical Characteristics Landed Height Floating Height Roof Mass Roof Type Tank Geometry Tank Volume Tank Height Tank Radius Shell Thickness Lining Material Date Installed Tank Material ExpCoef and Install Temperature Under Optional Protection indicate any Cathodic Overfill or Spill protection that
231. impurities in the tank FuelsManager normally calculates this from the BSW value and the current gross volume However the value can also be measured by automatic tank gauging systems or manually entered by the operator TANK BOTTOM VOLUME TOTAL BOTTOM VOLUME This process variable is the combined water and solids volumes in the tank FuelsManager normally calculates this by adding the water volume to the solids volume values However the value can also be measured by automatic tank gauging systems or manually entered by the operator VAPOR TEMP VAPOR TEMPERATURE This process variable is the temperature of the vapor space above the product in the tank This variable is usually measured by automatic tank gauging but can be manually entered by the operator This data is normally only applicable to tanks containing liquified hydrocarbons ADMO0O0SGVAE 1005 347 FuelsManager Defense Tank Points Process Data TEMP VAPOR TIME VAPOR TEMPERATURE TIME This process variable is the last time that the tank level was updated This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified LEVEL CHANGE RATE RATE OF LEVEL CHANGE This process variable is the rate of change of the level value due to movement of product into or out of the tank FuelsManager normally calculates this sampling the level at user defined intervals and averaging the change in level over a user defined number of samples However this value can a
232. in files These files may be managed independently on each computer or cooperatively for a network of computers The SERVER value under HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SoftwareYFuelsManager in the registry controls this functionality System Manager accomplishes this by using either Independent System files or Master system files Independent System Files By default the local computer independently maintains all system resource files The SERVER registry key contains the local computer system name Configuration changes are applied to the local files and are not visible to other FuelsManager stations on a Local Area Network LAN The default Independent method is normally used for single computer FuelsManager systems This method is also used when interconnected systems are using different languages or when the client computer is connected to the main FuelsManager system using low speed serial communications Master System Files Under this method a master server maintains multiple computer systems The SERVER registry key contains the master server s computer name All configuration changes to shared resources are directed to the master server instead of the local system During start up the FMSystemManager on each FuelsManager computer loads System files If the registry designates another computer as the server a link to ADMO003GVAE1005 25 FuelsManager Defense 26 the server is established so that all changes to the system shared re
233. ines that FuelsManager should calculate this value This option is only available for tank point variables that can be calculated i e volume mass etc It is not available for variables that must be measured or manually entered i e Level or Temperature Local input This data source option defines the value to be connected to another database point and is only available for the Tank Point variable Ambient Temperature OPC The OPC option also allows the user to connect to an external field device via a Varec or third party OPC server The Hierarchy of tags available depends on the OPC server selected After selecting the OPC option the OPC Server Source select Dialog box appears ADMO003GVAE1005 87 FuelsManager Defense OPC Server Source Select dialog Note You must configure the data format correctly for the range of data expected Attempting to write a value that it too large for the data format defined will result in truncation of and possible misinterpretation of the data Note For a list of the available formats refer to the Glossary 88 OPC Server Source Select System SIZEMORE Selected OPC Server ArchiveManager 1 Selected Tag Scan Time 1000 mSec 100 10000 DataManager 1 E 1 2 Tank Farm Tank Tank 4 Cancel Within this dialog box the System and Selected Servers are displayed in non editable fields Below these the Scan Time may be entered to set the update
234. ing DAW ans cioe ip E err rete Hie a err e bebe ee e 168 EXA Dd S LAM MM Eu LM MEM 168 An introduction to creating graphics sssss conan rccnn nr 168 How a graphic is used in the Operate application co 169 Draw WIDnGOW la oro erede cte ae de ce HO Rotes 169 The Drawing Space c r dal oui eaae ora te cadre e p aie 169 The Draw TOO ar sv iia bi 169 Drawing tool IGOAS so hives er e SO erase ad a 170 Pens Br s NA 170 MeSSage WINdOW Sasa t rotta tice n ee ote ea 170 Text G background HOX eui i eer iato eco ttc ee tps 170 Defaults SINGS rc ee ep e PR Eae Prec B Re ena 170 Setting the default font sss emen 171 Setting the default text color sss 171 Setting the default background mode sssssssse 171 Setting the default background color ssssss 171 Setting the default pen attributes sss 171 Setting the default brush attributes sssssssssssee 172 Display DMA ME p 172 Display grid eheck bOX it ee torito 172 Save options on exit checkbox ssssssssssseee eee 172 Horlzontaliand Vertical 4 2 orte notet n a Le dre ve tete retorica 172 Horizontal and vertical offset sss 172 Majo DIV se sett ee n eter tee qm ente p tte dee 173 GIG ucc coerente a ciae n teo a deed ua rea 173 MAJOR 173 COMET us c od ceca e tene Le ebd eue barca ot ue h e eee 173 Show apperids cir teer Pe re np Pr Ce rere en
235. ing and editing tank points If FuelsManager calculates an individual flow rate that is below the deadband parameter the value will be treated as zero for the purposes of averaging the flow rate Users should tune the deadband parameter such that normal gauge movements caused by product surface ripples or wind movement will not be considered in the flow average calculation ADMO03GVAE1005 111 FuelsManager Defense Process data information Edit Tank Data dialog box Process Data tab Edit Tank Data gt WSIZEMORE TankFarm Tank 4 Tank Source Manual Entry Manual Entry Calculated Manual Entry Manual Entry Calculated Calculated Not Assigned Density Temperature Not Assigned Solids Volume Calculated Transfer Mode Manual Entry VARIABLE COLUMN This column displays the tank point process variable name This column is for display only 112 Administrator Manual Creating and editing tank points Select Data Source Water Volume Source Type Selection Current Type Calculated Manual Comm Calc OPC Bitfield Properties Start Bit Number of Bits Start Data Source Bit Data Type Translation None v Source Units Undefined AA Data Source System Device Point Description OK Cancel Select Data Source dialog box When a new Tank Point is created FuelsManager sets the default Data Source s to the most common settings however the Data Sources for Level a
236. installed TANK RADIUS ADMO0O0SGVAE 1005 367 FuelsManager Defense Tank Configuration Data This parameter is used for LPG volume correction methods and defines the radius of the sphere SHELL THICKNESS This parameter is used for LPG volume correction methods and defines the thickness of the sphere s shell LINING MATERIAL This piece of data stores the material that the tank is coated with on the inside of the tank DATE INSTALLED This variable stores the date that the tank was brought into service TANK MATERIAL If this parameter defines the material from which the tank shell is constructed Different materials have different thermal coefficients of expansion and hence expand or contract at different rates The selection of tank material will effect the calculated tank shell correction factor TANK SHELL CORRECTION EXPCOEF This parameter defines the material expansion coefficient used in the tank shell correction calculations Manual entry of this value is not allowed except when the Tank Material is set to Other INSTALL TEMP This parameter stores the outside ambient temperature when the tank was brought into service CATHODIC PROTECTION This variable denotes that this tank is fitted with Cathodic protection used for reporting and information only OVERFILL PROTECTION This variable denotes that this tank is fitted with Overfill protection used for reporting and information only SPILL PROTECTION This variable denotes th
237. ints Process Data DESCRIPTION POINT DESCRIPTION This process variable is the name by which the input point is known to the user This variable is entered when configuring the input point but cannot be modified via Operate PROCESS VALUE PROCESS VARIABLE OR SETPOINT This process variable is the current value of the input point This variable is usually linked to automatic tank gauging systems PLC s or DCS systems but can also be manually entered by the operator ALARM STATUS COMPOSITE ALARM STATUS This variable is a composite value that displays a coded variable representing the highest priority alarm for the input point Possible values depend on the format of the alarm definition associated with the input point FuelsManager calculates this alarm based on the current process value and the alarm definition configured for the input point This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified UNITS ENGINEERING UNITS This variable is the engineering units of the input point s process variable This variable is entered when configuring the input point but cannot be modified via Operate TIME TIME OF LAST VALUE UPDATE This process variable is the last time that the input point s process value was updated This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified TICKS MILLISECONDS OF LAST UPDATE This process variable is the number of milliseconds that have elapsed since input poin
238. ints process data Triggered points process data Output Points Process Data DESCRIPTION POINT DESCRIPTION This process variable is the name by which the output point is known to the user This variable is entered when configuring the output point but cannot be modified via Operate OUTPUT OUTPUT POINT COMMAND This process variable is the value of the last command issued via this output point This variable is usually linked to automatic tank gauging systems PLC s or DCS systems and is used to send operator commands to field devices i e Open Close Start Stop PROCESS VALUE PROCESS VARIABLE OR SETPOINT This process variable is the current value of the output point This variable is usually linked to automatic tank gauging systems PLC s or DCS systems but can also be manually entered by the operator ALARM STATUS COMPOSITE ALARM STATUS This variable is a composite value that displays a coded variable representing the highest priority alarm for the output point Possible values depend on the format of the alarm definition associated with the output point FuelsManager calculates this alarm based on the current process value and the alarm definition configured for the output point This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified UNITS ENGINEERING UNITS This variable is the engineering units of the output point s process variable This variable is entered when configuring the outpu
239. ion System Name Units Minimum Process Value Range Maximum Process Value Range Type Time Stamp Description Record Point Tag Description System Name Units Minimum Process Value Range Maximum Process Value Range Type Time Stamp Administrator Manual Creating Graphics FuelsManager Defense Note The Draw feature is only available in the FuelsManager Professional Edition The Standard Edition will not allow access to this feature For additional information about upgrading to the Professional Edition and above please contact your Varec representative Custom Site Overview Graphic created using Draw application 168 Draw application The FuelsManager Draw application is used to develop or edit process graphic displays and symbols displayed in the Operate program Draw is used to create graphic objects to define displays dynamic condition codes and symbols Draw enables the user to create custom graphic screens in addition to editing the tank detail graphics included in the FuelsManager package Make sure that the DatabaseManager is not in SHUTDOWN mode Otherwise the user will not be able to access the database dialog boxes used to define values Refer to the Setting Subsystem Run Modes section of the Administrative Operations chapter for instructions on setting the DatabaseManager mode Opening Draw Step by Step From the FuelsManager Configuration application select the Draw Graphics c
240. ional audit trail to assist in monitoring configuration changes made by users Security Actions View WM y LM amp Groups 4 Users fei Audit Opening the Security Window Step by Step From the FuelsManager Defense Configuration window click the System menu Select Security The Security window opens Administrator Manual Microsoft Windows and FuelsManager security The Actions menu includes the options to aad delete rename properties or close ADD The Add command allows the administrator to add a user group tag or an alarm according to what section is selected in the security dialog box RENAME The Rename command allows the administrator to rename a user group tag or an alarm according to what section is selected in the security dialog box CLOSE The Close command will close the Security dialog box completely The View menu allows the users to change the way elements are displayed in the security dialog box LARGE The Large Icons command will make all of the icons in the right ICONS hand window appear large LIST The List command will arranges the elements in a column in the right hand window Small Icons will be shown next to each element and no details will be displayed 33 ADMOOSGVAE 1005 FuelsManager Defense Note The process of defining which database points are in which alarm tag category takes places as part of database config
241. ions You can assign the Dynamic Conditions to an object s Pen amp Background color Brush color and whether the object is Visible or not Step by Step Select the object or symbol you wan to assign the Dynamic Condition to From the Edit menu select Conditions to open the Define Object Conditional Data dialog or press lt Ctrl K gt Select the checkbox to one of the available features Pen Color Background Color Brush Color or Object Visibility Click the corresponding Edit button to open the Select Global Dynamic Conditions dialog select the condition you want to attach and click OK You can also define new conditions and edit existing ones ADMOOSGVAE 1005 185 FuelsManager Defense Define Object Conditional Data Define Object Conditional Data dialog 186 Administrator Manual Visual Dynamic Tools Customizing your tank detail The Tank Detail not only displays tank point information but also is used to perform tank transfers and tank calculations You have the option of using one of the defaults provided with your system or creating one or more user defined Tank Details One of the FuelsManager default Tank Details is typically used as a template The user is able to rearrange the contents delete sections and create new values labels appends and other objects The user can use any of Draw s drawing tools to redesign the Tank Detail The only difference between creating a Tank Detail and crea
242. ions selected in the Selected Point Type and Connection Types options Opening the Database IO Connections dialog box Note For a description of the Database IO Connections refer to Step by Step the table below Open FuelsManager Configuration From the Database menu select the Source Assignments command Note The Select Data Source Y 3 dialog may also be opened directly The Database IO Connections dialog box appears from the Input Output Trigger or Select and then double click any database point shown Tani Hori editdialog The Select Data Source dialog box appears Select Data Source Select Data Source Water Yolume dialog box Source Type Selection Current Type Calculated Clear Manual Comm Bitfield Properties Start Bit Number of Bits Start Data Source Bit Data Type Translation None Y Source Units Undefined Data Source System Device Point Description OK Cancel ADMOOSGVAE 1005 131 FuelsManager Defense Note For details on Data Source types see Point Attributes section 132 Dialog Group Source Type Selection Bitfield Properites Only available the point is configured to process bitfield data Data Type Data Source Button Field Current Type Start Bit Number of Bits Start Data Source Bit Translation Source Units System Device Point Description Description Displays the current Data Source type for
243. isplay process or equipment status on graphics and reports FuelsManager allocates the first 512 Coded Variables These standard Coded Variables are used for FuelsManager processes and cannot be modified The predefined variables include most common process control states including equipment status alarm states months of the year and equipment commands If the list is not sufficient the user has the ability to create new Coded Variables Once created the Coded Variables are available for assignment in the database ADMO003GVAE1005 61 FuelsManager Defense Coded Variables Configuration dialog box Note Standard Coded Variables cannot be deleted 62 Creating a new coded variable Step by Step From the Resources menu in the Configuration dialog box select the Coded Variables command the Coded Variables Configuration dialog box appears Type in a coded variable name The name can be up to 15 characters including any embedded spaces entered then click Add The name appears in the list click OK The Coded Variable is now available for database point assignment Coded Variables List Variable 26 Standard 337 Custom 0 Coded Variables Configuration dialog box The Coded Variables Configuration dialog box lists all the variables found in the system standard and custom Coded Variables and the quantity of each type The user is able to add or delete custom Coded Variables Each Coded Variable is identified
244. istrator can control the specific system features a user group has access to These privileges are divided into two sections System permissions these apply to the overall FuelsManager system and control general access to features like configuring the database or deleting database points Tag permissions these apply to previously defined tag categories and control access to features specific to a database point like setting the level high high alarm limit or executing a gauge command Creating and Editing Users User accounts can be created in the Security dialog box Once the FuelsManager user account is created the user can then be added to a User Group Furthermore the administrator can delete rename or define properties for the user Administrator Manual Users and Groups Creating Deleting or Renaming a User Step By Step Click on the Users icon to display a list of users in the right side window This list contains all the FuelsManager users and their corresponding groups FuelsManager is capable of supporting fifty 50 different users From the Actions menu select the Add command Enter the case sensitive user name as it appears in Windows Close the Security dialog box Note To select multiple users to Security delete simultaneously use the Cetus View WM lt Ctrl gt key in conjunction with the Add mouse to highlight all users ep Name Full Name Description Group desired to be deleted Rena
245. itting Using the least square method results in a set of polynomial coefficients FuelsManager accommodates a fourth order polynomial to obtain a VCF The VCF polynomial equation is as follows VCF KO K1 Dtemp K2 DTemp2 K3 DTemp3 K4 DTemp4 Where VCF Volume correction factor Std Density StdTemp Standard Temperature DTemp E Current temperature StdTemp KO K4 Coefficients of polynomial 280 Administrator Manual Traditional tank calculations Traditional tank calculations Traditional tank sensors return the level and temperature of the tank From these two values plus the tank configuration a series of calculations is performed by the FuelsManager Strap Table Volume TOV The strap volume is obtained from the tank strapping table for the measured tank level FuelsManager calculates the volume for a given level based on the tank shape as shown below Cylindrical tanks LevelRatio Level LowLevel HighLevel LowLevel TOV LowVolume HighVolume LowVolume x LevelRatio Where Level Current Tank Liquid Level LowLevel Strapping point level in table immediately below Level HighLevel Strapping point level in table immediately above Level LowVolume Strapping point volume in table for LowLevel point High Volume Strapping point Volume in table for HighLevel point Horizontal tanks LevelRatio1 Level HighLevel x Level HighestLevel LowLevel HighLevel x LowLevel
246. ity to view any reports created on the earlier system Step by Step From the FuelsManager Configuration Menu bar click User Interface and select Create Reports command The Report application will start Click on the File menu and select Batch Run Files command The Batch Compile dialog box appears select the Build All option A confirmation dialog box appears select OK Select Cancel to close the Batch Compile dialog box Regenerating Tank Details and other graphic files FuelsManager ships with regenerated Tank Detail displays However if you want to continue using an existing v4 3 custom detail you will need to regenerate the custom tank detail ADMO003GVAE1005 11 FuelsManager Defense 12 Left Detail Mode is Checked on the File menu Right Open Graphic File dialog box Open Graphic File File Name EG Directory c Afmprojectigraphics File Type SiteO verview GAF Graphic Symbol Administrator Manual Networking Networking Operator Interface Printer ODBC Data Source Calculations SystemManager I O Driver I O Driver I O Driver Instruments Pros RrUs The above figure illustrates a typical FuelsManager System setup This example is only one of many configurations but it provides a general understanding of how an FuelsManager System is configured Network Installation
247. k Left USB Key Right Parallel Key Installing the hardware key Each FuelsManager workstation requires a hardware key in order for the software to run This device plugs into either the parallel port or USB of the CPU without disrupting normal operations and should be inserted as indicated in the installation program Along with the physical key there is a driver called Sentinel that is automatically configured during the software installation To install the FuelsManager parallel hardware key perform the following steps Step by Step f the computer has a local printer detach the printer cable from the rear of the computer Attach the hardware key to the printer port f the computer has a local printer attach the printer cable to the hardware key USB keys should not be installed until after FuelsManager has been successfully installed See the Installing USB Hardware Key section for instructions Administrator Manual Installing FuelsManager Installing FuelsManager FuelsManager installation wizard FuelsManager Defense V6 0 InstallShield Wizard v Welcome to the Installation Wizard for FuelsManager Defense V6 0 The Installation Wizard will install FuelsManager Defense 6 0 on your computer To continue click Next ADMO003GVAE1005 7 FuelsManager Defense Step by Step Insert the Install CD ROM into the CD ROM drive If the CD does not autorun perform the follo
248. k Farm Tank Tank 4 Tank Data dialog Alarm page General Volume Process Data Alarms Vessel Vessel 2 W amp M Strap Water Table Leak Detection Gauge Alarm Tank Gauge Alarm Event Category Default X am sme wer wa tow Cowon voor Level Rate Disabled Disabled Disabled Leak Rate Enabled Leak Data Enabled 34 00 00 6 00 00 2 00 00 0 00 00 EA ETE ooo 000 umen rene pem pem yet A SL 090 os SET Min gt 34 00 00 Max lt 40 00 00 Engr Units ft in 16th Leak Rate Leak Data ADMOOSGVAE 1005 Allows an Enable Disable State and allows the entry of High absolute values The Leak Rate alarm is triggered if the absolute values of the Leak Rate exceed the defined High absolute limits Allows an Enable Disable State This alarm when enabled will alert every day at 12 00 AM to notify the operator that there is not enough valid data or quiet time data from the configured tank to produce a valid Leak Test Report 249 FuelsManager Defense Vessel 1 The Vessel 1 page allows the user to enter additional data about the tank such as its construction material inspection date and dimensional data This data is not used in any calculations and is only presented as informational data on the Leak Test Report The following fields on the Vessel 1 page are important for informational data Tank Volume Tank Height Tank Radius Tank Material Lining Material
249. k when performing tests FuelsManager retrieves the pressure from a device that must be mapped to the Vapor Press P3 process variable Note For more information on Process Variables see the Database and Glossary sections of this manual ADMOOSGVAE 1005 253 FuelsManager Defense 254 Administrator Manual System Update Utility FuelsManager Defense 256 Upgrading versions prior to v4 3 If you are upgrading a system that is currently version 4 0 4 1 or 4 2 of FuelsManager you will need to update the database system to the 6 0 version To do this you need to run the FMSystemUpdate utility If you are upgrading from version 4 3 you do not have to run the FM System Update utility The FuelsManager System Update utility will not update any version before version 4 0 Before Updating Your Database Before running the FuelsManager System Update Utility do the following Update your version of the FuelsManager Defense software to the latest version Shut down FMSystemManager and do not restart it until after you have completed the update Make a backup copy of your existing FMProject database file f you have not already done so copy the FMProject database you want to upgrade into the current FMProject folder Important Copy the FuelsManager act file from your old FuelsManager folder to the new FuelsManager folder If you do not do this the update utility will not be able to update any
250. lae are used for making corrections to liquid level gauges a Float buoyancy correction This is necessary to correct for changes in liquid density between calibration and use The correction is achieved as Ah 1273x10 x 2 2 4 ae OP Where Ah correction to the gauge readout for float buoyancy in mm m mass of float in grams d diameter of float in mm ADMO0O0SGVAE 1005 301 FuelsManager Defense Note When a float gauge is used H is the value after the buoyancy correction has been carried out 302 This correction is only applied to float gauges It does not apply to non contact measurement devices Corrected height measured height Ah b Thermal correction This is necessary to account for the thermal expansion of the tank or stilling well and the gauge wire For a float gauge this will be carried out in addition to the buoyancy correction The correction is Ah aw 15 TV HT H a 15 TV HT H a 15 TL H Where ermal expansion ot the tank or stilling well depends upon the mounting of the gauge When the gauge is mounted on the tank or on the well but this is not rigidly fixed to the tank base the coefficient of the tank is used The well coefficient is only used when the gauge is mounted on the well and this is rigidly fixed to the tank bottom In this case movement of the gauge relative to the bottom of the tank is governed by stilling well expansion and contraction Typical va
251. lay appears in the right hand portion of the Draw toolbar To deactivate the displayed select Show Mouse Coordinates command from the Options menu again Displaying object coordinates Select the Show Object Number command from the Options menu Acoordinate display and Object Number appears in the right hand portion of the Draw toolbar The X displays the horizontal coordinate or X coordinate of the selected object The Y displays the vertical coordinate or Y coordinate of the selected object The H displays the height of the selected object The W displays the width of the selected object ADMO0O0SGVAE 1005 173 FuelsManager Defense Creating user defined colors If the users need additional colors they have the ability to create user defined colors Step by Step graphics Click OK User Defined Colors dialog box User Defined Colors Select User Defined Color 56 63 Select User Defined Colors from the Options menu Awarning message appears that changing user defined colors can affect all The User Defined Colors dialog box appears The dialog box lists the numbers 56 through 63 that are available to the user In the Customized Palette Color box the current color is displayed for the selected number radio button To change the current color the user can create a new color by selecting and moving the red green and blue scroll bars All changes are displa
252. le FileName Path c fmprojectigraphics File cone iso bl BMP Filter Horz bmp Filter ert bmp FM iconv6 b bmp FM OG b bmp FuelsManager_bk bmp ADMOOSGVAE 1005 nal Note FuelsManager includes various Bitmaps that were used to create the predefined Tank Detail and Tank Group displays These are located in the Detail folder and Graphics folder respectively Additional bitmaps can be located in the Templates folder on your FuelsManager CD Note Custom Bitmaps must first be added to your project directory Insert the bitmap in the directory used to store all graphic and symbol files Most configurations store the graphics in the FMProject Graphics subdirectory Select BMP File dialog box 183 FuelsManager Defense Visual Dynamic Tools Edit Dynamic Conditions dialog Edit Dynamic Conditions Description Variable Type Condition Type Es 1 B 3 LJ Cancel a Edit Condition Clear Edits Conditions 3 Entries eq Running then 2 eq Stopped then 1 else then4 The user can use Draw s Dynamic Conditions Attribute Conditions and Object Conditions to update the graphic based on changes in data to appropriately represent site events alarms and other activity Defining a Dynamic Condition Dynamic Conditions define the components of a condition You can add up to 20 codes that represent the conditions that will be represented in the conditional graphic Step by Step
253. level alarm limit Note Selecting the User Defined option also enables the Maximum Operating limit level alarm This alarm functions independently of the High and High High alarms and is intended to give an additional stage of level alarm monitoring This field allows the user to configure the minimum safe level to which the tank can be drained FuelsManager uses this value in the calculation of remaining and available volume s The minimum empty level can be User Defined User can enter any value Low Minimum empty level is the same as the low level alarm limit Low Low Minimum empty level is the same as the low low level alarm limit Note Selecting the User Defined option also enables the Minimum Operating limit level alarm This alarm functions independently of the Low and Low alarms and is intended to give an additional stage of level alarm monitoring This field allows the user to configure the type of automatic tank gauge used by this tank FuelsManager uses this parameter for display only This field allows the user to configure the commands available to the operator for a particular automatic tank gauge For example Raise Lower This field allows the user to configure the mass of the float FuelsManager uses this to compensate the level value reported by the tank gauge Used when LPG volume calculation method is selected This field allows the user to configure the density of the float FuelsManager uses
254. limits Scale limits can be defined for all point types They are only available for numeric process variables such as level temperature volume density standard density mass and flow Scale limits are defined for a couple of reasons One they define the ranges used for bar graphs and trend plots Second they define the ranges used by Operator Commands Inside the Operate Command dialog box is a scroll bar that is used to manually set a new value Scale limits determine the minimum and maximum values of the scroll bar Data source Each point must be assigned a data source As the name implies the data source defines how data is received in order to update the point s current value Input points are assigned one source the source of incoming data Output points are assigned two sources one for the source of incoming data and the other for the output destination Each process variable in a Tank point is assigned a source The available source selections include the following Select Data Source Water Volume Source Type Selection Current Type Calculated Clear Manual Comm Bitfield Properties Start Bit Number of Bits Start Data Source Bit Data Type Translation None v Source Units Undefined US Data Source System Device Point Description Administrator Manual Point attributes Manual input The Manual data source is used when the operator needs to change the value manually This task is
255. lines For example if you enter 5 in the Major Div field every fifth vertical and horizontal line will appear as a major division line Grid Clicking Grid opens the Select Operation dialog box so you can select which system color you want to use for the basic grid lines Major Clicking Major opens the Select Operation dialog box so you can select which system color you want to use for the major Division lines Center Clicking Center opens the Select Operation dialog box so you can select which System color you want to use for the horizontal and vertical center lines Show appends FuelsManager buttons Appends can be created as invisible buttons In this manner they can be placed behind bitmaps or symbols representing tank objects or field devices The user appears to be clicking on the graphical object but in fact is clicking on the invisible button In Draw it is possible to show these invisible buttons by choosing the Show Appends command from the Options menu When you select this option all created buttons in the current file are automatically displayed A check mark appears beside the option To deactivate select the option to erase the check mark Displaying mouse coordinates This option is helpful in sizing objects equally or aligning objects The X and Y coordinates displayed change as you move the cursor in the Drawing Space Step by Step Select the Show Mouse Coordinates command from the Options menu A coordinate disp
256. lly enters this variable however the variable can be linked to automatic gauging systems if required SOLIDS LEVEL TIME SOLIDS LEVEL TIME This process variable is the last time that the tank solids level was updated This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified FLOW TANK INPUT OUPUT FLOW This process variable is the flow of product into or out of the tank FuelsManager normally calculates this sampling the gross volume at user defined intervals and averaging the change in volume over a user defined number of samples However this value can also be measured by automatic tank gauging systems or manually entered by the operator FLOW TIME TIME OF LAST FLOW UPDATE This process variable is the last time that the tank flow was updated This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified WATER VOLUME WATER BOTTOM VOLUME This process variable is the volume of water in the tank FuelsManager normally calculates this from the water level value and the tank strapping table however the value can also be measured by automatic tank gauging systems or manually entered by the operator GAUGE POSITION LEVEL GAUGE POSITION This process variable is the current position of the tank level gauge measuring head This variable is only applicable to servo type tank gauges where the measuring device can be positioned at points in the tank other than the product level This variable is us
257. lor amp Background Box display changes when you choose transparent Setting the default background color Step by Step From the Attributes menu select Background Color to display the Set Default Background Color dialog box Selecting Palette from the Set Default Background Color dialog box displays all the colors available for the background color Notice the change in color in the Text Color amp Background Box Setting the default pen attributes Step by Step From the Attributes menu select Pen Attributes Assign a palette color Select a line type invisible dashed or dotted Change the line width The change is displayed in the Pen amp Brush Box ADMO0O0SGVAE 1005 171 FuelsManager Defense 172 Grid Spacing dialog box Setting the default brush attributes Step by Step From the Attributes menu select Brush Attributes The brush may be any available palette color or may be hollow to allow objects with just a border n addition the brush may be hatched horizontal vertical or diagonal or patterned The change is displayed in the Pen amp Brush Box Display grid The Display Grid enables the user to display a grid to position objects on the display screen The appearance of the grid is controlled from the Grid Spacing dialog box Step by Step From the Options menu select the Display Grid command The Grid Spacing dialog box appears Grid Spacing Save Options on Exit
258. lsManager Defense Clearing data SOUrGe d e etre eee PR eirca 133 Selecting a Manual data source ssssssssseeeee 133 Selecting a Comm data source sssssssssseeeeeen 134 Selecting an OPC data source sssssssssssseeeeeene 135 Selecting a Local data source sssssssssssss ee 135 Engineering Units Conversion scooters conde 136 Configuring translation tables 137 LOOKUP Tables x eto e ER ae dades 137 Numeric to NUM e a etae eed rt i e tees 137 Coded Variable to Numeric sssssssseeeeeeneeneenene 137 Scaling FUNCIONS iia 139 Configuring bit field data sources sssssssssssmmRe 140 Importing and exporting points 142 Import Export Data Type dialog box sssssse conan 142 o Importa pontiac altiro dalla 143 To exporta pointile ui a e pa diel eed t one ds 143 Copying and renaming points sssssss RH 144 Point Copy Rename dialog box ssssssss eee 145 Communications 2 LES be e MR ARR gh e a 147 Communications interface configuration ssssse 148 Creating a New nte facial enr adici etes des D etra 149 Local serial port and Dial up modem sssssss ee 150 LAT Terminal Server Port ssssssssssseeeeeeeeeeeenenns 150 Communications port configuration ninia canaria rara 150 Locked interfaces and devibes urit ttt crt peti ob cra 151 Device Contigua ias 151 O Pointcornectiensa s e E Aic Dd Rd
259. lso be measured by automatic tank gauging systems or manually entered by the operator LEVEL RATE TIME LEVEL RATE TIME This process variable is the last time that the tank level change rate was updated This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified GAUGE COMMAND LEVEL GAUGE COMMAND This process variable is used to issue commands to automatic tank gauges the possible values depend in the tank gauge modifier configured for the tank This variable is normally entered by the operator but can be linked to automatic tank gauging systems to allow remote commands to the tank gauges GAUGE STATUS LEVEL GAUGE STATUS This process variable represents the status of the automatic tank gauge In order to use this variable the gauge status variable must be linked to the status information data in the tank gauge Possible statuses depend on the tank gauge in use This variable is normally linked to automatic tank gauging systems but can be entered by the operator if required GAUGE ALARMS GAUGE ALARM FLAGS This process variable represents the alarms present in the automatic tank gauge In order to use this variable the gauge alarms variable must be linked to the alarms information data in the tank gauge This variable is normally linked to automatic tank gauging systems but can be entered by the operator if required Possible alarm values depend on the tank gauge in use and can be configured by the user the default gau
260. lues of thermal expansion coefficients are The corrected level HC is given by HC H AH AH Administrator Manual LPG quantity calculation from liquid density Step 5 Xd cometen of corrected liquid level to liquid volume is carried out using stored values of key level volume data points for the tank with Lagrange cubic interpolation between The calculation for liquid value VL is defined in Spherical Tanks in the Strap Table Volume section earlier in this chapter For the LPG calculation method the corrected level value HC is used in the conversion of level to liquid volume Step 6 Liquid volume needs to be corrected for the thermal expansion of the tank shell The nature of the correction depends upon the type of tank Thermal correction C F a T TL 15 Where aT coefficient of thermal expansion of tank C For a vertical cylinder F 2 for a horizontal cylinder F 1 2 A sin A A sin A cos A where HC liquid depth corrected R cylinder radius 1 EC oe A cos R for a sphere F HC R HC r HC3 3 where H liquid depth R cylinder radius A pressure correction should be applied This will take into account the vapor space pressure and the hydrostatic head of liquid The average pressure throughout the sphere is assumed to be one half the total liquid level converted to a pressure plus the vapor space pressure The linear stress is then calculated and this used with Youngs
261. lume US Gal 150 000 00 ADMO03GVAE1005 315 FuelsManager Defense Calculated or Derived Data Total Observed Volume Water Volume Solids Volume Correction for Temperature of Shell Floating Roof Adjustment Gross Observed Volume Correction for Product Temperature Correction for BS8W Net Standard Volume 9 Available Product Gross Available Product Net Remaining Product Gross Remaining Product Net 316 Symbol Action TOV H20VOL subtract SOLVOL subtract CTSh FRA GOV VCF multiply subtract multiply BS amp W multiply NSV Notes 1 Values Reported rounded 435 218 32 189 35 34 12 434 994 85 1 00016 435 066 22 86 61765 434 979 60 0 99230 1 00000 431 630 26 285 265 11 283 068 57 414 849 73 411 655 39 Units US Gals US Gals US Gals US Gals US Gals US Gals US Gals US Gals Values used in calculations unrounded 434 994 8500000000 1 0001640643225 435066 2171353560 86 61764706 434 979 5994882970 431630 2565722380 Quantity derived from tank strapping table using level value to enter table Administrator Manual Typical Tank Calculation 2 Quantity derived from tank strapping table or separate water table using water level value to enter table 3 Quantity derived from tank strapping table using solids level value to enter table 4 Gross volume uncorrected for temperature effec
262. lves only building the alarm limits Templates can be used to construct a local alarm for a numerical database point Step by Step From the steps above with the Alarm Assignments dialog box open select the option Local Alarm to create a local alarm To create or edit the conditions of the alarm click Edit The Define Alarm Process dialog box appears Type in a test condition by entering the Test Type the Test Value and the Result or use the Build feature In the Pri edit box type in a priority 0 Lowest through 3 Highest Enter the attributes such as Use Hysteresis and Reset Holdoff value The attributes have the functionality and purpose as defined in the Defined Global Alarm dialog box Click Add to enter the test condition into the condition list Repeat the build and add process until all alarm test conditions have been added Click OK when all test conditions are entered Administrator Manual Alarms Alarm limit enable This list box displays the codes of each alarm test This box allows the user to disable and enable individual alarm tests Once the alarm tests have been created they appear in the Alarm Limit Enable list box Alarm template Alarm Templates apply only to Local alarms and can only be created for numerical database point values Once an alarm template has been selected its attributes are copied to the new local alarm Step by Step From the steps above with the Alarm Assignments dialo
263. m Name Description Define Global Alarms dialog box Analog Alarm Data Format Select Undefined Edit Test Condition Template for Standard Analog Global Process Type Global Definition Template Alarm Reset Holdoff IV Use Hysterisis Reset Holdoff 0 00 Display Style Decimal ej Help C C Cancel The Tank Gauge Tank Digital and Tank Mode Global Alarms are tied to Tank points Tank points have predefined alarms meaning the user does not have to build the alarm process The user only has to enable the alarm and enter a value Note that in the above dialog box if the predefined tank gauge alarm doesn t match the need of your system a new global alarm can be defined and associated with the relevant tank point You can use these Global Alarms as a reference for building other alarms The RTU Comm and RTU Status global alarms are tied to the RTU connected to your system DATA FORMAT USE HYSTERESIS RESET HOLDOFF ADMOOSGVAE 1005 Define Global Alarm dialog box This parameter defines the type of data value this alarm can be applied to Values Word Float Double Coded etc This checkbox is used to determine when the alarm can change status It is helpful for values such as level and temperature that may fluctuate by small amounts around the alarm limit thereby causing the alarm to activate again and again This field is used to enter in a value for the hysteresis to
264. m gories amp Administrator Administrator Properties PS amp Sizemore Administrator ts 21 NewUser1 Close t The security dialog box Action menu ADMO003GVAE1005 39 FuelsManager Defense Note The properties that are defined within the FuelsManager program are not linked to any of the user information defined in the system Refer to your Windows documentation for further instruction Note When a new group is created the permissions default to Operator group rights Note The groups within FuelsManager are Not linked to the groups in Windows XP or 2000 40 Defining User Properties Further details for each individual user can be added through the Properties dialog This allows the entry of the user s full name and other details to help describe the user Creating and Editing User Groups Creating Deleting or Renaming a Group Once a group has been created users permissions alarms and tags can be modified for the group along with deleting and renaming the group In this example we will Rename a Group but you can also follow the instructions to Create or Delete a Group Administrator Manual Users and Groups The security dialog box can be used to create Actions View Wam delete or rename Security Group Security settings Li Categories a dis 3 Administrator E perator NewG Administrator a am NewGroup1 amp Users fei Audit Addi
265. m the Operate interface but cannot be modified VOLUME MININIUM TANK MINIMUM VOLUME SCALING This variable is the minimum range for all tank volume process variables This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified ADMO0O0SGVAE1005 361 FuelsManager Defense Scaling and Engineering Units Data VOLUME MAXIMIUM TANK MAXIMUM VOLUME SCALING This variable is the maximum range for all tank volume process variables This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified VOLUME UNITS VOLUME ENGINEERING UNITS This variable is the engineering units for all tank volume process variables This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified MASS MININIUM TANK MINIMUM MASS SCALING This variable is the minimum range for all tank mass process variables This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified MASS MAXIMIUM TANK MAXIMUM MASS SCALING This variable is the maximum range for all tank mass process variables This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified MASS UNITS MASS ENGINEERING UNITS This variable is the engineering units for all tank mass process variables This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified DENSITY MININIUM TANK MINIMUM DENSITY SCALING This variable is the minimum range for the tank observed density process variable This variable ca
266. mn totals of each numerical point variable The default setting is no totals If one or both of the table Sorting Grouping buttons are chosen the user has the option of displaying the total for each product or database system If a total option is selected three rows appear in the table If the No Column Totals option is selected only two rows appear in the table Creating a table in a summary report Note The Select Database Since a Summary report is of a spreadsheet format only one table is required System dialog box appears upon exiting the Summary Setup dialog box if databases were not selected After the database or databases are selected the user is automatically placed in table creation mode Table Format dialog Tabular Format x box Enter required number of rows and columns Rows 2 Columns 8 1 40 2 19 Cell Width inches Gell Height inches v Auto Sizing w m ROWS Either a 2 or 3 appears for a Summary report The first row is reserved for labels the second for values and the optional third for column totals This number can only be changed in the Summary Report Setup dialog box ADMOOSGVAE 1005 203 FuelsManager Defense 204 Label Attributes dialog box COLUMNS The user can type the number of columns with a maximum of 19 The table appears from margin to margin if the autosizing option is selected This option was also defined in the Summary Repor
267. mpt the user if the graphic is not in the Graphic Index You must use the Master menu to add graphics to the index 194 Using Do Selected command Step by Step Click the Do Selected command A dialog box appears asking you to confirm your request to compile all selected files Click OK to proceed with the compilation of the files you have selected Using Make command Step by Step Click Make command A dialog box appears asking you to confirm your request to compile all altered files Click OK This option generates all files that have changed since last generated This option is useful if you are unsure of which files have been modified Using Build All command Step by Step The Build All option is useful for either initial project development or if the system database has been modified System database modification often requires re verification of database references Click Build All A dialog box appears asking you to confirm your request to compile all files Click OK This option unconditionally compiles all files for a project even if they have not changed since the last generation Viewing file groups The Master menu provides the user ability to view all created graphics symbols and conditions From each menu option the contents can be deleted and the name can be changed These indexes are described below The graphic index The Graphic Index defines all of the generated gra
268. must be created with tools supplied with the Microsoft Software Development Kit SDK or from other vendors Operate displays these files by calling the Windows Help program Winhelp exe All features of the Windows Help system may be included in the user defined HLP file If you enter a number in the Context text box the help file will be called with the designated context number This context number must be defined in the MAPS section of the project file for the HLP file Using context numbers allows a single help HLP file for an entire project with different topics assigned unique context numbers If the context number is zero the help file will be called to display the top level Contents page of the help file Refer to your help development system documentation for details on creating a Windows Help file Help Files Configuration dialog box Graphic Files can be added edited deleted or replaced using the action buttons in the Help Files Configuration dialog box Help Files Configuration dialog box Help Files Configuration Edit Name Strings Windows Format Context Names Format Context Number None gt Graphics Standard 00000 Products Standard 00000 Strings Standard 00000 ADM003GVAE1005 65 FuelsManager Defense Adding a help file Step by Step From the Resources menu in the Configuration dialog box select the Help File Names command the Help Files Configuration dialog box appears
269. n be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified DENSITY MAXIMIUM TANK MAXIMUM DENSITY SCALING This variable is the maximum range for the tank observed density process variable This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified DENSITY UNITS DENSITY ENGINEERING UNITS This variable is the engineering units for the tank observed density process variable This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified DENSITY STD MININIUM TANK MINIMUM STD DENSITY SCALING This variable is the minimum range for the tank corrected density process variable This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified DENSITY STD MAXIMIUM TANK MAXIMIUM STD DENSITY SCALING This variable is the maximum range for the tank corrected density process variable This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified STD DENSITY UNITS STANDARD DENSITY UNITS This variable is the engineering units for the tank corrected density process variable This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified 362 Administrator Manual Scaling and engineering units data Scaling and Engineering Units Data FLOW MININIUM TANK MINIMUM FLOW SCALING This variable is the minimum range for the tank flow process variable This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified FLOW MAXIMIUM TANK MAXIMUM FL
270. n configuring the tank point and cannot be modified from Operate MOVEMENT HOLDOFF MOVEMENT HOLDOFF TIME This variable is the amount of time in seconds by which the level or Net Std volume must exceed the Movement alarm high limit before an alarm is activated This variable is entered when configuring the tank point but can be modified from Operate by a user with sufficient privileges REVERSE FLOW ALARM This variable is used to detect product movements in the opposite direction to the selected tank command mode If the tank command mode is Filling and the level falls then a Reverse Flow Alarm is activated REVERSE FLOW HOLDOFF REVERSE FLOW HOLDOFF TIME This variable is the amount of time in seconds by which the reverse flow condition must exist before an alarm is activated This variable is entered when configuring the tank point but can be modified from Operate by a user with sufficient privileges NO FLOW ALARM This variable is used to detect that product movement has stopped unexpectedly If the tank command mode is Filling or Emptying and the flow value is zero then a No Flow Alarm is activated NO FLOW HOLDOFF NO FLOW HOLDOFF TIME This variable is the amount of time in minutes by which the no flow condition must exist before an alarm is activated This variable is entered when configuring the tank point but can be modified from Operate by a user with sufficient privileges TEST MODE ALARM This variable is
271. n dialog box once all devices have been defined ADMO03GVAE1005 151 FuelsManager Defense RTU8130 Interface Configuration dialog box I O Point Connections dialog box 152 8130 RTU Interface Configuration System Name SIZEMORE Delays Port Between Polls Port 1 COM1 0 3 Seconds Port 2 UNASSIGNED Configured RTUS Name Address Configuration NewRTU Run VIEVWRTU l O Point connections I O point connections designate the link between the DataManager database point and the field device Each device has its own set of predefined CommManager I O points depending on that device type For data to pass between the CommManager and the FMDataManager the CommManager l O points must be connected to FMDataManager point variables One or more databases can be interconnected with the CommManager over a network I O Point Connections 8130 RTU Device g xj System Name y ACH Interface Desc Example Interface RTU Name New Device gt Type Number Parameter InputiOuput Description Source Database i Point ID Variable RTU Communication Status Internal Comm Status RTU System Status Internal RTU Status Int i 1 CLK 00 SysTime Internal System Time RTU i t CLK 00timezone Internal System Time RTU i I 10 00 0Status1 Input VO Configuration RTU i 10 00 IOStatus2 Input VO Configuration RTU i i 1O 00 lOStatusa Input VO Configuration RTU i
272. n meters sec at the tank s specific location used in Hydrostatic Hybrid calculations ELEVATION Defines the elevation above sea level at the tank s specific location used in Hydrostatic Hybrid calculations LATITUDE Defines the Latitude in deg mins sec of the tank s specific location used in Hydrostatic Hybrid calculations LEVEL OFFSET Defines the offset value to be applied to the level calculations as part of the Hydrostatic calculations MAXIMUM FILL This parameter defines the maximum safe level to which the tank can be filled see Level Maximum Fill FuelsManager uses this value in the calculation of remaining and available volume s The maximum fill level can be User Defined user can enter any value High maximum fill level is the same as the high level alarm limi High High maximum fill level is the same as the high high level alarm limit Note Selecting the User Defined option also enables the Maximum Operating limit level alarm This alarm functions independently of the High and High High alarms and is intended to give an additional stage of level alarm monitoring MINIMUM EMPTY This parameter defines the minimum safe level to which the tank can be drained see Level Minimum Empty FuelsManager uses this value in the calculation of remaining and available volume s The minimum empty level can be User Defined user can enter any value Low minimum empty level is the same as the low level alarm limit
273. n the same setpoint A database point requiring a unique alarm configuration Local alarms are on the spot configurations Configuring alarms The Database menu in the FuelsManager Configuration application can be used to configure alarms Alarm Templates and Global Alarms are created and edited using the Alarms menu option Your system contains several predefined Alarm Templates and Global Alarms which are listed below These alarms cannot be removed from FuelsManager Alarm ANALOG ALARM LEAK ALARM RTU COMMUNICATION RTU STATUS TANK DIGITAL TANK GAUGE TANK MODE ALARM Description Alarm Template Contents include the High High High Low Low Low Advisory High and Advisory Low alarm limits Alarm Template Contents include High amp Low alarm limits for use with the optional Leak Detection feature Global Alarm Contents include port one communications error port two communications error communications are off line or there is complete failure in communications Global Alarm Contents include verifying the database is not empty and the RTU is programmed Global Alarm Contents include scan failure gauge failure and overfill error alarms Global Alarm Contents include database configuration error tank calculation error and strapping error alarms Global Alarm Contents include a movement reverse flow and no flow alarms Administrator Manual Alarms Define Global Alarm Alar
274. n types define the standard temperature for these types this field is for display only KO K5 These parameters are only visible when the correction type polynomial is selected these parameters define the constants to be used in the polynomial calculation ALPHA This parameter is available when an American Petroleum Institute table of type C table 54C or table 6C or a Japan Chemical table is selected This parameter defines the thermal co efficient of expansion to be used in the volume correction method VCF ROUNDING This parameter is only available when a Japanese correction type is selected The rounding options are None 0 0001 and 0 000001 and are applied to the Volume Correction Factor before all calculations are performed LEVEL ROUNDING This parameter is only available when a Japanese correction type is selected The rounding options are None and Nearest Integer Level rounding is applied to the product level before performing each volume calculation TEMPERATURE ROUNDING This parameter is only available when a Japanese correction type is selected The rounding options are None 0 25 and 0 5 Temperature rounding is applied to the product temperature before performing each volume calculation WATER SUBTRACTION This parameter is only available when a Japanese correction type is selected The water subtraction options are None Gross Volume and Net Volume This parameter defines the method of Water Volume compensation Wat
275. nd High High alarms and is intended to give an additional stage of level alarm monitoring LANDED This field allows configuration of the height at which the HEIGHT floating roof is fully landed on it legs FuelsManager only uses this parameter if the list item Roof Mass not in Strap is selected otherwise this parameter is ignored ADMO03GVAE1005 Note For more details on using Hydrostatic or Hybrid tank calculations see the Calculation Methods chapter 119 FuelsManager Defense 120 FLOATING HEIGHT ROOF MASS ROOF TYPE TANK GEOMETRY TANK VOLUME TANK HEIGHT TANK RADIUS This field allows the user to configure the height at which the floating roof is fully floating on the product FuelsManager only uses this parameter if the list item Roof Mass not in Strap is selected otherwise this parameter is ignored This field allows the user to configure the weight of the floating roof This value is used together with the Roof Type selection and the current density and strapping density values to calculate the volumetric effect of the floating roof This field allows the user to configure the type of floating roof possible values are No Tank Roof No floating roof correction Fixed Roof No floating roof correction Roof Mass in Strap Roof mass is accounted for in the tank strapping table Roof Mass not in Strap Roof mass has not been included in the tank strapping table Kaiji Kentei Kyyokai S
276. nd Temperature are left unassigned This means that you will have to assign data sources for level and temperature but will not have to modify all the data sources for the tank point ADMOOSGVAE 1005 113 FuelsManager Defense Note In addition to the Level alarms defined on the Edit Tank Data Alarms tab FuelsManager supports a Minimum and Maximum Operating level alarm Selecting the User Defined option for the Minimum and Maximum fill parameter on the Edit Tank Data Vessel tab enables these alarms Edit Tank Data dialog box Alarms tab 114 Alarm information Step by Step Click the Gauge Alarm button to set a Global Alarm Definition to be used for the tank point Global Alarm Definitions dialog box appears In the Global Alarm Definitions dialog box either select an existing alarm definition or click New to create a new alarm definition Typically the required alarm definitions have already been created see Building an Alarm Process for more information n the Edit Tank Data dialog box enter the required alarm setpoints for the tank point Edit Tank Data gt WSIZEMORE TankFarm Tank 4 Tank General Volume Process Data Alarms Vessel 1 Vessel 2 W amp M Strap Water Table Leak Detection Gauge Alarm Tank Gauge Alam Event Category Default Y High High High Low Low Low modom 34 00 00 6 00 00 2 0000 0 04 13 Temperature Density Flo
277. nfigured to use a middle pressure instrument or not If the middle pressure is used AH Hm Hb If the middle pressure is notused AH 0 For hydrostatic calculations it is also necessary to calculate the level value from the measured pressures ADMO03GVAE1005 313 FuelsManager Defense P P L Level H al x H Hy m Where Hp corrected height of the bottom pressure instrument Hq corrected height of the middle pressure instrument Py Bottom Pressure P Top Pressure Pm Middle Pressure In addition FuelsManager provides for the configuration of a level offset to allow the user to calibrate the hydrostatically measured level this is called the Level Offset The find level is calculated as follow Level Log Ln Where Log Level Offset 314 Administrator Manual Typical Tank Calculation Typical Tank Calculation Analytical and Measured Data Level ft in 16 12 3 12 Water Level ft in 16 0 9 5 Solids Level ft in 16 0 1 3 BS amp W 0 Product Temperature F 75 6 Product Density lbs US Gal 6 8 Density Temperature F 70 8 Standard Density 5 lbs US Gal 6 84 Ambient Temperature F 56 2 Tank Point Configuration Parameters Volume Correction Method API F Table 6B 5B Floating Roof Type Roof Mass Not in Strap Roof Mass Ibs 589 Tank Shell Material Mild Steel Coeff of Expansion 1 24 x 10 Tank Insulated No Maximum Fill Volume US Gal 850 000 00 Minimum Empty Vo
278. ng Options 5 oe Re b RR eM te ds 4 Professional EdITOFI 44 AL o M MR e LAM os 4 Standard Edit s erre ete ote eat bet e datei ea oir ier reb Rd 4 ECITIOMIFGATULES ha datar 4 Installing the hardware key nono ociciocccconorccnnn eem 6 Installing FuelsManager ssssss mme 7 Installing USB hardware key ssssssssss emen 9 Uninstalling FuelsManagger ssssss Hmmm 9 Modifying Installation Pre daana 9 Upgrading from FuelsManager 4 3 ssssss nro non o rcconnonnnn 10 Regenerating user Graphics and Symbols sssssssssss 10 Regeneratirig reports aliaron e dp et Spans 11 Regenerating Tank Details and other graphic files nn 11 Networking reete idad 13 Network Installation ous 2 i ripetere io jS 13 Printets cierre patadas 15 Using a Networks Print sia o eee Rr D CON D sd nds 15 St rtup O omo fantl es a entd 16 Stopping F elsMAnagel acte ada 17 Additional Configuration ssssssssH eem 18 Introduction to FuelsManager Defense 19 What is FuelsManager software sssssss crio ronca 20 Real Time Database scite rm treo rte to tnde aM Euro etica tutes 21 Volume Calculations Lua tec tete e eere ete e Pc e e FEE Cet 21 Multiple Users ascertain 21 Multiple Databases unirte 21 OnLine Configura dial 21 Alaris ia tr a eb reete b e dus 21 Events And Event Logging eee eee e 22 TRONS suisse rn E ERR Oe EE vt a tetto d m Lg ds 22
279. ng Roof Tank Net volume of Shin Nihon Kentei Kyoukai 1 Japanese authorization organization uses the following equation sx innu ee 1 1 BS amp W NSV 4 TOV FW xCTSh xFRA jx VCFx 1 B f a aa sc xvcrx 400 Where NSV Net Standard Volume TOV Strap Volume at the current tank level FW Free Water CTSh Tank Shell Correction p15 Product Density BSG Strap Density Administrator Manual Traditional tank calculations NSV Net Standard Volume VCF Volume Correction Factor BS Percentage of bottoms sediment and water impurities W FRA Floating Roof Adjustment Shin Nihon Kentei Kyoukai 2 Floating Roof Tank Net volume of Shin Nihon Kentei Kyoukai 2 Japanese authorization organization uses the following equation NSV TOV FW xCTSh x VCF x 1 0 BS amp Whoo Gs Ds FRA Where NSV _ Net Standard Volume TOV Strap Volume at the current tank level FW Free Water CTSh _ Tank Shell Correction p15 Product Density BSG Strap Density VCF Volume Correction Factor BSW Percentage of bottoms sediment and water impurities FRA Floating Roof Adjustment Shin Nihon Kentei Kyoukai 3 Floating Roof Tank Net volume of Shin Nihon Kentei Kyoukai3 Japanese authorization organization uses the following equation It does not apply the roof correction to the net volume calculation NSV TOV FW x CTSh x VCF x 1 0 BS amp W 100 Where NSV Net S
280. ng Users to a Group A user Can be added to a group once the group exists A user does not have Note The user can only belong to already exist under the Users option in order to be added to a group When the one group user is added to a group the user name will automatically by added to the list under Users ADMO003GVAE1005 41 FuelsManager Defense 42 Access Alarm and Tag Selection In this example we will Assign alarm categories to a Group but you can also follow the instructions to Assign Tag categories to a Group Step By Step Click on the next to the Groups icon to expand the tree structure Click on the next to the group name under the Groups icon Click on the next to Access under the group name Click on the Alarm icon under the Access expanded tree structure In the right side window click in the check box next to the alarm categories that the group will have access to A check next to the alarm name indicates that there is access to the alarm If there is not a check mark next to the alarm the group will not have any access to the alarm Close the Security dialog box Permissions System and Tag Permissions In this example we will modify the System permissions for a Group but you can also follow these steps to modify Tag permissions for a Group Step By Step Click on the next to the Groups icon to expand the tree structure Click on the next to the group name under the Groups icon Click on
281. ng commands Refer to the Operate chapter for more information Administrator Manual FuelsManager Applications Draw Graphics are color graphic images that show the dynamic status of the system The Draw application lets users create new graphics and symbols or edit existing graphics and symbols for use with the The Operate program Your FuelsManager system package contains several predefined graphics used to monitor and control the facility FuelsManager includes a program called Draw With Draw users can create and modify graphics When opened in the Operate program these graphics display the real time data of the selected points Refer to the Using the Draw application chapter for more information ree ates slg n S Report FuelsManager provides the Report program which controls all printing functions The Report program lets users define new reports or edit existing reports that display real time values or events Reports may be configured to print on demand at a specific time or periodically In the Operate program the user can view print and save these on screen reports Your FuelsManager package may contain several predefined reports Refer to the Report chapter for more information ADMOOSGVAE 1005 The Draw application toolbar 29 FuelsManager Defense 30 System Name selection Select FuelsManager System dialog Selecting remote FuelsManager systems The FuelsManager inte
282. ng the user to either make a copy of the selected point or rename the selected point The Delete button deletes the selected point The Export button opens the Import Export Data Type dialog box allowing the user to select which particular data is to be exported to a CSV formatted file The Import button opens the Import Export Data Type dialog box allowing the user to select which particular data is to be import from a CSV formatted file 95 FuelsManager Defense 96 DIALOG BOX The title of the dialog box displays the Current Database TITLE System to which the point will be added LEVEL 2 1 0 The Level 2 Level 1 and Level 1 fields allow the user to enter the database tagname for the point to be created Levels 2 or 1 will default to the database level already selected in the Database Edit dialog box if any Note The example dialog box shows a three level database an alternate dialog box exists for four level databases For databases with less than three levels the Level 2 or Level 1 fields will be disabled Administrator Manual Creating input and output points Creating input and output points An Input Point contains data received from field equipment database calculations or another FuelsManager database Both types of points require an input source but the user only selects an output destination for the Output point Note You must first select a point format before the other attributes Step by
283. ning a leak test and creating a leak report is accessed via the Operator user interface and is documented in the User Guide for the Operate program Leak Detection interfaces directly to FuelsManager s Archive database reading data from ArchiveManager s database file applying filtering algorithms calculating various statistics applying qualifying logic and writing the results of the calculations to FuelsManager database points Alarm Processes running within DataManager can monitor the resultant calculations Any data source can serve as the source of data for Leak Detection s calculations This includes data manually entered data calculated by DataManager or an Application DLL or data received via CommManager or an OPC server FuelsManager Leak Detection feature is able to detect a leak at rates as low as 0 2 gallons per hour The ability to detect leaks at these rates depends upon the physical characteristics of the tank size shape above below ground materials used in construction etc the types of instruments available to measure the properties of the product in the tank the resolution amp stability of the instruments and how the tank is used Leak Detection has two basic methods for detecting tank leaks Volumetric Mass Volumetric Analysis Volumetric leak detection involves measuring the level and temperature calculating the Net Standard Volume analyzing the tank data during periods of inactivity and searching for los
284. nstalled a new interface can be created Step by Step From the Configuration application Communications menu select the Configuration command From the Communication Interface Configuration dialog box select New The Choose The Type of Device dialog box appears Select the type of device you want to create Only devices with the drivers already installed will appear for selection Click OK The Port Type dialog box appears Select the port type that the device is connected to Local Serial Port LAT Terminal Server Port or Dial Up Modem The port type selected will determine what dialog box will appear next and the available settings Edit the port configuration necessary for the device you are creating Select OK once the device has been configured The Communication Interface Configuration screen will appear with the recently created configuration listed Communication Communication Interface Maintenance Interface Configuration dialog box System Name NSIZEMORE Select System Run Mode ACTIVE interface Status Interface Description Interface Type Port Status INTERFACE 004 Modbus Master UNASSIGNED STANDBY INTERFACE 005 Varec 8130 RTU COMI STANDBY Change Interface Mode Open Maintenance Dialog ie p smebeg Done Help ADMOOSGVAE 1005 149 FuelsManager Defense 150 Left Choose the type of device Right Select the port type Communication Port Configuration dialog box Choos
285. nt is 10 and the temperature alarm holdoff is 1 the temperature must return to a value of 9 before the High temperature alarm is deactivated This variable is entered when configuring the tank point and cannot be modified from Operate DENSITY ALARM COMPOSITE DENISTY ALARM This variable is a composite value that displays a coded variable representing the highest priority density alarms for the tank Possible values are Normal High or Low FuelsManager calculates this alarm based on the current density and the alarms limit configured for the tank point DENSITY HIGH LIMIT CURRENT HIGH DENSITY LIMIT This variable is the limit for a High density alarm If the tank density exceeds the High Alarm value then a High alarm is activated This variable is entered when configuring the tank point but can be modified from Operate by a user with sufficient privileges DENSITY LOW LIMIT CURRENT LOW DENSITY LIMIT This variable is the limit for a Low density alarm If the tank density falls below the Low Alarm value then a Low alarm is activated This variable is entered when configuring the tank point but can be modified from Operate by a user with sufficient privileges DENSITY ALARM HOLDOFF This variable is the sometimes known as deadband or hysteresis It is the amount by which the alarm limit must be cleared before the alarm is deactivated For example if the High density alarm setpoint is 10 and the density alarm holdoff is 1 the density must
286. nts that have not already been selected as nodes ADMOOSGVAE 1005 231 FuelsManager Defense Tanks dialog for Movements Note Each node name must be unique for the selected default node name based on the point name level In the example given all level O points are named Tankpoint this would NOT result in a unique node name a better tank point name level selection would be Level 1 Note Each Node name must be unique Node Name dialog 232 Tanks Default Node Mame Based on Point Name Level b TankFarm Tank 18 Tank TankFarm Tank 19 Tank TankFarm Tank 20 Tank Select the database level on which the node name will be based from the Default Node Name Based on Point Name Level selection Select one or more database points and click Select Use the Ctrl or Shift key to select multiple nodes The system returns you to the Nodes dialog box Click Save The system saves the nodes you added Click Close The system returns you to the Movement dialog box Adding a Unit Node From the Movements dialog box click Nodes The Nodes dialog box appears This dialog lists all the nodes available for selection The defined nodes are listed by name and type From this dialog box you can add delete or modify nodes in the movement system Click Add The Node Type dialog box appears Select Unit the Unit can be any Destination or Source node such as a pier barge or pipeline Click OK The Node N
287. numerical or non numerical point value for event processing as well as the advisory option that notifies an Operator of a change At the bottom of the dialog box a section specifically for enabling Events is displayed The user can type in a deadband value to compare to the current value If the numerical point value changes by that amount it will be recorded as an event This capability also applies to non numerical values For example if a database point value changes from On to Off it will be recorded as an event Selecting the Advise on Event option causes a message box to be displayed Build An alarm process The test condition specifies the test limits to be performed on a point s value An Alarm Definition may be assigned to each database point with up to 16 alarm tests to be performed on the associated database value Four parameters must be defined for the test condition whether the user types in the test condition or uses the Build button for a semi automated process Build Alarm Limit Test Type Select Limit Test Type Test Value Select Limit Value Result Code Select Limit Result Value Help Cancel OK Administrator Manual Alarms Alarm Test Parameter TEST TYPE Type of comparison to be performed TEST VALUE Comparison Value Same format as database variable RESULT Alarm Result if Comparison is True Stored as a coded variable PRIORITY Alarm Priority 0 3 for logging audible alarms and s
288. o be available in the Operate program they must be placed in the FMProjectReports Historical Folder Historical reports run against the FuelsManager Archive database see Archiving Information section If the necessary data has not been archived the report will be incomplete For example running a last full month report before the archive database has accumulated a month or more of data will result in an incomplete report All the default FuelsManager historical reports access the archived information through an ODBC data source called Historical Reports This data source must point to the FuelsManager archive database This can be confirmed and if necessary edited with the Windows Administrative Tools Data Sources ODBC applet Administrator Manual Configuring Product Movement FuelsManager Defense Note Movement is only available with the FuelsManager Professional edition 220 The Movement System lets you setup and monitor Product Movements and produces archive information on the Movement A Movement involves transferring product from one or more Sources to one or more Destinations The FuelsManager Product Movement system is divided into two parts the definition of possible movement paths creating a movement and the operation of the actual product movement operating a movement instance The creation of possible movement paths is performed from the Configuration program and documented in this secti
289. o interact with the facility during run time is provided in the user manual When and if other database components need to be edited or changed refer to Databases Chapter in this manual Once FuelsManager has been installed the user should then refer to the Setting System Parameters chapter which addresses the configuration procedures to provide complete functionality of this software Before you begin installation make sure The computer meets the minimum requirements listed in the Hardware Requirements section The installation is to a Windows NTFS file system If one does not exist you must create and format an NTFS partition See Windows documentation for further information You log into Windows 2000 XP as Administrator to install FuelsManager The System administrator has complete authority for installing FuelsManager setting up Windows users and defining FuelsManager users You close all other applications before installing What s in the Box The items delivered as part of this installation include Install CD ROM Hardware Key Keyboard Template Mouse Pad Administrator Manual Before You Begin FuelsManager install CD ROM This CD contains the files necessary to run FuelsManager If you are upgrading an existing version of FuelsManager the installation program will not overwrite existing data unless indicated and will offer the opportunity to backup the existing project The FuelsManager installation CD
290. odes Click Select Select the Source from the list box Nodes dialog Click Add Destinations The Nodes dialog box appears This dialog box lists all nodes except the selected source and lets you select one or more nodes Select one or more nodes Use the Ctrl or Shift key to select multiple nodes Click Select The user is returned to the Movements dialog box The contents are arranged in a tree like format View the Destinations of a Source by double clicking on the desired Source Click Save The system saves the defined Sources with Destinations 234 Administrator Manual Defining Movement Paths Defining groups Groups may be used to correlate multiple Movements You can add groups anytime during the configuration process Clicking the Groups button allows you to view all previously defined Groups or create new ones Inserting a group Step by Step From the Movements dialog box click Groups The Movement Groups dialog box appears Movement Groups dialog Movement Groups Click Insert Type in the new Group name Click OK The system returns you to the Movement dialog box Note Each Group name must Deleting a Group be unique To delete a group from the movement system perform the following steps From the Movements dialog box click Groups The Movement Groups dialog box appears This dialog box lists all the groups Select the group to be deleted Click Delete The selected group
291. odifiers can be created edited imported exported deleted inserted or replaced using the action buttons in the Modifiers Configuration dialog box Creating a modifier Step by Step From the Resources menu in the Configuration dialog box select the Modifiers command the Modifiers Configuration dialog box appears Type in the name of the custom modifier and click New Select a coded variable from the coded variables selection list and click Add Repeat until all coded variables for the custom modifier has been added to the Contents List Click OK to save the changes m 7 Modifiers Configuration Modifiers Configuration Dialog dialog box Standard Modifier Coded Variables Selection List Name EA 3 gt Contents List AB Master Active AB Slave Inactive Abort AC Acknowledged Active Adv High Adv Low Advisory conca impor vas teen ne Graphic file names Entering a graphic file name as a system resource makes the existing graphic file available for assignment to Input and Output points in the database Sometimes the user may want a particular graphic to appear when the associated database point alarm becomes active In the Operate program the operator selects the graphic button in the Alarm toolbar or Alarm Summary to display the graphic This graphic could be a facility overview or a group of field devices Saved and generated graphic files originate from the Draw application These g
292. of your user user groups or security permissions data Items not updated The FuelsManager System Update utility will not update previous versions of communications driver configurations In order to upgrade this part of your configuration you should export all the source assignments prior to starting the upgrade upgrade your database using the FMSystemUpdate utility recreate your communications configuration then re import the source assignments Alternately you can update the software version by version as described in the Troubleshooting section Administrator Manual Upgrading versions prior to v4 3 Running the Utility Step 1 Open the Utility from the Start Menu Click Start and select Programs FuelsManager FMTools and click FMSystemUpdate This opens the FuelsManager System Update Utility The FMSystemUpdate window appears The utility recognizes versions 4 0 4 1 mu FMSysUpdate and 4 2 System Data File Version 4 0 This means that the utility recognizes the file version on your machine and can update your system Step 2 Click Run Click Run to begin the update process Step 3 Back up Files in Project Before running the process the system prompts you to back up your files in the project Backing up these files only makes copies of the files that change during the update not the entire project Click Yes to back up these files and continue Step 4 Finish Update After backing up the project
293. oint Add Point 94 Database Points input and output points 97 Database points creating 93 DataManager 26 Functions 26 Default 288 291 292 Mass 296 Default Font 212 Definition Modes Strap 129 Definitions Movement 225 Destinations Movement 234 Detail folder 14 Detail Mode 12 Device configuration 151 devices locked 151 Dial Up Modem 150 Dialog box Add Point to Database 96 Alarm Assignments 76 Batch Compile 10 Coded Variables Configuration 62 Communications Interface Configuration 148 Database Edit 84 93 95 Database IO Connections 130 Device Configuration 151 Edit Point 105 Edit String 60 Graphic Files 64 Help Files Configuration 65 66 Import Export Data Type 142 Modifiers Configuration 63 Open Graphic File 12 Point Copy Rename 145 Select Data Source 132 Start Definitions 66 Summary report Setup 202 Table Format 203 Directories File 54 FMTools 54 subdirectories 54 ViewRTU 55 Directory Program 54 Disconnecting from an Archival Data Source 160 Display grid Graphics 172 Do Selected 194 Draw 29 168 Buttons 64 Exiting 168 Graphics 10 12 Keyboard Shortcuts 196 Label Tool 177 Menu 10 Toolbar 169 Window 169 Drawing Administrator Manual Arc 177 Ellipse 176 Line 175 Polygon 176 Polyline 176 Rectangle 176 Space 169 Tool Icons 170 Dynamic Condition Assigning 185 Defining 184 Dynami
294. olume at the minimum working level from the current Gross Volume However this value can be measured by automatic tank gauging systems or manually entered by the operator MASS REMAINING REMAINING MASS This process variable is the Mass of product that can be added to the tank FuelsManager normally calculates this by subtracting the current Mass from the Mass at the maximum working level However the value can also be measured by automatic tank gauging systems or manually entered by the operator 346 Administrator Manual Tank Points Process Data Tank Points Process Data MASS AVAILABLE AVAILABLE MASS This process variable is the Mass of product that can safely be issued from the tank FuelsManager normally calculates this by subtracting the Mass at the minimum working level from the current Mass However this value can be measured by automatic tank gauging systems or manually entered by the operator VOL STRAP H20 STRAP VOLUME MINUS WATER VOLUME This process variable is the tank strapping volume minus the water volume FuelsManager normally calculates this by subtracting the current water volume from the current strapping volume However this value can be measured by automatic tank gauging systems or manually entered by the operator VOL STRAP COR EXP STRAP VOLUME MINUS CTSH This process variable is the tank strapping volume minus the thermal expansion effect of the tank shell FuelsManager normally calculates this
295. ommand from the User Interface menu The Draw application window appears Fi Fucks Manager Draw File C y FilesM ueleManagerW MProjectiGraphiceNSiteOverview GRF Fin Edt Add Ariete Meter Exiting Draw Step by Step Select Exit Draw from the File Menu An introduction to creating graphics When creating a new graphic or symbol there are many options available to the user To offer a general understanding of Draw s capabilities a basic procedure is provided The following procedure offers a rough outline of what steps not necessarily in order to take in creating a graphic Administrator Manual Draw application Create a sketch of how the graphic looks Include in this sketch a list of database points and corresponding variables that will be represented in the graphic Note which points have defined alarms and note the data point types Create any new symbols if not available in the Symbol index that will be used in the new graphic by selecting New Symbol Save and then generate the new symbol The generated symbol appears in the Symbol index The symbol can then be added to the graphic Create the new graphic by adding labels values bar graphs for a data point or and symbols for example valve Place Conditions on any selected object if needed Expand the contents of the graphic by placing one or more buttons that access other screens like other graphics or a Tank Detail window Adding geometric sha
296. on Characteristics Landed Height P000 Floating Height pp 00 00 Roof Mass 00 Tank Volume MM gal US Tank Height 0000 tan 16th Tank Radius 0 0000 R n 18h Shell Thickness 00000 ftin 16th Lining Matei Date Installed 9 28 2004 Tank Material Mid te y ExpCoef 1 24e 005 ItalTem D F gt SUTCLIFFE2 XTest W amp M Tank Optional Protection r Tank Shell Correction Cathodic Protection Enable Overfil Protection J Sh lation Spill Protection J AreaCoef 42 009 Gauging Setup Pressure Transmitter Setup OfSet PSI T M de i Height ftin 1 amp h Traditional Hydrostatic C Hybrid Blevation Latitude Level Set 30000 ft n 18th When an input Process Variable is sealed configuration of the Process Variable data source is disabled This feature ensures that a user cannot connect the sealed process variable to another 8130 RTU point Edit Tank Data Variable gt SUTCLIFFE2 Test W amp M Tank Source Level Temperature Manual Entry Manual Entry Density Calculated Water Level Manual Entry BSW Manual Entry y Volume Gross Volume Net Volume Remaining Net Volume Available Net Standard Density Mass Calculated Solids Level Calculated Calculated Calculated Calculated Manual Entry Manual Entry Flow Calculated Water Volume Calculated Gauge Position Density Temperatu
297. on while the operation of movement instances is performed from the Operate program and documented in the User Guide for the Operate program Administrator Manual Movement types Movement types The following table shows the different types of Movements Blend One or More Tanks One Tank Receipt One Unit One or More Tanks Shipment One or More Tanks One Unit Water Drain One Tank One Unit To assist in setting up complex movements movements can be chained together to produce combined movements The following are illustrations of the Movement Types From Tank s To Single Tank One or More Tanks Charge To Unit Typically Ship Barge Truck or Pipeline From Single Tank ADMOOSGVAE 1005 221 FuelsManager Defense Receipt From Unit Typically Ship Barge Truck or Pipeline gt To Tank s One or More Tanks Run down From Unit Typically Ship Barge Truck or Pipeline Shipment To Single Tank To Unit Typically Ship Barge Truck or Pipeline From Tank s One or More Tanks 222 Administrator Manual Movement types Transfer Tank to Tank Transfer Water drain From Single Tank gt To Unit Typically Drain or Slops tank ADMOOSGVAE 1005 223 FuelsManager Defense 224 Xfr modes The transfer or Xfr mode refers to the measuring denomination you are using to measure the product movement Level Mass or diff
298. onstants A B C and D are configured by the user The following example shows data transmitted by FuelsManager the same functionality applied to data received by FuelsManager FuelsManager Translation Table Database Point Scaling PLC My Num ber Process Value 234 6 Vahe 169 2 Application of formula on value of 34 6 results ina value of 169 2b eng written tothe PLC Database points current vahe is 346 Points Minimum 0 Scaled range of value n Points Maximum 100 PLC would be Minimum 100 Maximum 300 ADMOOSGVAE 1005 139 FuelsManager Defense Note In the above example only 3 bits in the FuelsManager database value are define However FuelsManager will write the entire word to the PLC This means that any data stored in bit O through 4 in the PLC word will be overwritten by zeros when bits 5 6 and 7 are written It is the engineer s responsibility to ensure that writing bitfields does not cause unexpected operations in the PLC 140 Configuring bit field data sources The concept of Bitfields allows the user to configure how individual bits within an integer value are manipulated To enable bitfield processing the user selects the Bitfield Data option on the Input Output or Triggered edit point dialogs this option is only available for integer type data formats including Char Byte Short Word Long DWORD When the Bitfield Data option is enabled for a particular point the Start
299. ontraction of the tank FuelsManager uses the following to correct the installed height of each transmitter for the effects of temperature Corrected Height Height x 1 ExpCoeff x Temp Installed Temp Where Height Hi Hm or Hp ExpCoeff Thermal coefficient of expansion for the material from which the tank shell is constructed Temp Current product temperature Installed Temp Temperature when the pressure instrument was installed Both the Hydrostatic and Hybrid methods calculate product density based on the pressure difference between instruments of known heights as follows Administrator Manual Hydrostatic amp Hybrid Tank Calculations Hybrid Calculation Where Pp Bottom Pressure P Top Pressure G Local Gravity Dy Vapor Density Da Air Density L Product level Hp Corrected height of bottom pressure instrument The calculation for the height AH depends on whether FuelsManager is configured to use a top pressure instrument or not If the top pressure is used AH H Hp If the top pressure is not used AH 20 Hydrostatic Calculations P P G x D D x AH D Density Casi Een EU Usu TL a Dy Where Pp Bottom Pressure P Top Pressure G Local Gravity Dy Vapor Density Da Air Density Hp Corrected height of bottom pressure instrument Hm Corrected height of middle pressure instrument The calculation for the height AH depends on whether FuelsManager is co
300. or Manual Defining system resources String configuration dialog box EDIT Allows any of text of the current string selection in the Edit String text box to be modified REPLACE Replace the current string selection with the text in the Edit String text box INSERT Insert a new blank string above the selected string CLEAR Clear the current string selection of any text DELETE Delete the current string selection from the list completely Importing exporting string information User defined strings can be imported or exported using comma delimited text files csv The header and strings have to be imported exported separately Importing strings Step by Step In the Configuration dialog box select the Strings command from the Resources menu From the Strings sub menu select Add Type The String Configuration dialog box appears Select either Header or String option button The Header options button import header information user defined name and maximum length The String option button imports the string the list of strings for the user defined type Click Import The Import User String Header or the User String table appears Select the file to import and click Open The String Configuration dialog box displays the Header or String information imported Coded variables Coded Variables are used for input and output processing as well as alarm processing Coded Variables can be used to build alarms and to d
301. ormation please refer to the Glossary MOVEMENT When the Tank Mode is set to Stopped a Stop Level is established at the current tank level If the tank level deviates from the Stop Level by the High Setpoint a Movement Alarm is generated REVERSE FLOW When the Tank Mode is Fill and the Flow is negative or the Tank Mode is Empty and the Flow is positive a Reverse Flow Alarm is generated NO FLOW When the Tank Mode is set to Fill Empty or Run a Timer is started If the time exceeds the value configured under the No Flow Alarm Hold off parameter and the flow is still zero a no Flow alarm is generated The time is reset whenever the flow value is not zero TEST MODE When the Tank Mode is set to Testing the Test Mode alarm is generated ETA ESTIMATED For each level alarm limit and ETA is calculated Whenever TIME OF the ETA is less than the Transfer Advisory Setpoint the ARRIVAL corresponding ETA alarm is generated ETA alarms are suppressed when the ETA time is 0 ADMOOSGVAE 1005 117 FuelsManager Defense Edit Tank Data dialog box Vessel 1 tab 118 Vessel information Vessel 1 amp Vessel 2 tabs The point information concerning the vessel is divided among two tabs Vessel 1 amp Vessel 2 Vessel 1 keeps the physical statistics of a tank along with gauging pressure and other information to ensure accurate use in FuelsManager Vessel 2 contains transfer limit settings gauge assignments and float characterist
302. ounds per Barrel Oil Pounds per Cubic Foot Pounds per Cubic Inch Pounds per Imperial Gallon Pounds per U S Gallon Short Tons per Cubic Yard Specific Gravity ABREV API Balling BRIX Ba h Ba l Tw g cm3 g L3 g mL3 kg L3 kg m3 Plato Ib bbl liq Ib bbl oil Ib ft3 Ib in3 Ib gal UK Ib gal US ton s yd3 sp gr INDEX Metric English 191 198 194 196 195 197 180 182 181 184 183 v 193 190 189 186 185 188 187 199 192 375 FuelsManager Defense UNIT TYPE Dimensionless Electrical 376 UNIT NAME Bushel Cycles per Second Parts per Million Percent Humidity Percent Oxygen Percentage pH Factor Relative Humidity Revolutions Per Minute Centipoise Cubic Feet per Pound Percent Steam Quality Percentage of Solids by Volume Percentage of Solids by Weight Proof Mass Proof Volume Amperes Capacitance Farad Conductance mho Conductance Micro Siemens Conductance Siemens Coulomb Inductance Henry Milliamps Millivolts Power Factor Resistance Ohms Volts ABREV bushel Hz PPM 96H 02 pH RH RPM centp ft3 Ib quality sol vol sol wt pr mass pr vol A F mho uS mA mV P F ohm INDEX 244 233 235 236 237 234 239 238 232 240 247 243 242 241 246 245 223 225 230 228 229 226 227 222 220 231 224 221 Metric English Administrator Manual Units UNIT TYPE
303. p M official to seal any open format database specifically the historical data stored in the Archive MDB file an MS Access database This sealing process is protected by the same W amp M password and integer seal ID mechanism used in the Module and Tag seals dialogs The process of sealing an Archive MDB file sets the permissions on the file to Everyone Read Execute System Full Control In addition ownership of the file is set to System In order for any user administrator included to make changes to the security of the file they would need to take ownership of the file If the archive is sealed FuelsManager checks the ownership of the file whenever access to historical data is required If the ownership of the archive file is not System then the data does not appear as W amp M approved ADMO03GVAE1005 339 FuelsManager Defense 340 Administrator Manual Glossary of Terms FuelsManager Defense Glossary of terms This section describes each of the available FuelsManager tank point input point and output point parameters and their function Tank point input point and output point parameters are displayed in FuelsManager as an abbreviated parameter name up to twenty characters long and a more complete descriptive name up to forty characters long The two names for each parameter are listed below followed by a more detailed description 342 Administrator Manual Tank Points Process Data
304. pe Std Temp KC Special Rounding Averaging Filter Samples 4 Sample Time Flow Filter v Deadband 15 00 Level Rate Filter Y Deadband 0 00 VCF Mass Flow Filter Y Level Deadband 1 000 00 Temperature Calculation Options Net Flow Filter Iv Deadband 15 00 Water VSw Mole Constant Mass Weight Mass PRODUCT CORRECTION TYPE ADMOOSGVAE 1005 Edit Tank Data dialog box Volume tab The Product button opens the Select A Product dialog box allowing the user to pick the tank product from a list of pre defined products or add additional products These controls allow you to select of the correction algorithm to be used in the calculation of corrected volume for this tank The selection of the major correction type in the upper list box restricts the minor correction types available in the lower list box In addition if your system administrator associated a correction method with the product the correction type is selection is made automatically based on the product chosen 109 FuelsManager Defense 110 SPECIAL ROUNDING GROUP CALCULATION OPTIONS GROUP AVERAGING FILTER GROUP These parameters are only available when a Japanese volume correction method is selected in the correction type lists These options allow you to define specific data rounding methods to be used in the volume correction calculation
305. pes such as lines and rectangles can also enhance the graphic Save and then generate the new graphic Generating the graphic places the graphic in the Graphic Index Once placed in the Graphic Index the graphic becomes available for display in the Operate program n Operate open the graphic under Operate s Display menu All real time values are then displayed in the graphic An example graphic in Operate is seen on the previous page How a graphic is used in the Operate application The previous example shows what a Site Overview graphic looks like This graphic is a representation of a group of tanks All of the contents were created using lines rectangles bitmaps bar graphs values and labels In this example each tank name has an associated button append which when clicked on displays a Tank Detail window Tank levels are indicated by dynamic bar graphs representing the associated data point variables Each valve indicates current status with standard color codes Command buttons may be added to each tank or valve that would open a standard FuelsManager Operator Command dialog box Operator Commands are defined for selected points in database edit If defined a dialog box is displayed allowing the operator to enter a value or issue a command In this example the operator can issue valve open close commands The pipeline objects are animated such that they change color to indicate flow within the particular segment Draw
306. phics that can be displayed in the Operate program Once you create a graphic you can assign it to one of three states Pre loaded Graphic is loaded by Operate into your computer s memory on system startup Not Pre loaded Graphic is not loaded into memory on startup but only when selected Not in Index Graphic does not appear in the index The symbol index The Symbol Index defines all of the symbols available to graphics Administrator Manual Visual Dynamic Tools Select Symbol Index Entry EU Symbol Description n Used By DSA Type Dynamics Pump Legend SD PumpLegend SD Valve SD Valve Valve Legend SD ValveLegend The condition index The Condition Index lists all of the global dynamic conditions available to graphics In this dialog box the user can also create new conditions Select Global Dynamic Condition Select Global Dynamic Conditions Condition Description S PipeSegmentStatus PumpStatus Cancel ADMOOSGVAE 1005 195 FuelsManager Defense 196 Keyboard shortcuts for draw tools Shift Del Deletes the selected object Pg Up Moves the selection to an object that lies in front of the current object Ctrl A Displays the Attributes dialog box for the selected object Ctrl P Sends the selected object to the back of the drawing space All objects that were behind the selected object will then be in front of it Ctrl W Lets you select multiple objects that you can mo
307. pping table was created Kaiji Kentei Kyyokai see the Tank Calculations chapter for more details Only available if a Japan Correction Type is selected on the Edit Tank Data Volume tab Sin Nihon Kentei Kyyoukai1 see the Tank Calculations chapter for more details Only available if a Japan Correction Type is selected on the Edit Tank Data Volume tab Sin Nihon Kentei Kyyoukai2 see the Tank Calculations chapter for more details Only available if a Japan Correction Type is selected on the Edit Tank Data Volume tab Sin Nihon Kentei Kyyoukai3 see the Tank Calculations chapter for more details Only available if a Japan Correction Type is selected on the Edit Tank Data Volume tab TANK GEOMETRY This parameter defines the shape of the tank FuelsManager uses this value to determine how to interpolate between strapping points possible values are Vert Cylinder Horizontal Cylinder End Caps Horizontal Cylinder Flat Ends Standard Sphere Polynomial Sphere Underground End Caps and Underground Flat Ends Selecting Polynomial Sphere causes the strapping table tab of the tank configuration dialog box to change to Polynomial Sphere TANK VOLUME This parameter is used for LPG volume correction methods and defines the total internal volume of the spherical tank TANK HEIGHT This parameter is used for LPG volume correction methods and defines the total height of the sphere at the point at which the automatic tank gauge is
308. process to initiate automatically whenever a particular event takes place After the Trigger Value is reached and a snapshot file is created Automated Data Output sets the Trigger Point value to the Reset Value Two distinct trigger times can set so that the log process runs once or twice every 24 hours To set a trigger time check the box to the left of the time field you want to set and then enter the trigger time into the appropriate field 267 FuelsManager Defense 268 Trigger File Snapshot File Periodic File Periodic Interval Version Export Quality Info Export Header HTML File This field specifies an optional trigger on the existence of a specific file If a file with the full path to the file is specified then the log process is initiated whenever the existence of this file is detected This file is subsequently deleted to reset the trigger The button next to this field opens a browse window to make it easier to specify the trigger file A Snapshot file is an CSV file written when any of the above Trigger events take place and is designed as a snapshot of the data at the moment in time at which the trigger was tripped This file can be used to create a daily inventory report at a specific time or to log the state of all tanks when a particular event or disk file is detected The button next to this field opens a browse window to make it easier to define the desired output file The Periodi
309. quickly check the installed program elements against the program elements that were approved Indicators on all displays when a W amp M official has sealed a particular tank variable W amp M approved displays to include at least W amp M Approved Legend of all Engineering units indication status signs Tank Name Level Product Temperature Water Volume Product Std Density TOV GSV Mass Volume Correction Standard Temperature Methods for Correction Methods Application of calibration seals for individual variables per tank Application of calibration seals to tank points in the 8130 RTU Ensure that unauthorized modification of system data both propriety and open databases is detected and then not displayed as W amp M approved These requirements have been provided for in FuelsManager and the 8130 RTU by Module Seal and Tag Seal features described in the following sections These features are combined with Microsoft Windows XP 2000 Security to insure the integrity of the data 322 Administrator Manual System Overview System Overview NMS 8130 RTU FuelsManager V1 Protocol 8130 Protocol 8213 e a 04 FM ModuleSeals 8203 5 AM DM Rackbus Protocol See Sealing i FueisManager Sont nate Modules section uc for details NMS Point details TankPoint See Sealing TankPoint variables via FueisManager section for details W amp M Official
310. raphics are stored in the Graphic Index The user can view the Graphic Index by selecting Master and clicking Graphic Index in the Draw application ADMO003GVAE1005 63 FuelsManager Defense 64 Graphic Files dialog box Graphic Files dialog box Graphic Files can be added edited deleted or replaced using the action buttons in the Graphic files dialog box Graphics Files Configuration Edit Name None Sphere Tank Replace Add Adding a graphic file name Step by Step From the Resources menu in the Configuration dialog box select the Graphic File Names command the Graphic Files Configuration dialog box appears Type in the graphic s file name as it appears in the Graphic Index of the Draw application The graphic must have been saved and generated for it to be available for assignment Click Add The graphic file name is added to the list Click OK The file is now available for assignment Help file names Entering a help file name as a system resource makes the existing help file available for different purposes There are two types of Help files that are supported Text Help and Windows Help Format Help file entries can be assigned to Input and Output points in the database in the Operate program Buttons in the Draw application Input and output points in the database Sometimes the user may want a particular help file to appear in the Operate program when the associated da
311. rate and the version of OPC can be selected Below these a list containing available OPC servers is displayed When a server is selected from this list the system displays a tree view of the different OPC tags associated with the OPC server selected For step by step instructions on how to Select an OPC server data source refer to Process Data Information Data format FuelsManager supports several data formats for storage of data Selecting a data format only applies to Input and Output points Tank points have a predefined formats Each numerical data format has a default minimum and maximum value as listed in the Glossary These values become the limits used for bar graphs trends and Operator Command entries Refer to the Scale Limits section for more information If the data format is Coded Variable a command modifier may be assigned to the point For more information on Modifiers refer to the Modifier Assignment section Modifier assignment If the Coded Variable type is selected during configuration the user is able to assign modifiers to the point Modifiers are sets of coded variables grouped together to be used as commands issued by the operator The On Off and Open Close modifiers are examples The FuelsManager System contains a list of predefined modifiers a list of these modifiers can be found in the Glossary Alarms and events An Alarm Process defines the alarm limits of a point s value If the value exceeds or falls
312. rate falls below the Low Alarm value then a Low alarm is activated Please note that FuelsManager compares the value of the level rate variable regardless of it s sign meaning that a level rate of 10 in min would trigger a high level rate alarm if the High level rate limit was 9 This variable is entered when configuring the tank point but can be modified from Operate by a user with sufficient privileges LEVEL RATE ALARM HOLDOFF This variable is the sometimes known as deadband or hysteresis It is the amount by which the alarm limit must be cleared before the alarm is deactivated For example if the High level rate alarm setpoint is 10 and the level rate alarm holdoff is 1 the level rate must return to a value of 9 before the High level rate alarm is deactivated This variable is entered when configuring the tank point and cannot be modified from Operate PRESS VAPOR ALARM VAPOR PRESSURE ALARM This variable is a composite value that displays a coded variable representing the highest priority pressure alarms for the tank Possible values are Normal High or Low FuelsManager calculates this alarm based on the current vapor pressure and the alarm limits configured for the tank PRESS HIGH SETPOINT HIGH PRESSURE SETPOINT This variable is the limit for a High pressure alarm If the tank pressure exceeds the High Alarm value then a High alarm is activated This variable is entered when configuring the tank point but can be modified from Opera
313. ration dialog box appears Enter the name of the user defined type Type in the maximum length of each string in the Maximum Length dialog box and click Apply This sets the maximum number of characters used in each string which can be no greater than 80 characters and no less than 1 character Type the string in the Edit String dialog box Click Append to add the string to the list The string is added to the bottom of the current list Repeat the above steps to add more strings to the list When all strings have been entered click OK String Configuration dialog box String Configuration User Defined Type Name QA Strings Cancel Maximum Length 25 Apply Edit String Remove Append QA Department String Strings 1 Entries 1 QA Department String ES Ea EL Boni HEN png ies Em Eee Import Export Functions Header C Strings Import Export Deleting or editing a string Once a String has been defined it will appear in the Strings sub menu under the Add Type command Step by Step In the Configuration dialog box select the Strings command from the Resources menu From the Strings sub menu select the user defined string to be modified The String Configuration dialog box appears Use the action buttons within the dialog box to modify the string String configuration dialog box APPEND Adds the string in the Edit String text box to the end of the string list 60 Administrat
314. re Solids Volume Transfer Mode Not Assigned Not Assigned Calculated Manual Entrv Iv To aid the W amp M official in verifying which FuelsManager tank points have a seal applied and what the value of the Seal ID is FuelsManager includes a Tag Seals dialog Administrator Manual Sealing TankPoint variables in FuelsManager Tag Seals Current System WSUTCLIFFE2 Tag Seal ID Test Tank Table23 24E Obs 0000000001 Test Tank Table23 24E 0000000001 Test W amp M Tank 0000000006 Seal ID Sum 0000000008 The Tag Seals dialog shows the Current System and all the Tanks contained in the FuelsManager Tank Database for the current system that have either Tank or Input Process Variables sealed The Dialog shows the Tag the Seal ID and the sum of the Seal ID s ADMOOSGVAE 1005 In this example three tanks have been sealed or contain sealed variables 333 FuelsManager Defense 334 Display of W amp M Indicator on Graphics amp Reports The FuelsManager Operate program indicates any Weights amp Measures Seal for Tank Detail and Historical Report displays The Weights amp Measures Seal is shown by the prefix W amp M on the title bar of the display If a particular tank process variable has been sealed FuelsManager displays or prints values with the subscript W amp M This is determined by the Input Process Variable Seal and if applicable an I O Seal that is communicated from the external dev
315. reat this as 30 5 feet Engineering unit conversions can be associated with any database point via the Select Data Source dialog box If the engineering units for the FuelsManager database point do not match those defined for the I O point Source Units it will automatically be converted the engineering units defined for the FuelsManager database point If Source Units are not defined FuelsManager assumes that the data received from the I O point is in the same units as the FuelsManager database point and no unit conversion is performed The following example shows data received by FuelsManager the same functionality applied to data transmitted by FuelsManager FuelsManager Data Source Database Point Definition Dialog Level Gauge Tanki Level Level Units feet Source Units mm Source Units and Database Point units do Value of 1200 sent from not match so value of Level Gauge 1200 mm is converted to 3 937 feet FuelsManager Data Source Database Point Definition Dialog Level Gauge Tanki Level Source Units Level Level Units feet undefined 1200mm ba Unitsare not Value of 1200 sent from ied so no conversion is Level Gauge performed and a value of 1200feet is read Administrator Manual Configuring translation tables Configuring translation tables Translation tables define how data received transmitted by FuelsManager is scaled or converted to the data required by the device with whi
316. remain on the screen Redraw removes those pixels and gives you a clean display screen all objects are redrawn ADMO0O0SGVAE 1005 191 FuelsManager Defense Note You should not delete graphic or symbol files from the project folder using Windows Explorer Doing so will remove the File but the symbol and condition indexes will not reflect the deletion Instead use the Purge option 192 Resizing objects A selected object is marked by small squares called handles Lines have three handles one at each end and one at the center Labels and Values have one handle The Label handle is located on the upper border of the label on the left center or right depending upon the label s text alignment A Value s handle is always located on the left Arc handles include the arc start and end points as well as handles at the corners and sides of the rectangle bordering the original ellipse drawn to create the arc All other objects are marked with handles at the corners and sides of the object s bordering rectangle The geometric shapes can be sized by grabbing these handles When resizing symbols the symbols remain in proportion Managing files This section explains how to manage graphic and symbol files Managing files includes deleting saving and generating files Saving files The Save As command saves a file for the first time This option is also used to save the opened file under a different name The Save command
317. rent Net Volume of Tank SVC FW x CTSh x 100 0 BS amp W 100 0 FRA x VCF Available Mass AM NAV x Standard Density Gross Available Volume GAV Current Gross Volume of Tank SVC FW x CTSh FRA Where SVG Strap Volume at the Minimum Working level FW Free water Tank Bottom Solids if any CTSh Tank Shell Correction FRA Floating Roof Adjustment Administrator Manual Traditional tank calculations SVC Strap Volume at the Minimum Working level VCF volume correction Factor Remaining volume remaining mass Remaining volume is defined as the amount of net or gross volume that can be pumped into a tank It is calculated as 0 if none or more of the following conditions are true Level gt High level Alarm High High level Alarm or User Defined Level gt Maximum level as defined in the strap table If these conditions are not met the remaining volume calculation is defined using the following equations Net Remaining Volume NRV SVC FW x CTSh x 100 0 BS amp W 100 0 FRA x VCF Current Net Volume in Tank Remaining Mass RM NRV x Standard Density Gross Remaining Volume GNV SVC FW x CTSh FRA Current Gross Volume in Tank Where SVG Strap Volume at the Maximum Working level FW E Free water Tank Bottom Solids if any CTSh Tank Shell Correction FRA Floating Roof Adjustment VCF volume correction Factor ADMO0
318. resort you can install FuelsManager Defense V6 0 to a different CPU This will require you to export all your tank points resources and strap tables from the old system and import them into the new one Administrator Manual Error messages and troubleshooting After Updating the Database Rename Your Database as the Local Machine Name If necessary you can start FMSystemManager and run FMSystemConfig to rename the database to the local machine Checking Your System After you upgrade your database system to 6 0 with the utility open Configuration and verify that your groups users system permissions and tag permissions are still working properly Since some of the security rights definitions have changed they may not match perfectly The update utility created a back up copy of the old files that were changed These files are located in the Copy of FMProject directory This is not a complete back up of your entire database and includes only the files that were changed in the upgrade Rebuild Graphics and Reports You will have to rebuild the following Symbols Graphics Detail Mode Symbols Detail Mode Graphics Rebuild Reports Back up FMProject After doing all this you should and back up your new FMProject ADMO03GVAE1005 261 FuelsManager Defense 262 Administrator Manual Automated Data Output FuelsManager Defense In this section you will learn how to configure maintain and operate
319. result The user can select from a number of standard graphics that he or she wants to display in event of a specific alarm Similarly help files hlp or htx can be included that give the operator more information and instructions regarding the alarm All alarm graphic and help files must be properly assigned and entered into FuelsManager with the Graphics Files Configuration feature and the Help Files Configuration feature respectively See Defining System Resources ADMO003GVAE1005 77 FuelsManager Defense 78 Build Alarm Limit dialog box Assigning an alarm graphic Step by Step Click Select in the Alarm Graphic frame in the Alarm Assignments dialog box The Graphic Files Configuration dialog box appears Type in the name of the graphic file created by Draw Graphics in the Edit dialog box and click Add Or select a file from the list of Graphics files defined in the Setting System Parameters section Select the name of the graphic file to assign to the alarm and click OK The Alarm Assignments dialog box appears with the graphic file listed in the Alarm Graphic dialog box Alarm event category Users can assign alarms to alarm categories see the Security section Alarm categories filter alarms so that only users with permissions to view the category are notified of alarms assigned to the category This eliminates users having to address alarms outside of their control Event definition The user can select a
320. return to a value of 9 before the High density alarm is deactivated This variable is entered when configuring the tank point and cannot be modified from Operate FLOW ALARM COMPOSITE FLOW ALARM This variable is a composite value that displays a coded variable representing the highest priority flow alarms for the tank Possible values are Normal High or Low FuelsManager calculates this alarm based on the current flow and the alarm limits configured for the tank FLOW HIGH LIMIT CURRENT HIGH FLOW LIMIT This variable is the limit for a High flow alarm If the tank flow exceeds the High Alarm value then a High alarm is activated Please note that FuelsManager compares the value of the flow variable regardless of it s sign meaning that a flow of 10000 gpm would trigger a high flow alarm if the High flow limit was 9999 This variable is entered when configuring the tank point but can be modified from Operate by a user with sufficient privileges FLOW LOW LIMIT CURRENT LOW FLOW LIMIT This variable is the limit for a Low flow alarm If the tank flow falls below the Low Alarm value then a Low alarm is activated Please note that FuelsManager compares the value of the flow variable regardless of it s sign meaning that a flow of 10000 gpm would trigger a high flow alarm if the High flow limit was 9999 This variable is entered when configuring the tank point but can be modified from Operate by a user with sufficient privileges 356 Adminis
321. rface allows the user to select other available FuelsManager databases on the network This gives the ability to remotely configure systems over a network This can be done from many different dialogs within FuelsManager Whenever you see a System button or a Select button within a System or System Name group you can select a different database System Name mUYOO1 Select Select FuelsManager System System WTESTWS15 FuelsManager Systems WHELPDESK XP 2 WTESTWS15 WAUNDERM Display Options Y Show LAN Servers Show TCPAP Servers Administrator Manual Security FuelsManager Defense Note It is important to note that all FuelsManager users must be defined as Windows users on the system running the application If Users are not already set up refer to Windows 2000 or XP documentation The security dialog box has three menu options when it is open Actions View and W amp M 32 Microsoft Windows and FuelsManager security FuelsManager security extends the Microsoft Windows security model by providing additional security privileges specific to the process of fuels management FuelsManager security lets you Create users and user groups Assign appropriate security privileges to user groups Create alarm categories to manage which alarms get annunciated to which groups of users Create tag categories to manage which database points are accessible to which groups of users Set up an opt
322. rity Configure Startup Options for the system like what sub systems are active standby or shutdown Configure any graphics Configure any reports Configure the tank groups within Operate It is possible to create a new tank group template Modify the format of existing tank group displays add delete insert and modify columns select column units set column headings add tanks remove tanks set tank data Configure new product movement paths via the Operate program Without this user right all new movement paths must be configure via the FuelsManager Configuration application Configure the communications maintenance 43 FuelsManager Defense 44 System Permission GRAPHICS ACCESS OVERRIDE DATABASE VALUE ACKNOWLEDGE LOCAL ALARMS ACKNOWLEDGE REMOTE ALARMS GLOBAL SILENCE AUDIBLE CONFIGURE HISTORICAL TREND CONFIGURE REALTIME TREND PRINT DISPLAY CONFIGURE MACROS EXECUTE MACROS ADD DATABASE POINTS EDIT DATABASE POINTS COPY DATABASE POINTS RENAME DATABASE POINTS DELETE DATABASE POINTS IMPORT EXPORT BROWSE DATABASE SETUP MOVEMENTS CONFIGURE START DEFINITIONS Description Allow Operate program to open up different graphics to display Bypass the database and enter database values online Respond to alarm activity in the Operate program from a local machine Respond to alarm activity in the Operate program from the remote server Silence all alarms in Operate
323. rm and Docks typically these might be assigned to user groups of the same name We could then create another user group called Managers and assign all three categories to this group In this way the Managers user group would be able to see all tanks across the entire facility Working with Alarm Categories Alarms can have a defined report manager printer start time print interval and the choice to enable the print Creating Deleting or Renaming Alarm Categories In this example we will Create an alarm but you can also follow the instructions to delete or rename an alarm Step By Step Click to expand the Categories tree Select Alarm under the Categories From the Actions menu select the Add command Enter the name of the alarm Close the Security dialog box Administrator Manual Categories Security Actions View W amp M Security E Y Categories Alarm O Tag E amp Groups amp Users fh Audit ADMOOSGVAE 1005 Name Report Manager Printer Start Time ElNewAlarmCategory1 The security dialog box 35 FuelsManager Defense Defining Alarm Category Properties The properties of the alarm category define which server will be used to print alarms for this category and printer settings such as print time and print intervals Step By Step Click to expand the Categories tree Select Alarm under Categories and click on the category name from the right window to define its properti
324. rocess variable reflects the selected mode of operation of the tank possible values are stopped filling emptying running testing or disabled This variable always reflects the selected tank mode regardless data Source selection TRANSFER STATUS TANK TRANSFER STATUS This process variable reflects the current state of the tank transfer possible values are Inactive Trans SD Setpoint In Progress Advisory or Complete The value is intended to represent the various steps in the transfer process This variable always reflects the current state of the tank transfer regardless data source selection TRANS SD SETPOINT TRANSFER SHUTDOWN SETPOINT This variable is the operator entered desired ending point of a tank transfer it is automatically expressed in either volume of level units depending on the transfer mode selected TRANS ADV SETPOINT TRANSFER ADVISORY SETPOINT This variable is the amount of time before a transfer is complete that an advisory alarm should be triggered The value can be from 0 120 minutes before the transfer reaches the Transfer Shutdown Setpoint TRANSFER UNITS TRANSFER SHUTDOWN SP UNITS This variable is the units being used for the currently active transfer The units are dependant on the transfer mode selected i e Xfr by Level Tank Level Units Xfr by Diff Vol Tank Volume units TRANSFER VOLUME CURRENT VOLUME TRANSFERRED This variable is the amount of volume transferred into or out of a tank during th
325. rocesses you use to configure a FuelsManager database Database menu Points Command Database Edit dialog box 84 Introduction to databases The FuelsManager database is an arrangement of data files that work together to retain real time and calculated data This data is represented by elements called Points and are arranged in a tree like structure with up to four levels The levels are arranged from broad Level X to specific Level 0 the default is three levels On each execution cycle the controlling system called the DataManager performs tank calculations database calculations and alarm detection data conversion and or reporting based on a points value change Configuring a database involves creating points Alarms and events can be assigned to these points Once the point is defined it becomes available to the FuelsManager subprograms and subsystems The database is mainly accessed through the FuelsManager Configuration application but depending upon your user privileges the database can also be edited from several other areas of the application Step by Step To access the database start the FuelsManager Configuration application and from the Database menu select the Points command The Database Edit dialog box appears norder to edit a local or remote database confirm the following User has permission to access the target machine Machine is currently running FuelsManager DataManager on target machine i
326. rt Tons per Minute ton s min 137 378 Administrator Manual Units UNIT TYPE Power Heat Transfer Pressure ADMO0O0SGVAE 1005 UNIT NAME BTU IT per Hour BTU IT per Minute BTU IT per Second Calories per Minute Horsepower KiloVolt Ampere Kilowatt Watt Atmosphere Bar Feet of Water 68 F Grams per Square Centimeter Inches of Mercury 0 C Inches of Water O 68 F Kilograms per Square Centimeter Kilopascal Millibar Millimeters of Mercury 0 C Millimeters of Water 68 F Pascal Pounds per Square Foot Pounds per Square Inch Pounds per Square Inch Absolute Pounds per Square Inch Gage Torr 0 C ABREV BTU hr BTU min BTU sec cal min HP kVA kW W atm bar ft H2O g cm2 in Hg in H2O kg cm2 kPa mbar mm Hg mm H20 Pa Ib ft2 PSI psia psig torr INDEX Metric English 212 211 210 213 217 v 216 215 214 Y 086 081 077 085 078 076 072 071 082 083 084 070 Y 079 073 Y 075 074 080 379 FuelsManager Defense UNIT TYPE UNIT NAME ABREV INDEX Metric English Temperature Degrees Centigrade C 001 v Degrees Fahrenheit oF 002 v Degrees Kelvin Kelvin 003 Degrees Rankine eR 004 Time Days days 009 Hour hr 008 Milliseconds Minute min 007 Seconds sec 006 v Y Weeks wks 010 Month mon 011 Years yrs 012 Velocity Centimeters per Second cm sec 164 Feet per Minute ft min 162 Feet per Second ft sec 161 Y Inches
327. s Select Data Source dialog box commands and settings CALC Data is to be updated by internal database calculation The Calc button assigns the data source such that FuelsManager will calculate the data value for this point LOCAL Data is to be received from another FMDataManager Point The Local button opens the Database Edit dialog box allowing the user to select another FuelsManager database point to be used as the data source for the point This option is only available for the Tank Point Ambient Temperature process variable OPC Data is to be updated from the assigned OPC Server Presently output to an OPC server is not supported The OPC button opens the OPC Server Configuration dialog box allowing the user to select an OPC Server tag to be used as the data source for the point Note Varec is a OPC Foundation Member For additional information on OPC visit http www opcfoundation org or contact a Varec representative Clearing data source Step by Step Open the Data Source dialog box for the point you want to clear See Opening the Database lO Connections dialog box steps Check the Current Type field If the field displays the message Not Assigned then the data source is already clear and no action is needed e If the Current Type field displays a different message then click Clear The Not Assigned message appears Click OK to close the Select Data Source dialog Selecting a Manual data source
328. s Mass Analysis Mass based leak detection is based upon measuring the pressure of the product and applying the conservation of mass principle In bulk storage tanks the Total Observed Volume will fluctuate with changes in the temperature of the product The mass of the product in the tank is a constant so changes in the temperature of the product have no effect on the total mass in the tank Currently Leak Detection is approved with one probe for mass based leak detection Barton Instruments 0 3 000 000 gallons 3 0 gal hr 48 hour test ADMOOSGVAE 1005 241 FuelsManager Defense Note A tank typically requires 24 hours to become stable for adequate Static analysis 242 Tank Analysis Types The analysis type selected by the operator determines the method used to search for a leak When configuring a tank the following analysis types can be set Static Continuous Real Time Static Analysis A Static analysis type requires the tank to be shut down out of service and stable for 24 48 hours depending on the gauge type Typically a total of 24 hours of valid data or quite time is needed to perform a relevant static tank analysis After analyzing valid data from ArchiveManger over a minimum 24 hour time period the System can report valid leak rates Continuous Analysis Continuous analysis allows the operator to keep the tank in use while performing an analysis The system automatically identifies valid down time
329. s This dialog box lists all the nodes Click one or more nodes Use the Ctrl or Shift key to select multiple nodes Click Delete The selected node or nodes are erased from the list Click Save to save changes Administrator Manual Editing Movement Paths Deleting Sources and Destinations Step by Step Select Movements from the Configuration menu bar The Movements dialog box appears This dialog box lists the defined Sources and associated Destinations Each Source and corresponding Destinations constitutes possible movement line ups The contents are arranged in a tree like format Movements dialog showing sources and Movements destinations Source Destination M 300 fa Tank 1 Ed Tank 2 nd Tank 3 d Tank 1 Add Sources L Tank 8 sd Tank 11 Add Destinations Ed Tank 13 fad Tank 12 Ed Tank 13 d Tank 17 PA w 400 Groups fad Tank 19 Export II m 401 Ed Tank 20 Import PA m 401 Check Products History Closing Time HH MM 00 00 History Period Note A Source can not be deleted until its corresponding Destinations Select the desired Source or Destination The Delete button becomes are deleted enabled Click Delete The system deletes the selection from the list Click Save to save changes ADMOOSGVAE 1005 237 FuelsManager Defense Note All nodes must exist in the workstation before you import movements If you are transferring all elements of th
330. s a d dee M a e M RS Maneuvering through pages Formatting FEDOMS cidade edes Setting the default font Vii ct dde ee e don dos Setting the report layout ssssssssee Setting the headers and footers sssssss Setting print times and report status ss Editing TEO Sonia E Opening an existing report ssssssssss mee Editing FuelsManager standard reports Editirig teport obJects ice ee qute ee demit Managing report files eem SINE POS tc ate nee pde ri t ce DEDERE Ire re UR gnus Saving an existing report reene Generating reports vt uc e te ae a dece Generating multiple files 3 4 Itt ert o erre Do Selected option to automate run file generation Make option to automate run file generation sssssssse Build All option to automate run file generation I2eleting Teports e ede SR eodera Deleting generated reports 4 rect et eee tei trs etta ADMOOSGVAE 1005 xiii FuelsManager Defense Deleting SAVE reports eorr ete detener peteret 217 FlistoriCal TepOFts aeo iter ti eno ers rrr o ROM er ERR RENE 218 Configuring Product Movement sss eee 219 Movement types eerte ree ee eoe e a e aes 221 Blend Sese o 221 Clarus hende deceat deo tado t dod oho ed t ed esu 221 Receipts ds Me pter apod pe a T github thin lae PER 222 pinge o a EP 222 SIP MEME eder 222 TS fi tes oTt vacates t eee tree te hM br ets 223 Watere dralnios eoe ain
331. s active Also if database resides on a remote system confirm Network connection exists between the user s machine and remote machine Follow the instructions later in this chapter for creating and editing database points Database Database Edit Current Database System HI a O meum Alarms S Assi t Point Name ource Assignments Meters M 400 Density ArchiveManager IBI Meters M 400 gt FlowRate E Tem E amp Volume lt lt Prev Level Administrator Manual Point Types Point Types Tank d Input gt Output 9 Triggered El Tank Point A Tank point includes predefined variables specifically designed for tank gauging applications The behavior of the tank point is configured via the tank configuration dialog boxes A tank variable is any component of the tank such as tank level flow and temperature Each tank provides process values or tank variables which may be entered manually received from a field device or internally calculated These process variables are listed in the Glossary Input Point Input points are used to receive data from generic field equipment database calculations or manual input Typically these points are used to hold data for equipment that is not tank specific i e pumps values or motors However they can also be used to store tank information not covered by the FuelsManager Tank Point Output Point Output points are used to transmit data
332. s active this variable displays the volume shutdown setpoint for the last transfer TRANSFER DIFF VOL SP TRANSFER DIFF VOLUME SP This variable is the current differential volume shutdown setpoint If no transfer is active this variable displays the differential volume shutdown setpoint for the last transfer TRANSFER MASS SETPOINT TRANSFER MASS SETPOINT This variable is the current mass shutdown setpoint If no transfer is active this variable displays the mass shutdown setpoint for the last transfer TRANSFER DIFF MASS SP TRANSFER DIFF MASS SP This variable is the current differential mass shutdown setpoint If no transfer is active this variable displays the differential mass shutdown setpoint for the last transfer TRANSFER REMAINING TRANSFER REMAINING BASED ON MODE This variable is the amount of product that remains to be transferred for the currently active transfer Units are based on the currently selected transfer mode MASS TRANSFER REM TRANSFER REMAINING MASS This variable is the amount of product expressed in mass units that remains to be transferred for the currently active transfer ADMO0O0SGVAE 1005 353 FuelsManager Defense Tank Alarms Data LEVEL ALARM COMPOSITE LEVEL ALARM STATUS This variable is a composite value that displays a coded variable representing the highest priority level alarms for the tank Possible values are Normal High High Low Low Low FuelsManager calculates this alarm b
333. s from ArchiveManager during regular operation and builds the results Continuous analysis does analyze tanks in real time like Static Analysis Continuous Analysis are manual operations initiated by the user Real Time Analysis Real Time analysis allows for an automatic continuous analysis of tanks An operator will not have to interact with the Leak Detection system to perform an analysis Unlike Static and Continuous types Real Time Analysis works constantly to analyze the leak rate Tests are performed automatically every day at 12 00 am Leak Detection can if configured trigger an alarm if the analysis detects a leak that is out of range Also an alarm is triggered if Leak Detection detects that there is not enough quiet time data in the current month from the tank to produce a valid Leak Test Report Administrator Manual Security Security In order for Leak Detection to be accessible the following permissions must be granted Configure Leak Detection allows users to configure leak tests for tank points Run LeakManager Test allows operators to execute leak tests Security Actions View Wem Wt Security a Categories amp Groups Operator E Administrator Access E Permissions em 0 Tag amp NewGroup1 amp Users fei Audit ADMOOSGVAE 1005 js Acknowledge Local Alarms Acknowledge Remote Alarms a Global Silence Audible lis Configure Historical Trends ls Configure Real
334. s normally only applicable to tanks containing liquified hydrocarbon or those using hydrostatic or hybrid tank calculations MIDDLE PRESSURE P2 HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE P2 ADMO003GVAE1005 349 FuelsManager Defense Tank Points Process Data This process variable is the pressure measured at the same known height in the tank typically at a point such that it is normally below the product level This variable is usually measured by automatic tank gauging but can be manually entered by the operator This data is normally only applicable to tanks containing liquified hydrocarbon or those using hydrostatic or hybrid tank calculations BOTTOM PRESSURE P1 HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE P1 This process variable is the pressure measured at the bottom of the tank typically of a point that is always below the lowest possible product level This variable is usually measured by automatic tank gauging but can be manually entered by the operator This data is normally only applicable to tanks containing liquified hydrocarbon or those using hydrostatic or hybrid tank calculations AIR DENSITY AIR DENSITY This process variable is the density of the air surrounding the tank This variable is usually measured by automatic tank gauging but can be manually entered by the operator This data is normally only applicable to tanks containing liquified hydrocarbon or those using hydrostatic or hybrid tank calculations MASS FLOW MASS FLOW This process variable is
335. s when any Seal State checkbox is changed Click Update Seals A prompt appears to confirm the changes Click OK If any Seal State changes are checked a prompt appears to enter the Weights amp Measures password Otherwise the prompt is simply for confirmation Enter the password The Weights amp Measures password must be properly entered to effect setting Tag Seals W amp M Password Prompt Password prompt Update Seals Update seals confirmation Are you sure you want to dear seals cae Each time the Tank Seal Data is changed the Seal ID is incremented This Seal ID will be recorded by the W amp M official If someone learns the W amp M password and makes changes to the Tag Seals the Seal ID will be incremented and no longer match the Seal ID recorded by the W amp M official In this manner the W amp M official is able to detect unauthorized tampering with the Tag Seals When a Tank is sealed the user cannot configure or edit any process variable scaling engineering unit volume correction vessel characteristic vapor characteristic or strap table parameters ADMOOSGVAE 1005 331 FuelsManager Defense In this example of a sealed tank W amp M keeps any users from editing the sealed information In this example Level Temperature and Density are sealed and cannot be edited 332 Edit Tank Data General Volume Process Data Alarms Vessel 1 Vessel 2 W amp M Strap Water Table Leak Detecti
336. se Parameter mode and Use Template mode You can switch between these modes via the Draw menu File sub menu Detail Data command Use parameters mode In this mode only tank point variables can be added to the Tank Detail This is the default mode Step by Step From the File menu click Detail Data from the sub menu select the Use Parameters option Click on the Hand selector icon in the toolbar and then select the desired value Select Attributes from the Edit menu The Value Attributes dialog box appears Click Select next to the Variable entry The Select Point Variable dialog box appears The tank parameter can be selected in this dialog box Choose the tank parameter and click Select Value Attributes Database Point Data Variable Level Tank Level Type Double Font Style Color Selection Data Format Field Width Arial 16 point Sample Text Precision 2 Text fon Convert Units Y Bold 0 Backaround Align talic c Y Use Bkg Rectangle Pen Center Bkg Rect Ok Cancel Administrator Manual Visual Dynamic Tools Use template mode In this mode the user can select any input output or triggered point that is at the same database level as the tank point i e Assuming a database structure of Area31 Tank1 TankPoint tankpoint Area31 Tank1 ValveStatus input Area31 Tank1 PumpStatus input Area31 Motor BearingTemp input The input points Area31
337. security Define Users and assign to Groups create and assign Alarms and Tag 18 Administrator Manual Introduction to FuelsManager Defense FuelsManager Defense 20 Tank information What is FuelsManager software FuelsManager is an advanced Inventory Management software product for tank farms terminals pipelines and other management facilities This system runs under either the Microsoft Windows 2000 or XP operating systems These multi tasking 32 bit operating systems allow for complete Client Server applications FuelsManager operates on a single PC or as part of a network and is available in Workstation or Server configurations FuelsManager enables users to integrate all major types of tank level and mass measurement instruments including float radar servo hydrostatic intelligent magnetostrictive and hybrid tank gauges into one system Storage tank parameters such as level temperature gross and net standard volumes are displayed at the local operator workstation In addition FuelsManager can be networked with other PC or Host Computer systems FuelsManager enables the operator to view the facility using real time Graphic Displays FS ruelsrionoger Operate Tank Detod SUTCLITFED E H Tank TankPoint Display Alarm Pork Took Trend Window Help slx a1 x Tank Description C eSa Product EE Tank Command
338. sed in your graphic e f there is not already an entry in the Graphic Index in the Master menu item for your graphic a dialog box appears asking if you want to create one Click Yes The Edit Graphic Index dialog box appears Type in a description of the graphic in the Description text box If you click on the Preload on Start option box Operate loads the graphic into memory on startup rather than accessing it from disk when the display is requested this can improve performance when switching between graphics on slower systems Click OK to display the Select Graphic Index Entry dialog box The graphic that has been generated as a run file is now listed in the Master Index Now the graphic will be available to the Operate program Generating multiple files Draw provides an automated method for generating run files Step by Step Select Batch Run Files from the File menu item Select either graphics or symbols The Batch Compile dialog box appears for either graphics or symbols The Altered Files list box displays all files that have been modified since the last compilation Select the files for generation To select all the files in the list box click Select All Clicking Unselect All deselects the files Follow one of the below procedures ADMO0O0SGVAE 1005 Note Any time changes are made to a graphic or symbol it has to be regenerated 193 FuelsManager Defense Note This generation process does not pro
339. ser does not start up FuelsManager it launches automatically upon start up of the Windows operating system This system must start before any other FuelsManager subprogram The FuelsManager system can run regardless of whether a User is logged onto the system As long as the computer is on FuelsManager can run in the background During installation the FuelsManager system was configured to run as a service and placed in Automatic mode The following Services dialog box lists all Windows services Services File Action View Help mm OS S g SRy Services Local amp Services Local Description Status Startup Type Log On As FMSystemManager Name Restart the service EN DNS Client Event Log Fax SiaFMArchiveManager Sy FMCommManager Sy FMDataManager By FMLogServer Si FMReportManager e FMS5ystemManager SRaFTP Publishing la dira Qs Distributed Link Tra Stop the service Sy Distributed Transac Byerror Reporting Ser By Fast User Switching Sy FuelsManager Guar CA a Maintains li Coordinate Resolves a Allows erro Enables ev Provides m Enables yo Provides F pobla Started Started Started Started Started Pr Automatic Manual Automatic Automatic Automatic Manual Automatic Manual Manual Manual Manual Manual Automatic Automatic Manual Local System Network S Network S Local System Local Sy
340. ses Detection of leaks in bulk storage tanks using volumetric changes depends upon a number of factors including the dimensions of the tank and the Net Standard Volume derived from the level amp temperature The resolution stability and accuracy of the level amp temperature instruments play a major role on how effective this method is An accurate gauge with high resolution yields the best results for static measurement The accuracy of the tank Administrator Manual strapping table will also affect the accuracy of the volume calculation Errors in the strapping table could appear as leaks Some factors have more influence than others depending upon the application In large tanks over 50 000 gallons the resolution of the level measurement is the limiting factor For example for a 1 000 000 gallon cylindrical tank 40 feet in height a sixteenth of an inch 1 16 equates to almost 150 gallons This means that a long time period is needed to effectively detect a leak Another limiting factor is the resolution and stability of the temperature sensor Changes in both the product and the tank shell temperature will affect the volume of the product in the tank Currently Leak Detection is approved with three different level probes for volumetric leak detection MTS DDA 0 75 000 gallons 2 gal hr 24 hour test L amp J 8100 0 75 000 gallons 2 gal hr 24 hour test Barton 0 75 000 gallons 2 gal hr 24 hour test Instrument
341. sources are updated on the local computer If the local computer is the master system server additional functions are used to transmit changes to all Client computers Maintaining local disk images of shared resources ensures that a viable image of all shared resources is available even if the designated server is temporarily unavailable Any changes to shared resources are automatically updated to local storage when the server is available DataManager The FMDataManager service maintains real time process data and provides highly efficient event driven communications with other FuelsManager programs for data acquisition DataManager functions Provides security functions to limit user interaction with the database based on Windows 2000 XP and FuelsManager Configuration Accounts Provides the means to create and modify the system database Updates data values upon requests from the FMCommManager or the user interface programs Performs functions to detect and report alarms and events related to changes in the database Performs database calculations based on changes to the database Performs Server functions to provide process data upon request from the user interface programs and FMCommManager Real time data can be provided to other FuelsManager or third party programs using industry standard protocols Database storage Process data is stored in a real time data array Each real time data value entry includes the current
342. stem Local System Local System Local System Local System Local System Local System Local System Loc em Local System Local System Y A Extended A Standard 75 After loading and initializing shared system resources FMSystemManager starts up subsystems such as FMDataManager FMCommManager and FMReportManager The selection of subsystems depends on the local FuelsManager configuration Refer to the Setting Subsystem Run Modes Administrator Manual Startup Stopping FuelsManager Under some circumstances your Varec representative may request that you stop Caution Do not disable FuelsManager You can stop the FuelsManager service from the Services item in FuelsManager unless given the Control Panel specific instruction from your Varec j representative ADM003GVAE1005 17 FuelsManager Defense Additional Configuration Once a new install is completed the Administrator must then configure the database and security for the following items Confirm system and network setup Configure the database Create and define Tank Input Output and Triggered points assigning alarms to database points Define system resources such as products tank sizes and string names Create connections between the database and field devices Configure communications interfaces and field devices Create graphics to be displayed in Operate Create reports to be displayed in Operate and printed to hard copy Configure
343. t 10 00 0Status4 Input VO Configuration RTU i NMS53 01 Elapse Input NMMSS3 01 RTU li 1 NMS53 01 Command Input NMS53 01 j af b Clear New Done Restrictions to I O points Some devices do not allow the connection of I O points to DataManager point variables of an incompatible type As a result restrictions may apply when selecting a database point depending on the engineering units and data format for example Float DWORD etc Administrator Manual Communications interface configuration Types of I O points Device drivers can support three types of I O points Internal Input Output ADMO0O0SGVAE 1005 An internal point only exists in the device driver software and typically provides information about the status of the communications between FuelsManager and the device Input points collect data from the field device and can be connected to FuelsManager point variables in order to read data from the field Output points read data from FuelsManager point variables and can be connected to I O points to write values to field devices 153 FuelsManager Defense Communication Interface Maintenance dialog box 154 Maintenance The user can perform maintenance and diagnostics on the interfaces and corresponding devices In the Communication Interface Maintenance dialog box the user can change an interface s mode as well as open the device dialog boxes of that interface to display diagnos
344. t 5 01234856 7 MyNumber 1 07 1 0 1 0 0 0 Start Bit 1 Ld Number of bits 2 d Start Data Source Bt 0 01234567 MyNumber3 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 Start Bt 0 Nurrber of bits 3 A 4 Start Data Source Bit 2 ADMOOSGVAE 1005 PLC Value 00000101 All FuelsM anager database points are assigned to the same PLC 1 0 point 0123452606 7 1 9 of 111 1 0T1 MyNurrbert 4 4 MyNurrber2 MyNurrber3 141 FuelsManager Defense 142 Importing and exporting points Files consisting of Input Output Triggered and Tank point information can be imported and exported FuelsManager also enables the user to import manual values calculated values forced values strap tables and source assignments This feature has been provided so that the user can create an Input Output Triggered or Tank point using external applications such as Excel or Notepad Not only can this method save time involved in initial configuration but it can also be used as a backup utility or a method for making bulk changes to the configuration Creating a csv file involves entering the column headers and entering the associated point parameters These files can only exist as comma delimited files csv The parameters found in the file vary based on the type of data exported The file types are described in the following table INPUT POINTS Files contain all the attributes associated with
345. t Setup dialog box The defined number appears in the edit box change only if needed AUTOSIZING Deselect this option if you want to enter the table cell dimensions manually when checked all cells will be equal in width and stretched from margin to margin The allowable space can not exceed the page width minus the margins Creating labels in a summary report Labels can only be added to the first row of a Summary Report Step by Step Select Edit click Add and click Label Click on the cell where you want the label to be placed Only the cells in the first row can be selected for a summary report The Label Attributes dialog box appears In this dialog box the user enters the label name An Edit button is available to format the appearance of the label The table Snap option buttons aligns the label within a cell Enter the text in the Label Text edit box Click Edit to format the font appearance of the label These changes can be made before or after the text has been entered in the Label Text edit box Align the label by selecting the appropriate option button This option only applies to labels placed in the table with the Snap to table option selected in the table pull down menu Click OK A label appears in the selected area Label Attributes Label Text Font Options Font Courier New Bold Size 10 Edit alic Table Snap Leti Cent a e Cancel Creating values in a summary report
346. t o Gels baa gat 223 AMOS a e RO a deed e bees 224 Deflinitions uoa ud oia 225 Movement summary eee nre rennes 225 Movement hISIODy irri a gets bert pa ee Hte E reb vA iait 228 Defining Movement Paths sssssssssse eme 229 Before YOU Sd a po ace ege beaten er mte pr deg DTE HAE 229 Accessing the movement configuration s 229 Detinirig nodes iter der dee ve eee ER de EP Me bs 231 Addiriga Tank Node eire ho tee eratis 231 Adding a Unit NOde itio pem rorem abet beetle bus 232 Adding a Meter Node inet n dec tuve t DUE ves 233 Defining Sources and Destinations ssssssssseees 234 Defining groups aod ree ket ri or rv a eva FS C te eds 235 Inserting a group ac isotope re itt te tr I PR Ee 235 Deleting a Group ipe vere e Ce dee te este Pb eade 235 Editing Movement Paths ssssss eme 236 Moditying NOGGS s toc e rent ace aah eau daind hake 236 Deleting NOdES ctt pi spetta un siat Helme rdc o 236 Deleting Sources and Destinations sss 237 Exporting amp Importing Movement Elements sssssseess 238 Exporting Tank Unit and Meter Nodes Movements or Groups 238 Importing Tank Unit and Meter Nodes Movements or Groups 238 Configuring Leak Detection s sess see 239 VOIUMEtIC AMALYSIS ctn atroci tat ig ee stetur ci ce oe ib orbe 240 Mass AnalySisi aep terat eb iiia e I CFR RE
347. t point but cannot be modified via Operate TIME TIME OF LAST VALUE UPDATE This process variable is the last time that the output point s process value was updated This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified TICKS MILLISECONDS OF LAST UPDATE This process variable is the number of milliseconds that have elapsed since output point s process value was updated This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified MAXIMUM MAXIMUM SCALING VALUE This variable is the maximum range for the output point s process value This variable is entered when configuring the output point but cannot be modified via Operate MINIMUM MINIMUM SCALING VALUE This variable is the minimum range for the output point s process value This variable is entered when configuring the output point but cannot be modified via Operate ADMO03GVAE1005 373 FuelsManager Defense Units Area Square 16ths of an Inch 16th 34 Square Feet ft 36 Y Square Kilometers km 33 Square Miles mi 38 Square Yards yd 37 Administrator Manual Units UNIT TYPE Density ADMO0O0SGVAE 1005 UNIT NAME Degrees API Degrees Balling Degrees BRIX Degrees Heavy Baume Degrees Light Baume Degrees Twaddell Grams per Cubic Centimeter Grams per Cubic Liter Grams per Cubic Milliliter Kilograms per Cubic Liter Kilograms per Cubic Meter Percent Plato Pounds per Barrel Liquid P
348. t recorder On line Help Several forms of Help are provided to maximize operator proficiency User defined Help files may be created and then linked to graphics displays and alarms Refer to the chapter on Administrative Operations for more information Administrator Manual FuelsManager System Architecture FuelsManager System Architecture The FuelsManager System consists of an integrated client server architecture of applications and services that interact using the Windows 2000 or XP operating Systems This section describes the functions provided by each of these programs as well as the interaction between them The FuelsManager server architecture services include FMSystemManager FMDataManager FMCommManager FMReportManager FMArchiveManager The Client applications include FuelsManager Configuration Note refer to the following 0 t sections for illustrations of the perate Client applications Report Draw ADMO003GVAE1005 23 FuelsManager Defense Managemnt Information System Serial Host Links i Webserver LIZ CL SF Networked Data Server Printer ea WAN Servers Optional Redundant Server FuelsManager Stand Alone Data Workstation Acquisition RTUs Tank Gauging Instrumentation and Pump and Valve Control Field Instruments NI NE 24 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Services FuelsManager Services FMSystemManag
349. t s process value was updated This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified MAXIMUM MAXIMUM SCALING VALUE This variable is the maximum range for the input point s process value This variable is entered when configuring the input point but cannot be modified via Operate MINIMUM MINIMUM SCALING VALUE This variable is the minimum range for the input point s process value This variable is entered when configuring the input point but cannot be modified via Operate ADMO0O0SGVAE 1005 371 FuelsManager Defense Output points process data Output Points Process Data DESCRIPTION POINT DESCRIPTION This process variable is the name by which the output point is known to the user This variable is entered when configuring the output point but cannot be modified via Operate OUTPUT OUTPUT POINT COMMAND This process variable is the value of the last command issued via this output point This variable is usually linked to automatic tank gauging systems PLC s or DCS systems and is used to send operator commands to field devices i e Open Close Start Stop PROCESS VALUE PROCESS VARIABLE OR SETPOINT This process variable is the current value of the output point This variable is usually linked to automatic tank gauging systems PLC s or DCS systems but can also be manually entered by the operator ALARM STATUS COMPOSITE ALARM STATUS This variable is a composite value that displa
350. t time that the tank BSW was updated VOLUME GROSS GROSS TANK VOLUME This process variable is the total measured volume of the product in the tank corrected for Water Level BSW and Roof Volume FuelsManager normally calculates this from the tank gauge reading and the tank strapping table however the value can also be measured by automatic tank gauging systems or manually entered by the operator VOLUME TIME GROSS TIME OF LAST GROSS VOL UPDATE This process variable is the last time that the tank gross volume was updated This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified VOLUME NET CORRECTED TANK VOLUME This process variable is the corrected volume of the product in the tank FuelsManager normally calculates this by multiplying the Gross Volume by the Volume Correction Factor however the value can also be measured by automatic tank gauging systems or manually entered by the operator VOLUME TIME NET TIME OF LAST NET VOLUME UPDATE This process variable is the last time that the tank net volume was updated This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified VOLUME REMAINING NET NET REMAINING STORAGE This process variable is the Net Volume of product that can be added to the tank FuelsManager normally calculates this by subtracting the current Net Std Volume from the Net Std Volume at the maximum working level however the value can also be measured by automatic tank gau
351. tabase point alarm becomes active The operator selects the HELP button in the Alarm toolbar or Alarm Summary to display the help file This help file could be used to instruct the operator to perform a sequence of steps in response to the alarm Buttons in the Draw application Sometimes the user may want a particular help file to appear when the operator selects a button in a graphic When creating a graphic in the Draw application the user can create buttons or Appends that displays a help file when selected in Administrator Manual Defining system resources Operate The user has the option of creating a graphic button as well as a help file button Text help file This type of help utilizes a user defined text file with the HTX extension These files may be created with any text editor such as DOS EDIT or Window Notepad These files should not be created with a word processor since embedded formatting is not supported The text file should consist of no more than 80 characters on each line The length of the file should not exceed 64 000 characters including spaces When the Help Append is selected in Operate a Help Window will be displayed with the designated HTX file If the complete file is too large for the window scroll bars are provided Windows help format If the Windows Help Format check box in the Select Help File dialog box is selected all files with the HLP extension are shown in the File list box These files
352. tandard Volume TOV Strap Volume at the current tank level FW Free Water CTSh Tank Shell Correction VCF Volume Correction Factor BSW Percentage of bottoms sediment and water impurities ADMO0O0SGVAE 1005 295 FuelsManager Defense 296 MASS Default Mass is defined as net standard volume corrected for density at the observed temperature The following equation is used to calculate Mass Mass NSV x Standard Density In tables where density is expressed in API Density is calculated as Density KG M3 141 5 x 999 012 API Gravity 131 5 Japanese correction methods If a volume correction method with the Japan designation is selected The following additional options are available Weight in air NW NSV x p15 0 0011 Where NW Net Weight NSV Net Standard Volume p15 15 liquid density 0 0011 atmosphere conversion coefficient Weight in a pressurized tank NW NSV x p15 GW The GW is the Gas weight derived by following equation 273 GW V max VG x cox t Pa Where NW Net Weight NSV _ Net Standard Volume pag 15 C liquid density GW Gas weight GD Gas density P Gas Pressure Administrator Manual Traditional tank calculations NW Net Weight GT E Gas Temperature The Molar method NW NSV p15 0 0011 GW The GW is the Gas Weight derived by following equation 273 103 P_ ML Lo 1500011 GW V max GOV s GT 1033 224 p15
353. te Path e File Size Time of Last Modification e Version if applicable Current Checksum Stored Checksum Items under the Actions menu provide for the addition and deletion of modules from the database Module Seals Actions Current System SUTCLIFFE2 Module Seals Size Modifica C Program Files FuelsManager TnkCnfg dil 348160 11 22 2004 2 2 C Program FilesiFuelsManageriDCSCOMM dil 36864 11 22 2004 2 1 C Program FilesiFuelsManageniFMArchiveManager exe 208896 11 22 2004 2 1 C Program Files FuelsManager FlMCommManager exe 90112 11 22 2004 2 1 C Program Files FuelsManager FMCONFIG dil 720896 11 22 2004 2 1 C Program FilesiFuelsManageriFiMDataManager exe 438272 11 22 2004 2 1 C Program FilesiFuelsManageriFMReportManager exe 126976 11 22 2004 2 14 C Program FilesiFuelsManageriFMSecurityClient dil 135168 11 22 2004 2 14 C Program FilesiFuelsManageriFMSYSTEM dil 561152 11 22 2004 2 1 C Program Files FuelsManager FMSystemManager exe 425984 11 22 2004 2 1 C Program FilesiFuelsManageriFMUSR exe 1011712 11 22 2004 2 14 C Program FilesiFuelsiManagerniFMUSRLIB dil 241664 11 22 2004 2 1 lt gt fce A checkbox shows the Seal State for each module A check indicates the module is sealed while an unchecked box indicates no current seal is applied ADMOOSGVAE 1005 Module Seals dialog available in Security 335 FuelsManager Defense Changing a Seal State for a module Step by step n S
354. te You cannot move a line past the positions of adjacent lines 215 FuelsManager Defense Saving an existing report Step by Step Select File and click Save Generating reports Step by Step Select File on the menu bar and click Generate Run Files A message box appears briefly on the screen If the report has not been generated the Generate Report Run Files and the Search of Report Index dialog boxes appear Click Yes The Edit Report Index appears Type in the description name This name is used as the description when opened in the Operate program Click OK The Select Report Index Entry dialog box appears Click OK Generating multiple files Report provides an automated method for generating run files One of three methods of batch generation is provided below 216 Step by Step Select Batch Run Files from the File menu item The Batch Compile dialog box appears The Altered Files list box displays all files that have been modified since the last compilation Select the files for generation To select all the files in the list box click Select All Clicking Unselect All deselects the files Follow one of the below procedures Administrator Manual Managing report files Do Selected option to automate run file generation Step by Step Click Do Selected A dialog box appears asking you to confirm your request to compile all selected files Click OK to proceed with the compilation of the files
355. te by a user with sufficient privileges PRESS LOW SEPOINT LOW PRESSURE SETPOINT This variable is the limit for a Low pressure alarm If the tank pressure falls below the Low Alarm value then a Low alarm is activated This variable is entered when configuring the tank point but can be modified from Operate by a user with sufficient privileges ADMO0O0SGVAE 1005 357 FuelsManager Defense Tank Alarms Data PRESSURE ALARM HOLDOFF This variable is the sometimes known as deadband or hysteresis It is the amount by which the alarm limit must be cleared before the alarm is deactivated For example if the High pressure alarm setpoint is 10 and the pressure alarm holdoff is 1 the pressure must return to a value of 9 before the High pressure alarm is deactivated This variable is entered when configuring the tank point and cannot be modified from Operate MOVEMENT ALARM This variable is used to detect illegal product movements If the tank command mode is Stopped and the level moves in either direction by more than the Movement High limit a Movement Alarm is activated By default the movement alarm is based on change in product level by editing the registry value HKEY LOCAL MACHINEXSOFTWARE FuelsManagen DataManagen UseNetVolumeForMvmntAlarm such that the value equals 1 The movement alarm behavior will be based on change in Net Std Volume thus eliminating false alarm caused by product temperature changes This variable is entered whe
356. te interface but cannot be modified LEAK RATE MINIMUM TANK MINIMUM LEAK RATE This variable sets the minimum leak rate that is detectable when running leak detection tests LEAK RATE MAXIMUM TANK MAXIMUM LEAK RATE This variable sets the maximum leak rate that is allowed when running leak detection tests Any rate above this will result in an alarm if configured and the printing of the word FAILED on leak reports LEAK RATE UNITS LEAK RATE UNITS This variable sets the volumetric engineering units that is used during leak detection 364 Administrator Manual Tank configuration data Tank configuration data Tank Configuration Data DETAIL This parameter defines which tank detail template is to be displayed for this particular tank If this value is not defined FuelsManager will use the tank detail template defined in the registry key HKEY LOCAL MACHINENSOFTWARE FuelsManagen Detail Tank CORRECTION TYPE These two parameters define the volume correction method to be used in the calculation of Std Density and Net Std Volume The selection made in the first parameter constrains the available options in the second parameter For example if the user selects API C the second parameter is constrained to American Petroleum Institute tables that are valid for temperatures expressed in C STD TEMPERATURE This parameter defines the temperature to which the gross volume value will be corrected The majority of the correctio
357. tely changes that subsystem s mode Auto Start Mode The Auto Start Mode option allows the user to select an automatic startup mode for each of the subsystems The user can select None Standby or Active For example suppose Active is selected for the FMDataManager If FuelsManager shuts down and then restarts the FMDataManager starts up in the Active mode If a remote system is selected the Startup Options dialog box displays the defined attributes of that system Selecting a different system only allows the user to set the system options this does not change the local FuelsManager Configuration application ARCHIVEMANA The system is not archiving data into the ArchiveManager GER database COMMMANAGE User cannot configure the communication interface Any R associated l O points are not available for data transfer to or from the database ARCHIVEMANA _ The system is not archiving data into the ArchiveManager GER database just like Shutdown Mode COMMMANAGE CommManager and all of its interfaces are available for R configuration All interfaces are forced into this mode Cannot configure for field data ARCHIVEMANAGER The system archives data into the ArchiveManager database Administrator Manual Setting subsystem run modes COMMMANAGER ADMOOSGVAE 1005 Data passes between the configured database point variables and the field device s 53 FuelsManager Defense Note The RTU Strap C
358. tem displays the name of the DATABASE system that hosts the currently selected database SYSTEM DATABASE Clicking Database displays the Select FMDataManager BUTTON Subsystem dialog box to allow selection of another system s database SELECTED This option buttons allows filtering of the point types appear POINT TYPES in the Database Point list Tank Points displays all tank points in the Current Database System Input Points displays all input points in the Current Database System Output Points displays all output points in the Current Database System Triggered Points displays all triggered points in the Current Database System Administrator Manual Assigning data sources Database IO Connections dialog box CONNECTION This option buttons allows filtering of the types of TYPES connections displayed on the Database Point list None displays all unassigned connections Manual displays all manual data source assignments Calc displays all calculated data source assignments Comm displays all CommManager data source assignments OPC displays all OPC Server data source assignments SELECT The Select Source button allows a data source to be SOURCE assigned to a database point Clicking on this button BUTTON displays the Select Data Source dialog box and is only enabled when a Database Point has been selected REFRESH The Refresh button the Database Point to be renewed based on the current opt
359. tered from the System Menu of the Configuration program Select System and click Startup Options The dialog containing the startup modes is displayed Accessing the movement configuration Step by Step Open the FuelsManager configuration program Select Movement from the menu bar Movements dialog ADMO0O0SGVAE 1005 229 FuelsManager Defense 230 Movements Source Destination T Groups Tank 1 Ld Tank 2 d Tank 3 nai Ed Tank 1 Add Sources Ed Tank 8 Ed j 1 A a Add Destinations ani Ed Tank 12 d Tank 13 Ed Tank 17 PA w 400 Ed Tank 19 Export I m 401 Ed Tank 20 Import I m 401 Check Products History Closing Time HH MM 00 00 History Period Days 30 Close This dialog box lists all the Sources and associated Destinations found in the system Each Source and corresponding Destination constitutes a valid movement path The user is able to add and save Sources and Destinations from a series of configuration dialogs Selected Sources and Destinations can also be deleted The configurations defined by this dialog control the movement line ups available for selection by the operator from the FuelsManager Operator interface If the Check Products check box is selected the system checks for product mismatch The History Closing Time field lets you enter a time of day that the system logs in the Movement data to the movement database Two scenarios that may arise are Scenario
360. the Samples and Deadband parameters in the averaging calculation of Flow Level Rate Mass Flow and Net Flow It defines the amount of time in seconds between the samples in the average The same Sample Time parameter is used for the Flow Level Rate Mass Flow and Net Flow calculations DEADBAND This parameter is used along with the Samples and Sample Time parameters in the averaging calculation of Flow Level Rate Mass Flow and Net Flow The sample value must be greater than the deadband value otherwise a sample value of zero will be used The deadband parameter can be set independently for the Flow Level Rate Mass Flow and Net Flow calculations FILTER This parameter is used to enable the averaging calculation of Flow Level Rate Mass Flow and Net Flow If the filter parameter is not set FuelsManager calculates the instantaneous value for the Flow Level Rate Mass Flow and Net Flow values Averaging can be set independently for the Flow Level Rate Mass Flow and Net Flow calculations LANDED HEIGHT This parameter defines the height at which the floating roof is fully landed on it legs At this point the volumetric effect of the floating roof is zero since it is no longer floating The area between the Landed Height and the Floating Height is known as the Critical Zone FuelsManager only uses this parameter if the Roof type Roof Mass not in Strap is selected otherwise this parameter is ignored FLOATING HEIGHT
361. the engineering units General Volume Process Data Alarms Vessel 1 Vessel2 W amp M Strap Water Table Leak Detection Description Tank 4 Tag Category Default Detail DetailMCR_StdDn Display Quality Data Edit Tank Data dialog box General tab Variable Type Minimum Maximum Engineering Units Level 40 00 00 ftinch 6th Temperature 0 00 300 00 Degrees Fahrenheit Volume 0 00 1 200 000 00 U S Gallon Mass 0 00 10 000 000 00 Pound Density 0 00 100 00 Degrees API Standard Density 0 00 100 00 Degrees API Flow 1 000 00 1 000 00 U S Gallon min Pressure Units 0 00 30 00 poundisq in PSI Level Change Rate 10 00 10 00 feet per minute Mass Flow 3 000 00 3 000 00 pounds per hour Vapor Gas Density 0 00 100 00 pounds cu foot Leak Rate 10 00 10 00 U S Gallon hour Cancel ADMOOSGVAE 1005 107 FuelsManager Defense 108 DESCRIPTION Enter a descriptive name to be used for the point This name can be displayed on user graphics and reports in addition it forms part of the alarm entry if an alarm condition should occur DISPLAY QUALITY Enable or disable the display of FuelsManager quality DATA information text superscripts displayed in graphic and reports that define from where the data was derived The default setting is unchecked i e quality data is displayed VARIABLE TYPE This column displays the types of tank point variables COLUMN available This
362. the input output point see Administering Alarms The Edit Alarm button is disabled if not alarms have been defined for this point FuelsManager Defense 106 TRIGGER SETUP Triggered only INPUT TRANSLATION TABLE OUTPUT TRANSLATION TABLE Triggered only OUTPUT DESTINATIONS Triggered only INPUT SOURCE The minimum repeat interval defines the fastest period that any changes in the monitored value will be sent to the defined destination The maximum repeat interval defines the period of which the monitored value will be sent to the destination regardless of whether the value has changed Setting either the minimum or maximum repeat intervals to zero disables the associated functionality The translation table FuelsManager uses to decipher the data coming in from the input point The translation table FuelsManager uses before sending point data to an output destination A table listing the data sources that serve as the destinations for triggered points The user can add edit and remove the source by clicking the appropriate button Adding or editing the source opens the Select Data Source dialog box allowing you to define the sources of your data output point A table listing the data source for the input point The user can add edit and remove the input source bay clicking the appropriate button Adding or editing the source opens the Select Data Source dialog box allowing you to define the source of
363. the mass flow of product into or out of the tank FuelsManager normally calculates this sampling the mass at user defined intervals and averaging the change in mass over a user defined number of samples However this value can also be measured by automatic tank gauging systems or manually entered by the operator MASS FLOW TIME MASS FLOW TIME This process variable is the last time that the tank mass flow was updated This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified NET FLOW NET FLOW This process variable is the net volumetric flow of product into or out of the tank FuelsManager normally calculates this sampling the net volume at user defined intervals and averaging the change in net volume over a user defined number of samples However this value can also be measured by automatic tank gauging systems or manually entered by the operator NET FLOW TIME NET FLOW TIME This process variable is the last time that the tank Net flow was updated This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified VAPOR MASS VAPOR MASS This process variable is the mass of the vapor space above the product in the tank FuelsManager normally calculates this value However the value can also be measured by automatic tank gauging systems or manually entered VAPOR NET VOLUME VAPOR NET VOLUME This process variable is the net volume of vapor space above the product in the tank FuelsManager normally
364. the movement either manually OR due to non zero flow If the movement is active at the system specified closeout time default midnight Closeout Value only exists after a closeout event has occurred If the movement remains active and further closeout events occur the closeout value will be updated The following are possible movement states along with their meanings Active the movement has been initiated by the operator and is not configured to use Start on Non Zero Flow the movement has been paused by the operator 226 Administrator Manual Definitions Starting The movement has been initiated by the operator but the movement has been configured to Start on Non Zero Flow and no flow has been detected yet Stopping The movement has been configured to Stop on Non Zero Flow and zero flow has not existed for a time greater than the Zero Flow Hold Off Value Combined is a combination of movements that involve one or more Movement common tanks the following combinations are NOT allowed A combination that involves the same node pair twice Transfer Tank 1 Tank 2 Blend Tank 1 Tank 3 Tank 2 Charge Tank 1 Unit XYZ Shipment Tank 2 Unit XYZ Tank 1 A combination that results in a circular transfer of product Transfer Tank 1 Tank 2 Transfer Tank 2 Tank 3 Transfer Tank 3 Tank 1 Discrepancy is the difference between the total amount transferred from all the From tanks and the total amount received at
365. the next to Permissions under the group name Click on the System icon under the Permissions expanded tree In the right window check or uncheck the permissions as required Close the Security dialog box Administrator Manual Users and Groups Permissions System Permission CONFIGURE DATABASE CONFIGURE ALARMS CONFIGURE ARCHIVEMANAGER CONFIGURE COMMUNICATIONS CONFIGURE SYSTEM RESOURCES CONFIGURE SECURITY CONFIGURE AUDITING CONFIGURE ALARM CATEGORIES CONFIGURE STARTUP OPTIONS CONFIGURE GRAPHICS CONFIGURE REPORTS CONFIGURE GROUPS CONFIGURE GROUPS FORMAT CONFIGURE MOVEMENTS COMMUNICATIONS MAINTENANCE ADMO0O0SGVAE 1005 Description Configure the database while running FuelsManager These changes are instantly configured into the database Configure global alarm definitions in FMDataManager Configure Archive Manager for start times intervals and historical periods for data to be archived Configure the CommManager only for the interface device description and communication port Configure the products strings coded variables modifiers graphic file names and help file names resources Configure the tag category and the access selection for alarms and tags of groups Configure the system and tag permissions Configure Users and Groups Configure alarm category and audit are not available under this option Configure Audit permissions Configure Alarm category within secu
366. this database point Possible options Clear Manual Comm Calc Local OPC Defines the first bit position in the database point that will be sent to the assigned l O point Defines the number of bits starting with the Start bit that will be sent to the l O point Defines the first bit position in the assigned I O point that the bits defined by the start bit and number of bits will be written to Translation or scaling table to be applied to this database point Engineering units that the received data value will be expressed in System name that this point is assigned to Description of the device or I O point that this database point is connected to Select Data Source dialog box commands and settings CURRENT TYPES UN ASSIGNED CLEAR MANUAL COMM This field displays the current data source type Data Source is undefined the data will be tagged as un initialized The Clear button un assigns the data source The Manual button assigns the data source such that the operator will manually enter the value Data is to be received from the designated CommManager Input or outputted for output points The Comm button opens the Communications Interface Configuration dialog box allowing the user to connect the value of the point to external devices Refer to the previous Data Source description section and the particular Communications Driver manual for procedures Administrator Manual Assigning data source
367. this to compensate the level value reported by the tank gauge Used when LPG volume calculation method is selected This field allows the user to configure the diameter of the float FuelsManager uses this to compensate the level value reported by the tank gauge Used when LPG volume calculation method is selected Administrator Manual Creating and editing tank points Polynomial sphere information The Polynomial Sphere tab replaces the Strapping table tab when the user selects the Tank Geometry option Polynomial Sphere Step by Step Review the Level Constant grid values Enter the required Correction Level and P Constant Edit Tank Data gt WSIZEMORE TankFarm TankTP 200 Tank General Volume Process Data Alarms Vessel 1 Vessel 2 W amp M Leak Detection Polynomial Sphere Note For detailed calculation Level Q Constant R Constant S Constant method used see the Polynomial 0 00 00 0 00e 000 0 00e 000 0 00e 000 Sphere section of the Tank 0 00 00 0 00e 000 0 00e 000 0 00e 000 Calculations section 0 00 00 0 00e 000 0 00e 000 0 00e 000 0 00 00 0 00e 000 0 00e 000 0 00e 000 Edit Tank Da ta dialog 0 00 00 0 00e 000 0 00e 000 0 00e 000 box Po 1 nomia I 0 00 00 0 00e 000 0 00e 000 0 00e 000 y Sphere tab 0 00 00 0 00e 000 0 00e 000 0 00e 000 0 00 00 0 00e 000 0 00e 000 0 00e 000 Equation Constants Correction Level 0 00 00 ft in 16th Density 30 00 P Constant o Temperatur
368. tic information Step by Step Select Communications in the Configuration dialog box Select Maintenance Communication Interface Maintenance System Name WSIZEMORE Select System Run Mode ACTIVE Interface Status Interface Description Interface Type Port Status INTERFACE 004 Modbus Master UNASSIGNED STANDBY INTERFACE 005 Varec 8130 RTU COMI STANDBY Change Interface Mode Open Maintenance Dialog peces pe Done Help Change interface mode Each individual interface has a current status which is either STANDBY or ACTIVE The CommManager does not communicate to the field devices when an interface is in STANDBY The port is then available to other non FuelsManager programs When an interface is ACTIVE the communications port becomes active and unavailable Communications then become operational The data is transferred to and from the database as defined by the device I O point configurations Step by Step Select the Interface description in the dialog box window for the interface you wish to modify Select Run button to change the device from STANDBY to ACTIVE Select Standby button to change the device from ACTIVE to STANDBY Click Done to finish Administrator Manual Maintenance Device maintenance Device maintenance is accessible by selecting the Device button in the Communications Interface Maintenance dialog box It allows the user to view diagnostic information about the selected devi
369. time Trends ls IPrint Display lis Configure Macros a Execute Macros MJ Add Database Points ls Edit Database Points a i Copy Database Points ja Rename Database Points ja Delete Database Points j importExport ls Browse Database lai Setup Movements ls Configure Start Definitions ls Execute Start Definitions a i Configure Movement View a Configure LeakManager ls Run LeakManager Tests Note For more detailed instructions on Security please refer to the FuelsManager Security section of this manual 243 FuelsManager Defense ArchiveManager The ArchiveManager database is analyzed to calculate leak rates It is necessary to configure ArchiveManager to write all required data to the archive database ArchiveManager needs to be configured to include the following additional tank point variables Cathodic Protection Standard Density Date Installed Tank Gauge Type Density Tank Height Hydro Pressure Units Tank Level Hydro Pressure Volume Tank Material Bottom Pressure P1 Tank Radius Leak Rate Tank Volume Leak Rate Units Temperature Lining Material Unrounded Volume Net Overfill Protection Water Level Spill Protection In addition the following ArchiveManager Configuration changes must be made The precision of the Tank Level should be increased to allow Leak Detection to calculate small volume changes ArchiveManager s sample Interval should be set to 5 minutes ArchiveManager s
370. ting any other graphic is how the Value tool is used See Editing a Value below for more details The process of creating a custom Tank Detail is summarized below Note Multiple Tank Detail i templates can be created the user The display is opened in Draw The user enters labels values and other can define which template will be objects used on a tank by tank basis refer to the Configuring Database Once completed the display is saved and generated like any other graphic chapter The default Tank Detail is then defined by entering the file name in the Registry Editor The default Tank Detail can be overridden on a tank by tank basis by entering the file name in the Detail field of the Edit Tank Data dialog box ADMO03GVAE1005 187 FuelsManager Defense Note DO NOT SAVE over the default file Save the file under a different file name by selecting Save As Value Attributes dialog box 188 Creating a tank detail Step by Step Select File and click Detail Mode If a graphic is presently opened Draw will ask if you want to save the file A check mark appears next to the Detail Mode menu option Select File and click Open The Open Graphic File dialog box appears Select the desired graphic grf from the File Name list box Make sure that the Graphic option button is selected The Tank Detail graphic appears in the Draw window Editing a value Tank Details can be edited in one of two modes U
371. tion information Refer to the following tables for a complete list Administrator Manual ArchiveManager Tank point records Data Record Point Tag Product Code System Name Tank Level Tank Level Status Temperature Temperature Status Density Density Status Gross Volume Gross Volume Status Net Volume Net Volume Status Remaining Volume Net Remaining Volume Net Status Available Volume Net Available Volume Net Status Flow Flow Status Water Level Water Level Status Tank Status Tank Status Status Data Time Stamp Description file Time Stamp ADMO03GVAE1005 Description Record Point Tag Description System Name Level Units Temperature Units Flow Units Density Units Volume Units Minimum Level Range Maximum Level Range Minimum Temperature Range Maximum Temperature Range Minimum Density Range Maximum Density Range Minimum Volume Range Maximum Volume Range Minimum Flow Range Maximum Flow Range Time Zone Time Stamp 165 FuelsManager Defense Input point records Data Record Point Tag Description System Name Alarm Status Process Value Process Value Status Ticks Point Time Units Time Stamps Description Time Stamp Output point records Data Record Point Tag Description System Name Alarm Status Output Output Status Process Value Process Value Status Ticks Point Time Units Time Stamp Description Time Stamp Description Record Point Tag Descript
372. tmost edit box would be unavailable Enter the Source Points The user can rename points using a combination of methods by entering an asterisk in the appropriate edit box es For example the user can type BARGE in the Level 2 edit and then enter asterisks in the remaining edit boxes This combination instructs the database to rename the Level 2 of the destination points but to leave the remaining levels unchanged If the entire point needs to be renamed the user then enters the existing point in the Source Points edit boxes and the new name in the Destination Points edit boxes In the above example the Tank Farm Tank Tank 4 point is renamed Tank Farm Tank Tank 5 The user could have also entered an asterisk in the Destination Point s third edit box instead of typing in GAUGE 144 Administrator Manual Copying and renaming points Enter the Destination Points The user can also use asterisks These points will be renamed according to the defined Source points Click Copy or Rename if renaming A message is displayed warning the user that any Graphics or Reports that reference the point s that are about to be renamed may now be invalid f the point s are renamed successfully the Database Copy Rename Status dialog box will indicate a status of OK otherwise it will indicate the reason why the rename failed When renaming multiple points the Database Copy Rename Status dialog box will indicate which points were succ
373. to reset the point to after the snapshot file is created If you want to create snapshot files at specific times of day check the box es next to the appropriate Trigger Time fields and enter your time s there Keep in mind these fields are entered using 24 hour time You can enter up to two Trigger Times Specify the snapshot file that you want Automated Data Output to write to by entering in the full path and file name into the Snapshot File field If you want to create a snapshot file using a trigger file when a file exists enter that file s path and filename in the Trigger File field If you want Automated Data Output to create a Periodic File enter the path and filename you want to create in the Periodic File field Set the Periodic Interval field keeping in mind that this value is also used to set the interval for the HTML file Also set any desired Period File Options f you want Automated Data Output to create an HTML file enter the full path and filename in the HTML File field as well as an HTML Header File if you want to include a logo in the browser above your HTML file If you want Automated Data Output to create an XML file enter the full path and filename of the file you want to create in the XML Files If needed click the Test button and review the output files Click the Ok button to save the configuration and close the dialog Automated Data Output configuration is now complete Since Automated Data Output is
374. ton in the clear column adjacent to the assignment you want to clear Use standard point selection processes to select database points After assigning the points Click OK on the Meter Nodes dialog box Click Save on the Nodes dialog box The system saves the meter node to the movement system Click Close The system returns you to the Movements dialog box ADMOOSGVAE 1005 Meter Node dialog Note The reset data source is typically connected to a FuelsManager output point which is used to send a command to a PLC RTU to cause the flow meter accumulator to be reset Note Meter nodes should be assigned to FuelsManager Input type points Connections are only allowed to input points of data type double In addition the input point must be configured with engineering units that match the meter node variable being connected Volume units for Gross Net Volume 233 FuelsManager Defense Defining Sources and Destinations To configure the Movement System you need to specify which nodes you are using as movement sources and you must add destinations to the sources A Source can contain multiple destinations Step by Step From the Movements dialog box click Add Sources The Nodes dialog box appears This dialog box lists all nodes that you have not assigned as a source and lets you select one or more of those nodes Select one or more nodes and click Select Use the Ctrl or Shift key to select multiple n
375. tor 18 Alarm 114 Creating Deleting or Renaming 34 Defining Properties 36 Edit Test 81 Limit Enable 77 Limits 76 Other Types 117 Properties 36 Specialized 117 Test Parameter 79 Test Value 80 Alarm Graphic Assigning 78 Alarm Graphic and Alarm Help 77 Alarm Process Build 78 Alarm Template 77 Alarm Test Build 79 Alarm Event Category 78 Alarms 21 70 Configuring alarms 72 Leak Detection 249 Pre configured 71 Analytical data Tank Calculation 315 Append Command 181 ADMOOSGVAE 1005 Detail 182 Graphic 182 Help 182 Report 182 Archival Data Source Adding or Connecting to an 159 Archive Input and Output Points 161 Specify Archive Points 161 ArchiveManager 27 158 244 schedule 161 Setting the Schedule 161 Asphalt Tables 279 Attributes 190 Auto Start Mode 52 Automate Run File Generation Build All Option 217 Do Selected Option 217 Automated Data Output 264 Configuration dialog 266 Configuring 270 Sample output files 271 Automatic mode 16 Autorun 8 B Background Color 171 Background Mode 171 Backup Project 257 Bar Graph 178 Batch Compile 11 Batch Run Files 10 Bitmap 183 Blend Movement Type 221 Bottom Sediment Water Correction Method 289 Brush Attributes 172 Box 170 Build All 194 Button 180 C Calculated Value 87 Calculations Hybrid 313 Hydrostatic 313 Categories alarm 34 tag 34 Center 173
376. trator Manual Tank Alarms Data Tank Alarms Data FLOW ALARM HOLDOFF This variable is the sometimes known as deadband or hysteresis It is the amount by which the alarm limit must be cleared before the alarm is deactivated For example if the High flow alarm setpoint is 10 and the flow alarm holdoff is 1 the flow must return to a value of 9 before the High flow alarm is deactivated This variable is entered when configuring the tank point and cannot be modified from Operate LEVEL RATE ALARM CHANGE IN LEVEL RATE ALARM This variable is a composite value that displays a coded variable representing the highest priority level rate alarms for the tank Possible values are Normal High or Low FuelsManager calculates this alarm based on the current level rate and the alarm limits configured for the tank LEVEL RATE HIGH S P HIGH LEVEL RATE SETPOINT This variable is the limit for a High level rate alarm If the tank level rate exceeds the High Alarm value then a High alarm is activated Please note that FuelsManager compares the value of the level rate variable regardless of it s sign meaning that a level rate of 10 in min would trigger a high level rate alarm if the High level rate limit was 9 This variable is entered when configuring the tank point but can be modified from Operate by a user with sufficient privileges LEVEL RATE LOW S P LOW LEVEL RATE SETPOINT This variable is the limit for a Low level rate alarm If the tank level
377. tributes from the Edit menu item or press Ctrl A The dialog box pertaining to the selected object appears This dialog box is the same one that appears when first creating the object Make the desired changes and click OK when you have finished Your changes will then be displayed on the screen Push to back amp pull to front Use the Push to Back and Pull to Front commands to change an objects relation to another in your display If one object appears in front or on top of another on the screen you can modify that arrangement so the objects switch places in relation to each other Administrator Manual Visual Dynamic Tools If you wanted to push an object from the front or on top to the back or behind another object choose the Push to Back command from the Edit menu or press Ctrl P The Pull to Front Ctrl F command works in the opposite direction Copying single objects The Copy command allows you to duplicate objects on the screen Step by Step Select the object and then select Copy from the Edit menu or press Ctrl C Click on the copied object and drag the cursor to another area of the display screen When you hold down the mouse button the cursor becomes a four sided arrow This indicates that you can move the object in any direction When you release the mouse button a copy of the object appears at the location to where you dragged the cursor Moving deleting and copying multiple objects The
378. ts and floating roof adjustment 5 From API Tables 5 6B 6 Net volume corrected to 60 F ADMO03GVAE1005 317 FuelsManager Defense 318 Flow calculations The following sections detail how FuelsManager performs Flow calculations Flow o GOV GOY La i Where Level rate Q Level Level T d n Where Mass flow Q WN a WN La T Administrator Manual Flow calculations Net flow VN Q n 1 T n 1 Where ADMOOSGVAE 1005 VN T 319 FuelsManager Defense 320 Administrator Manual Administering Weights and Measures FuelsManager Defense The Weights and Measures W amp M function formerly described in document number MIS 100100 01 provides sealing functionality in the 8130 RTU and FuelsManager products The system also includes data flow between the various FuelsManager and RTU modules This information is included to assist the W amp M testing authority and to ensure the System s data integrity This function meets the requirements of Nederlands Meetinsituut NMi and Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt PTB Weights amp Measures W amp M Agencies Features included in W amp M include the following Sealing of program EXE s DLL s and report displays files by W amp M official such that if the files are changed in any way the system will not display data in a W amp M approved fashion Adisplay that lets W amp M officials
379. ture VCF Volume Correction Factor Administrator Manual LPG quantity calculation from liquid density Step 8 Liquid mass is calculated from liquid density at 15 C and corrected liquid volume at 15 C The units here are tonnes ML VLC15 x DENL15 1000 Where ML Liquid Mass Step 9 Total tank volume is corrected for temperature and pressure using the overall mean tank temperature This is best calculated for the liquid volume liquid temperature and total volume and vapor temperature as TAV TL x VLC VT VLC x TV VTC TAV Average overall tank temperature TL Temperature of liquid TV Temperature of vapor VTC Total tank volume The correction is then carried out as CORRT2 21 3 x aT x TAV 15 Where aT Coefficient of thermal expansion of the tank C The correction for pressure is applied as in step 6 except that 3 replaces F in the calculation of the correction factor S is the previously calculated value i e CORRP2 1 3 x S YOUNG VTC VT x CORRT2 x CORRP2 Where VTC Volume of tank corrected for temperature and pressure Step 10 Vapor volume is calculated from corrected liquid volume at tank conditions Step 5 and total tank volume corrected to measured conditions Step 9 as W VIC VLC Where VV Vapor volume VTC Total tank volume VLC Corrected liquid volume Step 11 Vapor density may be calculated from liquid density vapor temperature and vapor space pressure as follows
380. u selected in the Historical Database display field The system also changed the Connect button to Disconnect Archive Manager Configuration Realtime Database Historical Database Start Time HH MM Interval in Minutes Historical Period in Days Tank Point Variables Battom Pressure P1 Cathodic Protection Date Installed Density Maximum Density Minimum MSIZEMORE Select FM System Access Microsoft SQL Server Disconnect 00 00 Archive Input and Output Points Specify Archived Points Automatic End of Month Backup Precision Double 17 3 Add Byte Date Double Double Edit Units Double OU Desc 3 Dina Cancel Disconnecting from an archival data source To disconnect ArchiveManager from an archival data source click Disconnect The system disconnects from the archival data source and clears the Historical Database display field Administrator Manual ArchiveManager Setting the ArchiveManager schedule The ArchiveManager writes data on a schedule based on your entries in the Start Time and Interval fields in the ArchiveManager Configuration dialog box Step by Step n the Start Time field enter the number of minutes past the hour that you want to synchronize the archive data to In the Interval field enter the number of minutes you want to leave between data transfers The minimum interval is 10 minutes In the Historical Period field enter the numbers of days
381. ually measured by automatic tank gauging but can be manually entered by the operator GAUGE POSITION TIME GAUGE POSITION TIME This process variable is the last time that the tank gauge position was updated This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified ADMO03GVAE1005 345 FuelsManager Defense Tank Points Process Data DENSITY TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE FOR MEASURED DENSITY This process variable is the measured temperature at the time the density data was last updated If entered FuelsManager uses this data to convert the density data to corrected density This variable is normally measured by automatic tank gauging but can be manually entered by the operator Typically tank gauges that support density measurements provide this data Otherwise the laboratory may provide this data for manual entry DENSITY TEMP TIME DENSITY TEMP TIME This process variable is the last time that the tank density temperature was updated This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified SOLIDS VOLUME BOTTOM SOLIDS VOLUME This process variable is the volume of solids in the tank FuelsManager normally calculates this from the solids level value and the tank strapping table however the value can also be measured by automatic tank gauging Systems or manually entered by the operator VCF VOLUME CORRECTION FACTOR This process variable is the volume correction factor used to correct
382. ummary functions An example limit entry is as follows Type Value then Result Priority EQU 103 5 then HIGH Pri 3 Build an alarm test Step by Step Click Build in the Define Global Alarm or Define Alarm Process dialog box Select Test Type to select a test code The Alarm Test Codes dialog box appears Select the desired code and click OK Select Test Value Select the desired test value in the Select Coded Variable dialog box and click OK Click the Result Code to select the result in the Select Coded Variable dialog box Select the desired coded variable and click OK Type in a priority number from 0 to 3 0 Lowest 3 Highest Click Add when complete Repeat procedure for additional tests up to the limit of 16 defined tests Click OK to save changes to the Alarm Definition Select Coded Variable Select Coded Variable dialog box WAY Master Transitional Under WAY Slave Trip Under K Master Tripped Unloa op True Unloci rans Adv SetPt TSU Slave Unloci rans SD SetPt Tuesday Up ransfer UR Uploar ransfer In Unacknowledged Uploa ransfer Out Unauthorized Upper ransferring Undefined per lt gt Cancel ADMO003GVAE1005 79 FuelsManager Defense Alarm test value f the data format is numeric the Test Value button will be disabled Test Values have to be typed in manually in the edit box fthe data format is a coded variable the Test Value button will be enabled to choos
383. ur pr hor pel 33 MAE EEUU 33 Categories re ek OE ra e tte 34 Working with Alarm Categories sssssssse eene 34 Creating Deleting or Renaming Alarm Categories s 34 Defining Alarm Category Properties sssssssseeee 36 Creating Deleting or Renaming Tag Categories sss 37 Users and Groups ooo np Hp cte ec eae odds 38 Creating and Editing Sets second 38 Creating Deleting or Renaming a User ssssssssem 39 Defining User Properties ssssssssse eene 40 Creating and Editing User Groups sssssss eme 40 Creating Deleting or Renaming a Group sssssem 40 Adding Users tiA Group dva n e epa do dne ue cei Hed cac uan 41 ee DEN ery wi 42 Alatmiand Tag Selection pisco calla 42 Permissions ninas ar ri 42 Systemiand Fag PermissiOns misa taa dia 42 PErMISSIONS at e A oe 43 Tag permission 45 User Pryilege xe et tec eet e Deae tae qe De ai iei 46 Audit ai e bc o M Hep bo b i te eet ot feet 47 Reviewing the Event log alados 47 vi Administrator Manual Setting System Parameters sss 49 Working with Configuration ssssssss Hee 50 Opening Configuration accent ceni e d rae da e Nee aes 50 Exiting CONQUE dp ree re ree lt 50 Setting subsystem run modes sssssssssss eem 51 SYSTEM DEl cete ede dia 51 Current MOd 6 siames 52 Auto Start MOG Gs cos ictu et te dete cet ee eda ta eue aea 52
384. uration and is detailed in the Database section 34 Categories FuelsManager provides two types of categories alarms and tags Alarm categories allow the administrator to designate which alarms a particular user group will be notified of In addition the administrator can designate which printer alarms of a particular category should be printed to For larger systems it is important to categorize alarms such that only the users with responsibility for a particular area of the facility are notified of alarms for that area Without this categorization users would be consistently bothered by nuisance alarms for areas over which they have no control Tag categories allow the administrator to further segregate the FuelsManager System by defining which database points a particular user groups can see In this manner the administrator can deploy a system with a central database containing all tanks for the entire facility but then segregate the tanks based on logical areas of plant i e West Tank Farm East Tank Farm and Docks FuelsManager allows the creation of up to 32 alarm and 32 tag categories Once defined alarm and tag categories are assigned to a user group under the Access branch and only users in those groups have access to the tags in the categories Categories can be assigned to more than one group allowing an overlapping of alarm and tag categories From our example above we created categories for West Tank Farm East Tank Fa
385. ures alarms volumes flow and other variables for up to 2000 tanks Real Time Database FuelsManager maintains a real time memory resident database consisting of input values calculated values and operator entered values The system supplied is completely pre configured to fully support the required functions Refer to the Database chapter for procedures on editing the database The FuelsManager Real Time database offers the following features Volume Calculations Multiple Users Multiple databases On Line Configuration Alarms Events and Event logging Trends On Line help Volume Calculations FuelsManager performs automatic database calculations specified engineering units based on changes to database point values Changes may be due to receipt of new input data from external sources other database calculations or timed events FuelsManager includes a comprehensive set of tank volume calculations for storage tank data To review correctional methods used to calculate tank data refer to the Tank Calculations chapter Multiple Users FuelsManager supports simultaneous access to configuration data for multiple users It maintains database integrity by locking database points that are currently selected for modification Multiple Databases Each machine has its own database and data management system called FMDataManager No more than one database can be created on a single machine but users can access
386. value time stamp and status Each process data item is associated with a point and each point within the database is assigned a unique name of up to four fields Database time For data received from an FMCommManager the time stamp is established when data is received from the field device For values calculated in the database the database time stamp is based on the latest calculation The format is expressed in seconds and milliseconds and is stored in Greenwich Mean Time This time is available for assignments in graphics and reports and is also viewed in the Operate program All displays and reports correct to local time CommManager This program controls communications with all field instrumentation and provides updated process data to the FMDataManager The CommManager acquires data from remote devices and communicates this data to FMDataManager The CommManager also loads initializes and supervises individual device interface modules CommManager Functions Allocates hardware ports to devices based on system configuration Loads and manages interfaces based on configured field devices Administrator Manual FuelsManager Services Performs hardware configuration protocol translation and data conversion functions required to support the device These functions may also include downloads and uploads from the field device Converts device data from all field devices for transmission to the FMDataManager The CommManager
387. ve or copy with the Move Window and Copy Window menu items Alt C Lets you copy Administrator Manual Administering Reports FuelsManager Defense Note The Report feature is only available in the FuelsManager Professional Edition or the FuelsManager Server Edition The FuelsManager Standard Edition will not allow access to this feature For additional information about upgrading to the FuelsManager Professional Edition or the FuelsManager Server Edition please contact your Varec representative Note All of FuelsManager s standard reports are Summary reports 198 Report The Report application lets you create and edit reports as well as specify print times and print intervals Once created the reports can be opened in the Operate program The active report prints at its scheduled time even if the Operate program is not opened In Operate opened reports displaying real time data from the database you selected can be printed on demand or schedule them to print automatically You can create two types of reports The Summary report displays the only Tank point information found in one or more databases The Dynamic report displays all types of points Tank Input Output and Triggered points as defined by the report creator Make sure the DataManager is not in SHUTDOWN mode The user will not be able to access the database dialog boxes used to define values if the DataManager is in SHUTDOWN
388. viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified LEVEL MININIUM EMPTY MINIMUM TANK EMPTY LEVEL This variable is the minimum level to which the tank can be safely drained This variable is entered when configuring the tank point it can viewed but cannot be modified via Operate LEVEL MAXIMUM FILL MAXIMUM TANK FILL LEVEL This variable is the maximum level to which the tank can be safely filled This variable is entered when configuring the tank point it can be viewed but cannot be modified via Operate LEVEL UNITS LEVEL ENGINEERING UNITS This variable is the engineering units for the level water level solids level and gauge position process variables This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified TEMPERATURE MININIUM TANK MINIMUM TEMP SCALING This variable is the minimum range for the tank temperature ambient temperature and vapor temperature process variables This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified TEMPERATURE MAXIMIUM TANK MAXIMUM TEMP SCALING This variable is the maximum range for the tank temperature ambient temperature and vapor temperature process variables This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified TEMPERATURE UNITS TEMPERATURE ENGINEERING UNITS This variable is the engineering units for the tank temperature ambient temperature and vapor temperature process variables This variable can be viewed fro
389. w Level Rate Vapor Press Movement No Flow Test Mode ETA Leak Rate Leak Data Min 34 00 00 Max lt 40 00 00 Engr Units ft in 16th Cancel GAUGE ALARMS This button opens the Global Alarm Definitions dialog box allowing selection of the alarm definition to be associated with the tank point ALARM EVENT CATEGORY The Alarm Event category selection box allows selection of the appropriate pre defined alarm security category ALARM COLUMN This column displays the available tank alarms This column is for display only Administrator Manual Creating and editing tank points HIGH HIGH COLUMN HIGH COLUMN LOW COLUMN LOW LOW COLUMN HOLDOFF COLUMN ADMO0O0SGVAE 1005 STATE COLUMN This column displays the current status of all available tank alarms In addition by clicking on the appropriate cell in this column the user can change the state of the alarms Available states are Disabled Alarm limits are not cleared but no alarms of this type will be activated Enabled Alarm limits are shown and alarms are processed by FuelsManager None Alarm limits are cleared and no alarms of this type will be activated This column displays the current High High alarm limit In addition by clicking on the appropriate cell in this column the user can change the High High alarm limit High High alarm limits are available for Level and Temperature process variables only This column displays the
390. will automatically run when inserted into the PC If your PC does not support this function refer to Installing the Software Optional features and communication drivers By default the FuelsManager installation program will install all optional features and communications drivers available at the time of purchase However depending on the FuelsManager licence you purchased Standard or Professional some of these features may not be available You may want to only install features you have purchased or the ones you intend to use without all the optional drivers To do this simply select Custom during the installation process and deselect the options you do not want to install ADMO03GVAE1005 FuelsManager Defense Licensing Options The FuelsManager software suite is available as a licensed product with various levels of functionality Each edition is available pre installed on a PC or as a software license only The FuelsManager license pre installed onto a PC includes the following deliverables PC with minimum required features for workstation or server editions Electronic copies of the user and operator manuals CD with files necessary to install the FuelsManager and ViewRTU software Software protection key Windows 2000 XP license Professional Edition FuelsManager Professional is intended for medium to large sized networks where the customer needs to be able to customize the operator interface and show
391. window This section describes the basic Draw window and components This window consists of a drawing space menu bar and a toolbar The Drawing space Note Only one graphic or symbol The drawing space is the area where drawn objects are created and displayed may be opened at a time When you start Draw the drawing space is empty You have the option to use a grid to position objects or to draw with precision The Draw toolbar A toolbar is displayed at the bottom of the window The toolbar has been provided for easy access to the drawing tools It also displays the current pen brush color ADMO03GVAE1005 169 FuelsManager Defense 170 and background text color as well as a message box describing the function of the selected tool Pen and Brush Message NEEEERBHEEEEBLI 3e i Lea 0bX Y H We X 724 Y 402 Text and Background Coordinate Displays Drawing tool icons These tools are also displayed as menu options in the Add menu The functionality and procedures of each tool are described in Using the Draw Tools Pen amp brush box This box displays the default or current choice of pen line and brush fill Message window Whenever a tool is selected the Message Window provides a brief description of the selected task When no action is in progress no tool has been selected the Message Window displays Select Operation Text amp background box This box displays your current text and
392. wing From the Windows 2000 XP desktop click the Start menu and select Run Type ENSETUP substitute the E with the appropriate CD drive letter The Install Wizard will start and a message appears regarding the need to obtain a new hardware key for this version of FuelsManager to function If you have a new hardware key click OK Another message appears regarding the USB key type If your key is USB remove the key from the port and click OK The Welcome Screen will appear select Next The License Agreement will appear Review text then select the appropriate option The Customer Information screen will appear Review information and change if appropriate Forthe Install this application for option make sure the radio button next to the Anyone All Users is selected select Next The Setup Type screen appears providing Complete or Custom installation options Leave the selection set to Complete select Next The wizard confirms that you are now ready to set Program Options Click Next The next screen prompts you to enter the default units FuelsManager will use for adding new tank points Select either English FT IN 16 or Metric and click Next The next screen prompts you to select the language the software will use Select from the list and click Next The next screen prompts you to select the database type you will be using Select either Microsoft Access or Microsoft SQL Server and click
393. wn mouse button Drag the cursor to define the size of the append and release the mouse button The Append Attributes dialog box appears In this dialog box the user selects a type of button and defines the attributes for that button If you want the append to be displayed as a visible button in your graphic click on the check box and then select one of the seven choices of color The following procedures describe how to create the different types of appends Administrator Manual Draw application Append Attributes Append Attributes Dialog dialog box Database Point Data Database database system Point point tag Variable var name Type var type Type Style 9 10 11 12 13 14 E BECNBE Command v Button is Visible C Graphic C Report File Name C Help Detail Cancel Command append This option button displays an Operator Command dialog box From the dialog box the operator can issue a command or type in a new value Step by Step Select the Command option button in the Append Type group box Click Select in the Database group box The Select Database Point dialog box appears Select the appropriate database point and corresponding variable by clicking the Database Point or Variable buttons Refer to the Values section for more information Click OK This button displays an Operator Command dialog box in the Operate program The commands available via this button are defin
394. xit Upload Step by step Double click the WMSeal parameter in the CONFIG section of the Edit Point dialog If prompted for a password then the WMSeal value is currently Disabled Enter the W amp M password If prompted with an Update Seal dialog asking for confirmation then the WMsSeal value is currently Enabled Click Yes to confirm After entering the W amp M password or clearing the seal a Modify Value dialog is appears Change the value of the WMSeal parameter ADMOOSGVAE 1005 327 FuelsManager Defense W amp M Password prompt Update seal confirmation ViewRTU spreadsheet mode ViewRTU Edit Point Data 328 W amp M Password Prompt Enter Password Update Seal Are you sure you want to clear seals Yes No Once the point is sealed the parameters that could affect the data integrity are disabled and cannot be modified without removing the seal Any attempt to edit one of these parameter results in a error message box informing the user that the W amp M Seal is Enabled for this point All ViewRTU point displays indicate the disabled status in the same manner E SPREADSHEET MODE Point Edit Options Point Tag Weights amp Measures Seal Enable W amp M Checksums In order for the W amp M official to verify that the sealed point has not been tampered with the 8130 RTU calculates a WMChecksum for all points that have a WMSeal parameter This WMChecksum is calculated by performing a
395. y AHs 0 3 Gauge correction for thermal expansion HC 5078 16 Corrected gauge reading level Step5 Interpolation uses points 4 5 6 7 VL 106 731 Liquid value Step6 CORRT 1 000137 Thermal correction VLC 106 837 Liquid volume CORRP 1 000856 Pressure correction Step 7 VCF 0 98962 VLC15 105 728 ADMO03GVAE1005 309 FuelsManager Defense Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Step 13 Step 14 310 ML 53 39264 tonnes Liquid mass CORRT2 1 000188 Thermal correction CORRP2 1 00112 Pressure correction VTC 114 3603 Volume of tank corrected for temperature VV 7 5232 Vapor Volume MW 43 6899 Molecular weight TC 366 1846 Critical temperature PC 42 6585 Critical pressure TR 0 80424 Reduced temperature PR 0 23707 Reduced pressure W 0 20896 Z 0 81354 DENV 22 18134 Vapor density MV 0 16687 Vapor mass MT 53 5596 tonnes Total mass mass to weight conversion fraction 0 99777 WT 53 4404 tonnes Total weight Administrator Manual Hydrostatic amp Hybrid Tank Calculations Hydrostatic amp Hybrid Tank Calculations FuelsManager provides calculations of tank levels and volumes based on measurements at pressure of precise positions on the tank These calculation techniques fall into two main groups Hydrostatic Measurement of pressure at one or more points in the tank and the subsequent calculation of
396. y 28 Abort 55 Disabled 82 Holiday 2 February 29 Active 56 Down 83 Hour 3 March 30 Adv Low 57 Early 84 Hours 4 April 31 Adv High 58 Emer Shutdown 85 In 5 May 32 Advisory Low 59 Enable I O 86 Inactive 6 June 33 Advisory High 60 Enable Input 87 Increase 7 July 34 All 61 Enable 88 Increasing 8 August 35 Auto 62 Enabled 89 Indirect 9 September 36 Automatic 63 Error 90 Initialize 10 October 37 Average 64 Executing 91 Kill 11 November 38 Both 65 Extend 92 Late 12 December 39 Bottom 66 Failure 93 Left 13 Sunday 40 Cascade 67 Failed 94 Load 14 Monday 41 Clear 68 False 95 Local 15 Tuesday 42 Close 69 Fault 96 Locked 16 Wednesday 43 Closed 70 Flow 97 Lock 17 Thursday 44 Closing 71 Force 98 LOS 18 Friday 45 Cool 72 Forced 99 Loss of Signal 19 Saturday 46 CoolDown 73 Halted 100 Critical Zone 20 Normal 47 Days 74 Halt 101 Movement Alarm 21 Alarm 48 Decrease 75 Heat amp Cool 102 Low 22 DB Config Error 49 Decreasing 76 Heat 103 Low Low 23 Tank Calc Error 50 Default 77 Strap Error 104 Lower 24 Acknowledged 51 Direct 78 API Corr Error 105 Lowering 25 Unacknowledged 52 Disable I O 79 High 106 Lowered 26 lt 53 Disable Input 80 High High 107 Man 27 gt 54 Disable 81 Hold 108 Manual ADMO03GVAE1005 384 FuelsManager Defense 109 Minutes 139 Run 169 Unlock 199 Stowed 110 Month 140 Running 170 Up 200 Seeking Level 111 No Flow
397. yed in the palette When finished click OK The user defined colors are saved and now appear in the color palette 56 C 57 C 58 C 59 C 60 C amp C 62 C 63 Select RGB Values 0 255 Customized Palette Color OK Cancel Graphics or symbols Before you begin creating a graphic make yourself familiar with the following commands or functionality Undo Delete Object color Changing tools 174 To undo the last operation select Edit and click Undo Last If you need to erase an object click the Edit button and select the object Click Delete from the Edit menu Before drawing an object you may want to set a default color or style This process eliminates having to select the object and modify the attributes from the Edit menu item Refer to the Setting Defaults section The existing tool does not change until another button is selected Administrator Manual Draw application Opening an existing graphic or symbol 3 EPA Open Graphic File Open Graphic File X dialog box File Name GRF Directory less Mmprojecthgraphics File Name File Type SiteO verview GRF Graphic Symbol E Creating a new graphic or symbol Geometric tools The standard geometric tools provided by Draw include the line rectangle Note Holding down the SHIFT square polygon ellipse circle and arc The tools are available in the toolbar key while drawing forces
398. ym bol index The Symbol tool adds a symbol from the Symbol Index The Symbol Index displays all standard and user defined symbols Plac St ing a symbol in a graphic ep by Step Select the Symbol tool or select Add and click Symbol Click on area to define corner Drag the cursor to size the symbol and release the mouse button The Select Symbol Index Entry dialog box appears Select a symbol and click OK The symbol appears Creating a symbol Step by Step Select New Symbol from the File menu item Construct the symbol using the geometric tools as well as other symbols Save the symbol by selecting Save As from the File menu Enter the symbol name including the SYM file extension Once the symbol is saved you must generate the file Select Generate Run Files from the File menu If an entry does not exist in the Symbol Index in the Master menu item a dialog box appears asking if you want to create one Click Yes The Edit Symbol Index dialog box appears Type in a description of the symbol in the Description text box Click OK to display the Select Symbol Index Entry dialog box The symbol can now be placed in a graphic Inserting a button E The Append tool allows the user to place a button on the graphic In Operate the button can display a graphic help file Operator Command Report or Tank Detail Step by Step Select the Append tool or select Add and click Append Click on area to define corner and hold do
399. you have selected Make option to automate run file generation Step by Step Click Make A dialog box appears asking you to confirm your request to compile all altered files Click OK This option generates all files that have changed since last generated This option is useful if you are unsure of which files have been modified Build All option to automate run file generation The Build All option is useful for either initial project development or if the system Note The Build All generation database has been modified System database modification often requires re ea eid a prompt 1e cad verification of database references Index Su inust sethe eem menu to add reports to the index Step by Step Click Build All A dialog box appears asking you to confirm your request to compile all files Click OK This option unconditionally compiles all files for a project even if they have not changed since the last generation Deleting reports Deleting generated reports This action deletes the report from the Report Index Once deleted it cannot be viewed or printed in the Operate program Step by Step Select File and click Report Index Select the desired report to be deleted Click Delete Deleting saved reports This action totally deletes the report This process cannot be reversed once the RPT file is deleted Step by Step Open explorer in Windows Select the drive that contains the FuelsManager
400. you want from 1 through 9999 days This is the time period for the archive in days Any record older than this time period will be overwritten by newer data On startup ArchiveManager takes the start time the interval and the current time compares these values and determines when the archive should be updated In the following example ArchiveManager writes the first archive at 10 15 and then every ten minutes there after Start Time 00 15 Interval 10 minutes Current Time 10 08 Archive input and output points Click on this option to configure ArchiveManager to write input and output points Otherwise the system only writes Tank Points Specify archived points This option lets you specify points to be written from the real time database to the ODBC data source If this option is selected along with the Archive Input and Output Points option you can specify both tank and input output points Otherwise you can only specify tank points If then Archive Input and Output Points and all tanks for every FMDataManager are Specify Archived Points are not archived selected Archive Input and Output Points is all tanks and the Input and Output points selected and Specify Archived Points for all selected DataManagers are is not selected archived Archive Input and Output Points is only tank points selected in the Points to not selected and Specify Archived be Archived dialog are archived Points is selected Archiv
401. ys a coded variable representing the highest priority alarm for the output point Possible values depend on the format of the alarm definition associated with the output point FuelsManager calculates this alarm based on the current process value and the alarm definition configured for the output point This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified UNITS ENGINEERING UNITS This variable is the engineering units of the output point s process variable This variable is entered when configuring the output point but cannot be modified via Operate TIME TIME OF LAST VALUE UPDATE This process variable is the last time that the output point s process value was updated This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified TICKS MILLISECONDS OF LAST UPDATE This process variable is the number of milliseconds that have elapsed since output point s process value was updated This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified MAXIMUM MAXIMUM SCALING VALUE This variable is the maximum range for the output point s process value This variable is entered when configuring the output point but cannot be modified via Operate MINIMUM MINIMUM SCALING VALUE This variable is the minimum range for the output point s process value This variable is entered when configuring the output point but cannot be modified via Operate 372 Administrator Manual Triggered po

FuelsManager Defense Administrator Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents